Templated molecules and methods for using such molecules

ABSTRACT

The present invention relates to a method for synthesising templated molecules. In one aspect of the invention, the templated molecules are linked to the template which templated the synthesis thereof. The intion allows the generation of libraries which can be screened for e.g. therapeutic activity.

TECHNICAL FIELD OF THE INVENTION

Biological systems allow template-directed synthesis of α-peptides. Thepresent invention enables a system that allows template-directedsynthesis of other types of polymers as well as α-peptides. The presentinvention relates to templated molecules and templated molecules linkedto a predetermined template. The templated molecules comprise a sequenceof functional groups that are linked together. Each functional group isinitially linked to an element capable of complementing a predeterminedcoding element of the template. Following complementation of a codingelement, or complementation of a plurality of coding elements, theappended functional groups are linked and the templated moleculed isformed.

BACKGROUND

The central dogma in biology describes the flow of information as aone-way process from DNA to RNA to polypeptide. Accordingly, DNA istranscribed by a RNA polymerase into mRNA; and the mRNA is subsequentlythen translated into protein by the ribosomes and tRNAs.

The direct relation between the DNA and the protein, i.e., the fact thatthe sequence of triplet codons defines the sequence of α-amino acidresidues in a polypeptide, has allowed the development of numerousmolecular biological methods, in which the experimenter manipulates theDNA (mutagenizes, recombines, deletes, inserts, etc), and then uses invivo systems (e.g., microbes) or in vitro systems (e.g., Zubay in vitroexpression systems) to transfer the resulting changes from the DNA levelto the level of the templated polypeptide, i.e., to mutate, recombine,delete, insert, etc. the polypeptide.

Several systems have been invented that allows a flow of informationfrom polypeptide to DNA. These systems are phage display,ribosome/polysome display, peptides-on-plasmid display, and othersystems. These systems introduce a physical link between the template(e.g., DNA) and the templated molecule (polypeptide). As a result, it ispossible, from a population of templated molecules linked to thetemplate that templated the synthesis of the molecule, to first enrichfor a desired characteristic of the templated molecule (e.g., binding ofthe templated molecule to an affinity column), and then amplify theenriched population of templated molecules through amplification of itstemplate (DNA or RNA), followed by translation of the amplifiedtemplates. These methods have been used to identify polypeptides withnovel and/or improved features from libraries consisting of from amillion to about 10¹⁵ polypeptides.

The critical feature of the prior art systems is the amplifiability ofthe templated molecule, through amplification of its template. Thus,after the selection step in which molecules with the desired propertyare enriched, the enriched population may be amplified and then takenthrough yet a selection step, etc.—the process ofselection-and-amplification may be repeated many times. In this way the“noise” of the selection assay is averaged out over severalselection-and-amplification rounds, and even if the individual selectionstep only enriches e.g. 10-fold, a theoretical enrichment of 10¹² can bereached after 12 selection-and-amplification rounds. Had the moleculesnot been amplifiable, the same enrichment would have had to be achievedin a single screening step, which means that the enrichment in this onestep would have had to be 10¹², and the assay should still have the sameoverall stringency (accuracy). This is practically impossible withcurrent technologies.

In the field of chemistry, a different combinatorial approach has beendeveloped. This approach involved the parallel synthesis of millions ofrelated compounds, in an array (where each position defined a specificcompound), or on beads (where one bead carried many copies of the samecompound). The population of compounds were then screened for desiredcharacteristics. Importantly, this type of combinatorial library has nomeans for amplification, and therefore requires the use of verystringent screening methods, as explained above. Recently, the trend infor example medicinal chemistry has therefore been to use less diverse,but better characterized libraries.

Principles for tagging chemical libraries have also been developed. Forexample, systems that employed DNA oligos to tag molecule libraries havebeen developed as exemplified herein below. The tag is used as a meansof identification, but cannot be used to template the synthesis of thetagged molecule. Therefore, despite the tag, these systems still requirea very efficient screening method.

The below listed references illustrate some of the above-mentionedshort-comings of the prior art methods in the field of the invention.

EP 0 604 552 B1 relates to a method for synthesizing diverse collectionsof oligomers. The invention involves the use of an identifier tag toidentify the sequence of monomers in an oligomer. The identifier tagsfacilitate subsequent identification of reactions through which membersof a library of different synthetic compounds have been synthesised in acomponent by component fashion.

EP 0 643 778 B1 relates to encoded combinatorial chemical libraries.Each of a collection of polypeptides is labelled by an appended“genetic” tag, itself constructed by chemical synthesis, to provide a“retro-genetic” way of specifying each polypeptide.

EP 0 773 227 A1 relates to a method for preparing a new pharmaceuticaldrug or diagnostic reagent, which includes the step of screening,against a ligand or receptor, a library of different synthetic compoundsobtainable by synthesis in a component by component fashion.

U.S. Pat. No. 4,863,857 relates to a method for determining the aminoacid sequence of a polypeptide complementary to at least a portion of anoriginal peptide or protein. In one aspect the method involves: (a)determining a first nucleotide sequence of a first nucleic acid codingfor the biosynthesis of at least a portion of the original peptide orprotein; (b) ascertaining a second nucleotide sequence of a secondnucleic acid which base-pairs with the first nucleotide sequence of thefirst nucleic acid, the first and second nucleic acids pairing inantiparallel directions; and (c) determining the amino acid sequence ofthe complementary polypeptide by the second nucleotide sequence whenread in the same reading frame as the first nucleotide sequence.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,162,218 relates to polypeptide compositions having abinding site specific for a particular target ligand and further havingan active functionality proximate the binding site. The activefunctionality may be a reporter molecule, in which case the polypeptidecompositions are useful in performing assays for the target ligand. Alsodisclosed are methods for preparing polypeptides having activefunctionalities proximate their binding site, said method comprising thestep of combining the polypeptide specific for the target ligand with anaffinity label having a reactive group attached thereto. The reactivegroup is then covalently attached to an amino acid side chain proximatethe binding site and cleaved from the substrate. The substrate issubsequently eluted, leaving a moiety of the reactive group covalentlyattached to the polypeptide. The active funtionality may then beattached to the moiety.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,270,170 relates to a random peptide library constructedby transforming host cells with a collection of recombinant vectors thatencode a fusion protein comprised of a DNA binding protein and a randompeptide and also encode a binding site for the DNA binding protein. Thefusion protein can be used for screening ligands. The screening methodresults in the formation of a complex comprising the fusion proteinbound to a receptor through the random peptide ligand and to therecombinant DNA vector through the DNA binding protein.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,082 relates to a novel class of compounds, known aspeptide nucleic acids capable of binding complementary ssDNA and RNAstrands more strongly than a corresponding DNA. The peptide nucleicacids generally comprise ligands such as naturally occurring DNA basesattached to a peptide backbone through a suitable linker.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,574,141 relates to functionalized carrier materials forthe simultaneous synthesis and direct labeling of oligonucleotides asprimers for template-dependent enzymatic nucleic acid syntheses. Thepolymeric carriers are loaded with nucleic acid building blocks which inturn contain labelling groups or precursors thereof. The polymericcarrier loaded in this way serves as a solid or liquid phase for theassembly of oligonucleotides which can be used as primers for atemplate-dependent enzymatic nucleic acid synthesis such as insequencing analysis or in the polymerase chain reaction (PCR).

U.S. Pat. No. 5,573,905 relates to an encoded combinatorial chemicallibrary comprised of a plurality of bifunctional molecules having both achemical polymer and an identifier oligonucleotide sequence that definesthe structure of the chemical polymer. Also described are thebifunctional molecules of the library, and methods of using the libraryto identify chemical structures within the library that bind tobiologically active molecules in preselected binding interactions.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,597,697 relates to a screening assay for inhibitors andactivators of RNA and DNA-dependent nucleic acid polymerases. Theinvention provides methods for the identification and discovery ofagents which are inhibitors and activators of RNA and DNA-dependentnucleic acid polymerases. The essential feature of the invention is theincorporation of a functional polymerase binding site sequence (PBS)into a nucleic acid molecule which is chosen for its ability to confer adiscernible characteristic via its sequence specific activity such thatthe incorporation of the PBS renders the nucleic acid molecule afunctional template for a predetermined RNA or DNA-template directednucleic acid polymerase. In the presence of the polymerase, suitableprimer molecules, and any necessary accessory molecules, catalyticextension of the strand of nucleic acids complementary to the templateoccurs, resulting in a partial or total elimination of (or increase in)the characteristic conferring activity of the reporter-template moleculedescribed due to the antisense effects of the complementary strand orother polymerase-mediated effects.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,639,603 relates to a method for synthesizing andscreening molecular diversity by means of a general stochastic methodfor synthesizing compounds. The method can be used to generate largecollections of tagged compounds that can be screened to identify andisolate compounds with useful properties.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,698,685 relates to a morpholino-subunit combinatoriallibrary and a method for generating a compound capable of interactingspecifically with a selected macromolecular ligand. The method involvescontacting the ligand with a combinatorial library of oligomers composedof morpholino subunits with a variety of nucleobase and non-nucleobaseside chains. Oligomer molecules that bind specifically to the receptorare isolated and their sequence of base moieties is determined. Alsodisclosed is a combinatorial library of oligomers useful in the methodand novel morpholino-subunit polymer compositions.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,708,153 relates to a method for synthesizing diversecollections of tagged compounds by means of a general stochastic methodfor synthesizing random oligomers on particles. A further aspect of theinvention relates to the use of identification tags on the particles tofacilitate identification of the sequence of the monomers in theoligomer.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,719,262 relates to a novel class of compounds, known aspeptide nucleic acids, which bind complementary DNA and RNA strands morestrongly than the corresponding DNA or RNA strands, and exhibitincreased sequence specificity and solubility. The peptide nucleic acidscomprise ligands selected from a group consisting of naturally-occurringnucleobases and non-naturally-occurring nucleobases attached to apolyamide backbone, and contain alkylamine side chains.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,721,099 relates to encoded combinatorial chemicallibraries encoded with tags. Encoded combinatorial chemistry isprovided, whereby sequential synthetic schemes are recorded usingorganic molecules, which define choice of reactant, and stage, as thesame or different bit of information. Various products can be producedin the multi-stage synthesis, such as oligomers and syntheticnon-repetitive organic molecules. Particularly, pluralities ofidentifiers may be used to provide a binary or higher code, so as todefine a plurality of choices with only a few detachable tags. Theparticles may be screened for a characteristic of interest, particularlybinding affinity, where the products may be detached from the particleor retained on the particle. The reaction history of the particles whichare positive for the characteristic can be determined by the release ofthe tags and analysis to define the reaction history of the particle.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,723,598 relates to an encoded combinatorial chemicallibrary comprised of a plurality of bifunctional molecules having both achemical polymer and an identifier oligonucleotide sequence that definesthe structure of the chemical polymer. Also described are thebifunctional molecules of the library, and methods of using the libraryto identify chemical structures within the library that bind tobiologically active molecules in preselected binding interactions.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,770,358 relates to tagged synthetic oligomer librariesand a general stochastic method for synthesizing random oligomers. Themethod can be used to synthesize compounds to screen for desiredproperties. The use of identification tags on the oligomers facilitatesidentification of oligomers with desired properties.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,786,461 relates to peptide nucleic acids having aminoacid side chains. A novel class of compounds, known as peptide nucleicacids, bind complementary DNA and RNA strands more strongly than thecorresponding DNA or RNA strands, and exhibit increased sequencespecificity and solubility. The peptide nucleic acids comprise ligandsselected from a group consisting of naturally-occurring nucleobases andnon-naturally-occurring nucleobases attached to a polyamide backbone,and contain alkylamine side chains.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,789,162 relates to a method for synthesizing diversecollections of oligomers. A general stochastic method for synthesizingrandom oligomers on particles is disclosed. A further aspect of theinvention relates to the use of identification tags on the particles tofacilitate identification of the sequence of the monomers in theoligomer.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,840,485 relates to topologically segregated, encodedsolid phase libraries. Libraries of synthetic test compounds areattached to separate phase synthesis supports that also contain codingmolecules that encode the structure of the synthetic test compound. Themolecules may be polymers or multiple nonpolymeric molecules. Thesynthetic test compound can have backbone structures with linkages suchas amide, urea, carbamate (i.e., urethane), ester, amino, sulfide,disulfide, or carbon-carbon, such as alkane and alkene, or anycombination thereof. The synthetic test compound can also be molecularscaffolds, or other structures capable of acting as a scaffolding. Theinvention also relates to methods of synthesizing such libraries and theuse of such libraries to identify and characterize molecules of interestfrom among the library of synthetic test compounds.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,843,701 relates to systematic polypeptide evolution byreverse translation and a method for preparing polypeptide ligands oftarget molecules wherein candidate mixtures comprised of ribosomecomplexes or mRNA:polypeptide copolymers are partitioned relative totheir affinity to the target and amplified to create a new candidatemixture enriched in ribosome complexes or mRNA:polypeptide copolymerswith an affinity to the target.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,846,839 relates to a method for hard-tagging an encodedsynthetic library. Disclosed are chemical encryption methods fordetermining the structure of compounds formed in situ on solid supportsby the use of specific amine tags which, after compound synthesis, canbe deencrypted to provide the structure of the compound found on thesupport.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,922,545 relates to methods and compositions foridentifying peptides and single-chain antibodies that bind topredetermined receptors or epitopes. Such peptides and antibodies areidentified by methods for affinity screening of polysomes displayingnascent peptides.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,958,703 relates to methods for screening libraries ofcomplexes for compounds having a desired property such as the capacityto bind to a cellular receptor. The complexes in such libraries comprisea compound under test, a tag recording at least one step in synthesis ofthe compound, and a tether susceptible to modification by a reportermolecule. Modification of the tether is used to signify that a complexcontains a compound having a desired property. The tag can be decoded toreveal at least one step in the synthesis of such a compound

U.S. Pat. No. 5,986,053 relates peptide nucleic acid complexes of twopeptide nucleic acid strands and one nucleic acid strand. Peptidenucleic acids and analogues of peptide nucleic acids are used to formduplex, triplex, and other structures with nucleic acids and to modifynucleic acids. The peptide nucleic acids and analogues thereof also areused to modulate protein activity through, for example, transcriptionarrest, transcription initiation, and site specific cleavage of nucleicacids.

U.S. Pat. No. 5,998,140 relates to methods and compositions for formingcomplexes intracellularly between dsDNA and oligomers of heterocycles,aliphatic amino acids, particularly omega-amino acids, and a polar endgroup. By appropriate choice of target sequences and composition of theoligomers, complexes are obtained with low dissociation constants.

U.S. Pat. No. 6,060,596 relates to an an encoded combinatorial chemicallibrary comprised of a plurality of bifunctional molecules having both achemical polymer and an identifier oligonucleotide sequence that definesthe structure of the chemical polymer. Also described are thebifunctional molecules of the library, and methods of using the libraryto identify chemical structures within the library that bind tobiologically active molecules in preselected binding interactions.

U.S. Pat. No. 6,080,826 relates to Template-directed ring-closingmetathesis and ring-opening metathesis polymerization of functionalizeddienes. Functionalized cyclic olefins and methods for making the sameare disclosed. Methods include template-directed ring-closing metathesis(“RCM”) of functionalized acyclic dienes and template-directeddepolymerization of functionalized polymers possessing regularly spacedsites of unsaturation. Although the template species may be any anion,cation, or dipolar compound, cationic species, especially alkali metals,are preferred. Functionalized polymers with regularly spaced sites ofunsaturation and methods for making the same are also disclosed. Onemethod for synthesizing these polymers is by ring-opening metathesispolymerization (“ROMP”) of functionalized cyclic olefins.

U.S. Pat. No. 6,127,154 relates to compounds which possess acomplementary structure to a desired molecule, such as a biomolecule, inparticular polymeric or oligomeric compounds, which are useful as invivo or in vitro diagnostic and therapeutic agents are provided. Also,various methods for producing such compounds are provided.

U.S. Pat. No. 6,140,493 relates to a method for synthesizing diversecollections of oligomers. A general stochastic method for synthesizingrandom oligomers is disclosed and can be used to synthesize compounds toscreen for desired properties. Identification tags on the oligomersfacilitates identification of oligomers with desired properties.

U.S. Pat. No. 6,140,496 relates to building blocks for preparingoligonucleotides carrying non-standard nucleobases that can pair withcomplementary non-standard nucleobases so as to fit the Watson-Crickgeometry. The resulting base pair joins a monocyclic six membered ringpairing with a fused bicyclic heterocyclic ring system composed of afive member ring fused with a six member ring, with the orientation ofthe heterocycles with respect to each other and with respect to thebackbone chain analogous to that found in DNA and RNA, but with apattern of hydrogen bonds holding the base pair together different fromthat found in the AT and GC base pairs (a “non-standard base pair”).

U.S. Pat. No. 6,143,497 relates to a method for synthesizing diversecollections of random oligomers on particles by means of a generalstochastic method. Also disclosed are identification tags located on theparticles and used to facilitate identification of the sequence of themonomers in the oligomer.

U.S. Pat. No. 6,165,717 relates to a general stochastic method forsynthesizing random oligomers on particles. Also disclosed areidentification tags located on the particles to facilitateidentification of the sequence of the monomers in the oligomer.

U.S. Pat. No. 6,175,001 relates to functionalized pyrimidine nucleosidesand nucleotides and DNA's incorporating same. The modified pyrimidinenucleotides are derivatized at C5 to contain a functional group thatmimics the property of a naturally occurring amino acid residues. DNAmolecules containing the modified nucleotides are also provided.

U.S. Pat. No. 6,194,550 B1 relates to systematic polypeptide evolutionby reverse translation, in particular a method for preparing polypeptideligands of target molecules wherein candidate mixtures comprised ofribosome complexes or mRNA:polypeptide copolymers are partitionedrelative to their affinity to the target and amplified to create a newcandidate mixture enriched in ribosome complexes or mRNA:polypeptidecopolymers with an affinity to the target.

U.S. Pat. No. 6,207,446 B1 relates to methods and reagents for theselection of protein molecules that make use of RNA-protein fusions.

U.S. Pat. No. 6,214,553 B1 relates to methods and reagents for theselection of protein molecules that make use of RNA-protein fusions.

WO 91/05058 relates to a method for the cell-free synthesis andisolation of novel genes and polypeptides. An expression unit isconstructed onto which semi-random nucleotide sequences are attached.The semi-random nucleotide sequences are first transcribed to produceRNA, and then translated under conditions such that polysomes areproduced. Polysomes which bind to a substance of interest are thenisolated and disrupted; and the released mRNA is recovered. The mRNA isused to construct cDNA which is expressed to produce novel polypeptides.

WO 92/02536 relates to a method for preparing polypeptide ligands oftarget molecules wherein candidate mixtures comprised of ribosomecomplexes or mRNA:polypeptide copolymers are partitioned relative totheir affinity to the target and amplified to create a new candidatemixture enriched in ribosome complexes or mRNA:polypeptide copolymerswith an affinity to the target.

WO 93/03172 relates to a method for preparing polypeptide ligands oftarget molecules wherein candidate mixtures comprised of ribosomecomplexes or mRNA:polypeptide copolymers are partitioned relative totheir affinity to the target and amplified to create a new candidatemixture enriched in ribosome complexes or mRNA:polypeptide copolymerswith an affinity to the target.

WO 93/06121 relates to a general stochastic method for synthesizingrandom oligomers on particles. Also disclosed are identification tagslocated on the particles to facilitate identification of the sequence ofthe monomers in the oligomer.

WO 00/47775 relates to a method for generating RNA-protein fusionsinvolving a high-salt post-translational step.

Additional references of relevance for present invention includes Bainet al. Nature, vol. 356, 1992, 537-539; Barbas et al. Chem. Int. Ed.vol. 37, 1998. 2872-2875; Benner Reviews; Blanco et al. AnalyticalBiochemistry vol. 163, 1987, 537-545; Brenner et al. Proc. Natl. Acad.Sci. Vol. 89, 1992, 5381-5383; Bresler et al. Biochimica et BiophysicaActa vol. 155, 1968, 465-475; Dewey et al. J. Am. Chem. Soc. Vol. 117,1995, 8474-8475; Dietz et al. Photochemistry and photobiology vol. 49,1989, 121-129; Gryaznov et al. J. Am. Chem. Soc. vol. 115, 1993,3808-3809; Gryaznov et al. Nucleic Acids Research vol. 21, 1993,1403-1408; Elmar Gocke Mutation Research vol. 248, 1991, 135-143;Haeuptle et al. Nucleic Acids Research, 14, 1986, 1427-1448; Hamburgeret al. Biochimica et Biophysica Acta, 213, 1970, 115-123; Hamza A.EI-Dorry Biochimica et Biophysica Acta vol. 867, 1986, 252-255;Herrera-Estrella et al. The EMBO Journal, 7, 1988, 4055-4062; Heywood etal. Biochemistry vol. 57, 1967, 1002-1009; Heywood et al. J. Biol. Chem.Vol. 7, 1968, 3289-3296; Hooper et al. Eur. J. Clin. Microbiol. Infect.Dis. Vol. 10, 1991, 223-231; Houdebine et al. Eur. J. Biochem., 63,1976, 9-14; Johnson et al. Biochemistry vol. 25, 1986, 5518-5525;Kinoshita et al. Nucleic Acids Symposium Series vol. 34, 1995, 201-202;Leon et al. Biochemistry vol. 26, 1987, 7113-7121; Maclean et al. Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci. USA vol. 94, 1997, 2805-2810; Mattheakis et al. Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci. USA vol. 91, 1994, 9022-9026; Menninger et al.Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy, 21, 1982, 811-818; Menninger.Biochimica et Biophysica Acta, 240, 1971, 237-243; Mirzabekov Methods inEnzymology vol. 170, 1989, 386-408; Nikolaev et al. Nucleic AcidsResearch vol. 16, 1988, 519-535; Noren et al. Science vol. 24, 1989,182-188; Pashev et al. TIBS vol. 16, 1991, 323-326; Pargellis et al. TheJournal of Biological Chemistry, 263, 1988, 7678-7685; Pansegrau et al.The journal of biological chemistry vol. 265, 1990, 10637-10644; Peeterset al. FEBS Lett. vol. 36, 1973, 217-221; Roberts et al. Proc. Natl.Acad. Sci. USA vol. 94, 1997, 12297-12302; Schmidt et al. Nucleic AcidsResearch vol. 25, 1997, 4797-4802; Schutz et al. Nucleic Acids Research,4, 1977, 71-84; Solomon et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA vol. 82, 1985,6470-6474; Sugino et al. Nucleic Acids Research, 8, 1980, 3865-3874;Tarasow et al. Nucleic Acids Sciences vol. 48, 1998, 29-37; Wiegand etal. Chemistry and Biology vol. 4, 1997, 675-683; and Wower et al. Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci. USA., 86, 1989, 5232-5236.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention solves in a general way the above-mentionedproblems and short-comings of the prior art. The invention relates to asystem for templating molecules in general, such as polymers, and thetemplate enables templated synthesis of the polymers, allowing inpreferred embodiments amplification of the polymer. The system thereforehas the same overall characteristics as the natural system (informationflow from template to templated molecule), as well as thecharacteristics of the recently invented ribosome-mediated systems(e.g., phage display), namely the physical link between template andtemplated molecule. However, the present invention does not involveribosomes or tRNAs, and therefore allows templating of a wide array ofdifferent polymers, including polymers that cannot be synthesised in anatural system based on ribosome-mediated translation of nucleic acids.

The templating process of the invention has significant advantages overthe prior art. As the amplification of the recovered molecules (i.e.,their templates) can be done by a parallel process in which all therecovered templates are present in the same compartment (e.g., reagenttube or microtiter-plate well), and where the molecules areproportionately amplified, no human intervention such as sequencing ofthe individual molecules is necessary. This is a huge advantage since atypical recovery after a first selection round involves e.g. 10¹⁰different molecules, when the starting material is a library of e.g.10¹⁵ molecules. When working with such high numbers of molecules, it ispractically impossible to “amplify” 10¹⁰ molecules by copying themolecules one-at-a-time, i.e., to “amplify” the molecules in a serialprocess.

The present invention generally relates to templated molecules andcomplexes comprising such molecules linked to a template that hasdirected the template-directed synthesis of the templated molecule. Inone aspect, the templated molecules and the complexes are obtainableaccording to the methods of the present invention.

The present invention also discloses methods for synthesizing suchtemplated molecules and/or complexes, methods for targeting suchmolecules and/or complexes to a target species. The templated moleculesare preferably synthesised from building blocks comprising a functionalentity comprising a functional group and reactive group capable ofcovalently linking functional groups and forming a templated molecule.The functional entity of a building block is separated from acomplementing element by a cleavable linker, or a selectively cleavablelinker. The complementing element is capable of complementing apredetermined coding element of the template, thus ensuring a one-to-onerelationship between a coding element—or a complementing element—and afunctional entity, or a functional group.

Also disclosed are methods for identifying the sequence of functionalgroups of a templated molecule, as well as methods for therapy anddiagnostic methods exploiting the templated molecules according to theinvention.

The methods of the invention do not involve ribosome mediatedtranslation of ribonucleic acids. Also, when the templated molecules arepeptides comprising either i) exclusively α-amino acids, or ii)substantially exclusively naturally occurring amino acids, such as atleast 80 percent, for example 90 percent, such as 95 percent, naturallyoccurring amino acids, the template does not comprise or essentiallyconsist of a ribonucleic acid.

A template denotes a sequence of coding elements, wherein each codingelement is linked to a neighbouring coding element. A complementingtemplate denotes a sequence of complementing elements, wherein eachcomplementing element is linked to neighbouring complementing element.

Following complementation of a coding element by a complementingelement, or complementation of a plurality of coding elements by aplurality of complementing elements, each complementing element willdefine an appended functional group capable of being linked—withoutforming part of the complementing template itself—to a neighbouringfunctional group defined by a neighbouring complementing element.Accordingly, in one preferred embodiment, the functional group does notparticipate in the complementation of a coding element in so far as nodirect reaction or hybridization takes place between the coding elementand the functional group. The term “reaction” means any reactive contactthat results in the formation of an interaction—covalent ornon-covalent—between the functional group and the coding element. Inanother embodiment, the functional group of a templated molecule formspart of the complementing template.

As each complementing element is capable of recognising a predeterminedcoding element of a template, and as each coding element in turn definesa predetermined functional group, the sequence of coding elements of thetemplate will template the synthesis of the templated moleculecomprising a predetermined sequence of covalently linked functionalgroups.

According to preferred embodiments of the present invention, it ispossible

i) to link a templated molecule comprising a plurality of functionalgroups to the template that templated the synthesis of the templatedmolecule,ii) to link neighbouring functional groups simultaneously with thecomplementation of neighbouring coding elements by complementingelements defining said functional groups,iii) to link neighbouring functional groups after the complementation ofneighbouring coding elements by complementing elements defining saidfunctional groups,iv) to link neighbouring functional groups simultaneously with theformation of a complementing template,v) to link neighbouring functional groups after the formation of acomplementing template,vi) to cleave one or more links between complementing elements of acomplementing template without cleaving links between functional groupsof a templated molecule, and vice versa, andvii) to cleave the at least one linker separating the at least onefunctional entity from the at least one complementing element of abuilding block without cleaving the complementing template,viii) to cleave the at least one linker separating the at least onefunctional entity from the at least one complementing element of abuilding block without cleaving the link between the functional groupsof the templated molecule, andix) to cleave the at least one linker separating the at least onefunctional entity from the at least one complementing element of abuilding block without cleaving the complementing template and withoutcleaving the link between the functional groups of the templatedmolecule.

Provided that complementation of neighbouring coding elements isachieved, the neighbouring, functional groups of the templated moleculeare capable of being linked irrespective of whether a complementingtemplate is formed. Also, it is possible to link neighbouring functionalgroups and subsequently cleave the cleavable linker separating thefunctional entity from the complementing element defining saidfunctional entity without cleaving the link between neighbouringfunctional groups of a templated molecule. Cleavable linkers arecleavable under conditions wherein a selectively cleavable linker is notcleavable. Accordingly, it is possible to cleave the cleavable linkerslinking complementing elements and functional groups in a templatedmolecule without at the same time cleaving selectively cleavable linkerslinking—in the same templated molecule—a subset of complementingelements and functional groups. It is thus possible to obtain a complexcomprising a templated molecule and the template that has directed thetemplate-mediated synthesis of the templated molecule, wherein thetemplate and the templated molecule are linked by one or more,preferably one, selectively cleavable linker(s).

The generation of additional templated molecules can be directed by thetemplate without any need for sequencing or any other form ofcharacterisation. This is not possible using prior art “tags” generatedby step-by-step synthesis. Accordingly, the complexes of the inventioncomprising a templated molecule linked to a template makes it possibleto rapidly select and amplify desirable, templated molecules.

In a first aspect, the present invention provides a method forsynthesising a templated molecule comprising a plurality of functionalgroups, said method comprising the steps of

-   -   i) providing at least one template comprising a sequence of n        coding elements,        -   wherein each coding element comprises at least one            recognition group capable of recognising a predetermined            complementing element, and        -   wherein n is an integer of more than 1,    -   ii) providing a plurality of building blocks, wherein each        building block comprises        -   a) at least one complementing element comprising at least            one recognition group capable of recognising a predetermined            coding element,        -   b) at least one functional entity comprising at least one            functional group and at least one reactive group, and        -   c) at least one linker separating the at least one            functional entity from the at least one complementing            element,    -   iii) contacting each of said coding elements with a        complementing element capable of recognising said coding        element,    -   iv) optionally, obtaining a complementing element, and    -   v) obtaining a templated molecule comprising covalently linked,        functional groups by linking, by means of a reaction involving        reactive groups, a functional group of at least one functional        entity to a functional group of another, functional entity,        -   wherein the templated molecule is capable of being linked by            means of a linker to the complementing template or template            that templated the synthesis of the templated molecule, and        -   wherein the synthesis of the templated molecule does not            involve ribosome mediated translation of a nucleic acid.

In another aspect, the present invention relates to a templatedmolecule, a plurality of the same or different templated molecules,wherein preferably each of the templated molecules are obtainable by amethod for synthesizing templated molecules according to the presentinvention.

As the templated molecule and the template are separate entities capableof being linked by a single linker, the invention also relates tocomplexes comprising a templated molecule liked to the template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule. The template capableof templating the synthesis of the templated molecule comprises either asequence of coding elements, or a sequence of complementing elements, inwhich case the template is a complementing template. Accordingly, it ispossible to cleave links between functional groups of a templatedmolecule without cleaving a complementing template or template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule.

In another aspect there is provided a method for synthesising a complexcomprising a templated molecule linked to the template that templatedthe synthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the templated moleculeand the complex comprising the templated molecule linked to the templatethat templated the synthesis of the templated molecule are obtainable bythe method for synthesis thereof according to the invention.

In further aspects of the invention there is provided a compositioncomprising a plurality of templated molecules, wherein each or at leastsome of the templated molecules are linked to the template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule, in which case thereis provided a plurality of complexes each comprising a templatedmolecule linked to the template that templated the synthesis of thetemplated molecule. The compositions may also comprise a templatedmolecule and—unlinked thereto—the template that templated the synthesisof the templated molecule.

The amplifiability of the templated molecules of a library provides alibrary with a unique feature. This unique feature involves e.g. that ahuge number of templated molecules can be screened by taking the librarythrough repetitive processes of selection-and-amplification, in aparallel process where the library of molecules is treated as a whole,and where it is not necessary to characterise individual molecules (oreven the population of molecules) between selection-and-amplificationrounds.

It is possible according to various preferred embodiments of theinvention to screen e.g. more than or about 10³ different templatedmolecules, such as more than or about 10⁴ different templated molecules,for example more than or about 10⁵ different templated molecules, suchas more than or about 10⁶ different templated molecules, for examplemore than or about 10⁷ different templated molecules, such as more thanor about 10⁸ different templated molecules, for example more than orabout 10⁹ different templated molecules, such as more than or about 10¹⁰different templated molecules, for example more than or about 10¹¹different templated molecules, such as more than or about 10¹² differenttemplated molecules, for example more than or about 10¹³ differenttemplated molecules, such as more than or about 10¹⁴ different templatedmolecules, for example more than or about 10¹⁵ different templatedmolecules, such as more than or about 10¹⁶ different templatedmolecules, for example more than or about 10¹⁷ different templatedmolecules, such as more than or about 10¹⁸ different templatedmolecules.

As one may perform many repetitive rounds of parallel selection andparallel amplification processes, it is possible to enrich only e.g. 100fold in each round, and still get a very efficient enrichment, of e.g.10¹⁴ fold over a number of selection-and-amplification rounds(theoretically a 10¹⁴ fold enrichment is obtained after seven roundseach enriching 100 fold). To obtain a similar enrichment of 10¹⁴ foldusing a non-amplifiable library, would require screening conditionsallowing 10¹⁴ fold enrichment in one “round”- and this is notpractically possible using state-of-the-art screening technologies. Thetemplated molecules and/or the templates can furthermore be bound to asolid or semi-solid support.

In even further aspects the methods of the invention—individually or asa combination—relates to

a method for screening a composition of complexes or templated moleculespotentially having a predetermined activity,a method for assaying the predetermined activity potentially associatedwith the complexes or the templated molecules,a method for selecting complexes or templated molecules having apredetermined activity,a method for amplifying the template that templated the synthesis of thetemplated molecule having, or potentially having a predeterminedactivity, anda method for amplifying the template that templated the synthesis of thetemplated molecule having, or potentially having, a predeterminedactivity, said method comprising the further step of obtaining thetemplated molecule in an at least two-fold increased amount.

In yet another aspect there is provided a method for altering thesequence of a templated molecule, including generating a templatedmolecule comprising a novel or altered sequence of functional groups,wherein the method comprises the step of mutating the template thattemplated the synthesis of the original templated molecule. The methodpreferably comprises the steps of

-   i) providing a first template capable of templating the first    templated molecule, or a plurality of such templates capable of    templating a plurality of first templated molecules,-   ii) modifying the sequence of the first template, or the plurality    or first templates, and generating a second template, or a plurality    of second templates,    -   wherein said second template(s) is capable of templating the        synthesis of a second templated molecule, or a plurality of        second templated molecules,    -   wherein said second templated molecule(s) comprises a sequence        of covalently linked, functional groups that is not identical to        the sequence of functional groups of the first templated        molecule(s), and optionally-   iii) templating by means of said second template(s) a second    templated molecule, or a plurality of such second templated    molecules.

The above-mentioned method exploits that a templated synthesis (FIG. 1)in one embodiment involves a single-stranded, modifiable intermediate inthe form of a template. In the case where this template comprises anucleotide strand comprising deoxyribonucleotides or ribonucleotides,most molecular biological methods can be applied to modify the template,and therefore to modify the templated polymer.

The below-mentioned list of molecular biological methods that can beapplied to the templated polymers of this invention is therefore farfrom comprehensive, but merely serves to illustrate that almost anyrelevant molecular biological method can be applied to the templatedpolymers as a result of the present invention.

In cases where nucleotides with non-natural bases are part of thetemplate, some of the molecular biology methodologies may not beapplicable. This will primarily depend on the substrate specificty ofthe enzymes involved (e.g., the Taq DNA polymerase in a PCR reaction;restriction enzyme in USE protocol; etc). Also, methods that involve anin vivo step (e.g., transformation of E. coli for amplification ofplasmid DNA) may only have a limited feasibility for those nucleotides.Several nucleotides with non-natural bases are, however, known to beincorporated into oligonucleotides by several wildtype and mutantpolymerases, and therefore, the use of nucleotides with non-naturalbases does not seriously limit the number of in vitro molecular biologymethods that can be applied to templated molecules.

TABLE 1 Molecular Biology applicable to the templated polymers of thisinvention In vivo and in vitro amplification, recombination andmutagenesis Kunkel site-directed mutagenesis, using one or multiple(e.g., 50) different mutagenic oligos at below-saturatingconcentrations, i.e., generating a combinatorial library USE (UniqueSite-directed Elimination), using one or multiple (e.g., 50 differentmutagenic oligos) at below-saturating concentrations, i.e., generating acombinatorial library PCR (Polymerase Chain Reaction) LCR (Ligase ChainReaction) PCR shuffling, including family shuffling (shuffling sequencescontaining blocks with particular homology), and directed shufflingwhere oligos are spiked into the reaction to direct the shufflingprocess in a certain direction Other types of shuffling, e.g. homologousrecombination in yeast; shuffling protocols as developed at thecompanies Phylos, Energy Biosystems, Diversa and by Frances Arnold.Cassette mutagenesis Other polymerase- or PCR-based methods, e.g.,overlap extension, gene synthesis, and error-prone PCR Chemical orUV-induced mutagenesis Wildtype or variant template synthesis andtranslation into templated polymer (wildtype in this respect means thetemplate sequence that will template the synthesis of the known(“wildtype”) polymer; variant in this respect means a partly randomisedor spiked template sequence that will template the synthesis of avariant of the known polymer) Specific cleavage by restriction enzymesLigation by DNA or RNA ligases; “gene splicing” Affinity selections(using the template-templated polymer complex) Sequencing Arraying thepolymers on “DNA chips”, by using the template as a tag that binds a DNAarray

Instead of isolating the (underivatized) template strand, it may bedesirable to apply the molecular biological methods to either thetemplate-complementing template double-helix or to the derivatizedcomplementing template. The derivatized template may at this pointcontain unpolymerized functional entities; polymerized functionalentities; or a trace left behind from the cleaving of the linker thatconnected the functional entity and the complementing element. Manypolymerases and other enzymes are known to accept DNA- or RNA-templateswith a high degree of derivatization. Therefore, many in vitro methodsinvolving polymerases and other enzymes are likely to be feasible usingthe (derivatized) complementing template as starting point. It willprimarily depend on the substrate- or template specificity of theenzymes involved whether it will be feasible to use the derivatizedcomplementing template as a starting point for the molecular biologicalmethod in question. The skilled person will be capable of evaluating thefeasibility of various practical approaches in this respect.

The present invention also pertains to building blocks used forsynthesising the templated molecule and to complexes comprising suchbuilding blocks. In another aspect there is provided the use of abuilding block for the synthesis of a templated molecule according tothe invention. In a preferred embodiment of this aspect, the templatedmolecule comprises or essentially consists of a molecular entity capableof binding to another molecular entity in the form of a target molecularentity or a binding partner.

The templated molecule is preferably a medicament capable of beingadministered in a pharmaceutically effective amount in a pharmaceuticalcomposition to an individual and treating a clinical condition in saidindividual in need of such treatment.

In other aspects of the invention there are provided a pesticidalcomposition, an insecticidal composition, a bacteriocidal composition,and a fungicidal composition, as well as methods for preparing suchcompositions and uses thereof, wherein each of said compositionscomprise a templated molecule according to the invention in an amounteffective to achieve a desired effect.

In still further aspects there is provided a method for identifying apharmaceutical agent, or a diagnostic agent, wherein said methodcomprises the step of screening a plurality of drug targets with atleast one predetermined, templated molecule, and identifying apharmaceutical agent, or a diagnostic agent, in the form of candidatetemplated molecules capable of interacting with said drug targets.

In yet another aspect there is provided a method for identifying atarget, including a drug target, wherein said method comprises the stepof screening a plurality of ligands or receptor moieties with at leastone predetermined, templated molecule, and identifying drug targets inthe form of ligands or receptor moieties capable of interacting withsaid templated molecules.

The present invention also relates to any isolated or purified templatedmolecule having an affinity for a predetermined target, including a drugtarget, as well as to targets, including drug targets, in the form ofligands, receptor moieties, enzymes, cell surfaces, solid or semi-solidsurfaces, as well as any other physical or molecular entity or surfacehaving an affinity for a predetermined templated molecule.

In even further aspects of the invention there is provided a method fortreatment of an individual in need thereof, said method comprises thestep of administering to the individual a pharmaceutically effectiveamount of a molecule identified by a method of the present invention andhaving an affinity for a predetermined target, including a drug target.

In a still further aspect there is provided a method for treatment of anindividual in need thereof, said method comprises the step ofadministering to the individual a pharmaceutically effective amount ofan isolated or purified ligand or receptor moiety having an affinity fora predetermined templated molecule according to the invention. Theisolated or purified ligand or receptor moiety is preferably identifiedby the above-mentioned method of identification of the invention.

The present invention may be performed in accordance with severalembodiments. In a first embodiment the step of contacting thecomplementing element with the coding element involves one or morepolymerases or transcriptases. Thus, in accordance with this embodimentthe building blocks is a nucleotide derivative. In one aspect of thisfirst embodiment, the building blocks are mononucleotides, however thebuilding blocks may be a di- or oligonucleotides. While mononucleotidesare the natural substrate for polymerases and transscriptses,oligonucleotides are incorporable in accordance with the method of WO01/16366. The mono- or oligonucleotide derivative serves as thecomplementing element. One or more linker(s) is/are attached at one endto the mono- or oligonucleotide derivative and at the other end to afunctional entity. Especially, in the case in which the complementingelement is a mononucleotide derivative, it is preferred that the linkeris attached so that the functional entity is projecting into the majorgroove of a double stranded helix to allow adjacent functional entitiesto form a linkage to each other.

In a second embodiment of the invention, building blocks comprising anmono- or oligonucleotide as complementing element are chemically ligatedtogether. Several methods for chemical ligation are know in the art,such as the 5′-phosphoimidazolid method (Visscher, J.; Schwartz, A. W.Journal of Molecular Evolution 1988, 28, 3-6. And Zhao, Y.; Thorson, J.S. J. Org. Chem. 1998, 63, 7568-7572) or the 3′-phosphothioate method(Alvarez et al. J. Org. Chem. (1999), 64, 6319-28 Pirrung et al. J. Org.Chem. (1998), 63, 241-46).

In a third embodiment of the invention, building blocks comprising anoligonucleotide as complementing element is ligated together using aligase enzyme.

In a fourth embodiment of the invention, the building blocks comprise anoligonucleotide as complementing element, said oligonucleotide having asufficient length to adhere to the template without the need forligation to a primer or an other complementing element.

The building blocks are in general adapted to the method used forcontacting the complementing element with the template and production ofthe templated molecule. As an example, the linker may be relativelyshort when a mononucleotide derivative is used, while the linker needsto be considerable longer when an oligonucleotide is used as buildingblock.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

The following symbols are used in the following figures to indicategeneral characteristics of the system: In FIGS. 1, 7C, 8C, 11, 11 ex. 1,12, 13, 14, 14 ex. 1-2, 15, 15 ex. 1-7, 17, 17 ex. 1, 17, 17 ex. 1-2,19, 19 ex. 1-3, 20, 21, and 22A, a long horizontal line symbolizes atemplate, complementing template or the complex of the template with thecomplementing template. For clarity, in some of the figures only thepolymerization step, not the activation step, has been included. Rxdenotes functional groups.

FIG. 1. Chemical Display of Templated Molecules—The principle.

The protocol for the chemical display of templated molecules can bedivided into 6 steps, i) incorporation, ii) polymerization, iii)activation, iv) selection/screening, v) amplification, and vi)characterization. Incorporation involves the incorporation of buildingblocks into the complementing template, which sequence is determined bythe template.

Incorporation may be mediated by enzymes such as polymerase or ligase.The template comprises primer binding sites at one or both ends(allowing the amplification of the template). The remaining portion ofthe template may be of random, partly random or predetermined sequence.The complementing elements preferably comprises of a functional entity,a complementing element and a linker connecting the functional entityand the complementing element. Detailed examples of selectedcomplementing elements, their incorporation, polymerization andactivation are shown in (FIGS. 7 and 8).

Polymerization involves reactions between the incorporated buildingblocks, thereby forming covalent bonds between the functional entities,in addition to the functional bonds that already exist between thecomplementing elements.

Activation involves cleaving some, all but one, or all of the linkersthat connect the sequence of functional entities to the template orcomplementing template having templated the templated moleculecomprising the functional entities. Activation may also involveseparating the template and the complementing template without cleavingthe linkers connecting the functional entities and the complementingtemplate.

Selection or screening involves enriching the population oftemplate-templated molecule pairs for a desired property.

Amplification involves producing more of the template-templated moleculepairs, by amplification of the template or complementing template, andproducing more of the template-templated molecule pairs, for furtherrounds of selection/screening, or for sequencing or othercharacterization.

Cloning and sequencing involves the cloning of the isolated templates orcomplementing templates, followed by characterization. In some cases, itmay be desirable to sequence the population of isolated templates orcomplementing templates, wherefore cloning of individual sequences arenot required.

FIGS. 2A and 2B. An expanded set of base pairs.

The figure discloses a set of natural and non-natural base pairs thatobeys Watson-Crick hydrogen-bonding rules. The base pairs are disclosedin U.S. Pat. No. 6,037,120, incorporated herein by reference.

FIG. 3. A monomer building block.

A building block comprises or essentially consists of a functionalentity, connected through a selectively cleavable linker to acomplementing element. Each complementing element has two reactivegroups (type I), which may react with two other complementing elements.The complementing element contains a recognition group that interactswith a complementary coding element (coding element not shown). Thefunctional entity in this example comprises or essentially consists oftwo reactive groups (type II), which may react with reactive groups ofother functional entitie(s), and a functional group, also called afunctionality. The reactive groups of type II, and the molecular moietythat connects them, will become (part of) the backbone in the resultingencoded polymer.

FIG. 4. A monomer building block with only one reactive group type II.

A building block comprises or essentially consists of a functionalentity, connected through a selectively cleavable linker to acomplementing element. Each complementing element has two reactivegroups (type I), which may react with other complementing elements. Thecomplementing element contains a recognition group that interacts with acomplementary coding element (coding element not shown). The functionalentity in this example comprises or essentially consists of a reactivegroup type II, which may react with reactive groups of other functionalentities, and a functional group, also called a functionality. Thereactive group type II will become (part of) the backbone in theresulting encoded polymer.

FIG. 5A-D. Building blocks and the polymers resulting from templatedirected incorporation of the building blocks and their polymerizationand activation FIG. 3 discloses a detailed description of features ofindividual building blocks. Three different complementing elements areshown, each linked to a specific functional entity. The right half ofthe figure includes the template which directs the incorporation of thebuilding blocks by complementary base pairing.

FIG. 5A). The reactive groups type I of the complementing element react,whereby a part of the reactive group is lost (e.g., PPi in theincorporation of nucleoside triphosphates). In the shown example, thepolymerization of reactive groups type II also results in loss of partof the reactive groups. The backbone of the resulting polymer comprisesor essentially consists of part of the original reactive groups type IIand the molecular entity that connects the reactive groups. Part of thelinker remains attached to the functional entity.

FIG. 5B). The reactive groups type I react as in (A). The reactivegroups type II do not react directly, but rather a “bridging molecule”is added. Upon reaction with this bridging molecule, part of thereactive group is lost. The cleavable linker used in this example is aso-called “traceless linker” and therefore the functional entity isreleased with no trace of the linker molecule.

FIG. 5C). Incorporation in this case does not involve coupling of theindividual complementing elements, i.e., does not lead to the reactionof the reactive groups type I. The reactive groups type II react withbridging molecules as in (B).

FIG. 5D). The functional entity contains only one reactive group typeII. The reactive group type II reacts with a bridging molecule.

FIG. 6. A derivatized nucleotide as building block

The nucleotide building block comprises or essentially consists of thecomplementing element (the nucleotide) and a functional entity (in thiscase a dicarboxylic acid) connected by means of a selectively cleavablelinker (here a disulfide). The reactive groups type I of the nucleotideare the triphosphate and the hydroxyl group, as indicated. Therecognition group of the nucleotide is the base. The functional entitycomprises or essentially consists of a functional group (a hydroxyl),two reactive groups type II (carboxylic acids), and a backbone structure(aromatic ring) connecting the two reactive groups. Finally the linker(disulfide) is cleavable by for example DTT.

A derivatized di-nucleotide as building block

The complementing element is a modified dA-dU di-nucleotide thatcomprises the recognition group, in this case the adenine and uracilbases. It is connected to the functional entity (here an amino acid) viaa cleavable propargylester linkage. Upon basic cleavage, the linkerreleases the functional group, a carboxylic acid. The reactive groups oftype I of the di-nucleotide are the hydroxyl group and thephophoro(2-methyl)imidazolide. Reactive groups of type II are the aminogroup and the carboxylic acid of the amino acid as indicated.

A derivatized oligo-nucleotide as building block

The complementing element is the last 20 bases of the oligonucleotideshown. It is linked to the functional entity, a N-Boc beta amino acid,via an oligo-nucleotide comprising 40 bases (B is an internal biotinincorporated using the commercially available phosphoramidite(10-1953-95 from Glen research) including a cytosine deoxyribonucleotidethat has been modified at the 5′-phosphato group with a mercaptohexanespacer connected to an N-hydroxysuccinimid moiety. Reactive group oftype II is the carboxylic acid bound to the oxygen atom of theN-hydroxysuccinimid moiety. It is susceptible to nucleophillic attack bye.g. an amine.

FIG. 7. C-terminal tagging of a β-dipeptide—incorporation,polymerization and activation.

-   -   A) Structures of the primer and two monomer building blocks. The        initiator molecule is attached to the 5-position of the        3′-terminal dU of the primer. The initiator is a Fmoc-protected        amine. The dUTP-derivative carries a photoprotected hydroxyl        group. The hydroxyl group is coupled to the        N-thiocarboxyanhydride (NTA) ring structure. The dATP-derivative        is modified at the 7 position. A photoprotected amine is coupled        the NTA.    -   B) The primer (which is annealed to the template, not shown in        figure) is extended from its 3′-end through incorporation of the        dUTP and dATP by a polymerase. Then the initiator is activated        by piperidine, which releases the primary amine. The primary        amine attacks the neighboring NTA, which opens the NTA rings        structure, releases CSO, and as a result, produces a primary        amine. This primary amine now attacks the next NTA unit in the        array. As a result, a polymer, attached through its functional        groups (OH and NH₂) to the DNA strand, is formed. Finally, the        linkers connecting the DNA strand with the NTA units, are        cleaved. The resulting polymer in this case is a β-peptide,        carrying the functional groups OH and NH₂, encoded by the DNA        sequence dUdA. In the shown example, the sequence 5′-dUdA-3′        encodes a β-peptide in the C-terminal to N-terminal direction,        as opposed to Natures encoding system where 5′ to 3′ RNA encodes        an α-peptide in the N- to C-terminal direction. The β-peptide is        attached to the encoding DNA through its C-terminal end.    -   C) Schematic representation of the incorporation, polymerisation        and activation. The encoded polymer becomes attached to the        encoding molecule (DNA) through the initiator molecule.

FIG. 8. N-terminal tagging of a β-dipeptide—incorporation,polymerization and activation.

-   -   A) Structures of the primer, two monomer building blocks, and an        oligo. The initiator molecule is attached to the 5-position of        the 3′-terminal U of the primer. The primer is complementary to        the upstream part of the template. The initiator is a        Fmoc-protected amine. The UTP-derivative carries a        photoprotected hydroxyl group. The hydroxyl group is attached to        the N-thiocarboxyanhydride (NTA) ring structure. The        ATP-derivative is modified at the 7 position. A photo-protected        amine is attached to the NTA. The oligo is complementary to the        downstream sequence of the template. The oligo carries a        reactive thioester attached to the U at the oligo's 5′end. The        stability of the thioester in water can be modified as desired        by changing the structure of the thioester-component (in the        example, the thiol-component is a thiophenol).    -   B) The primer (which is annealed to the template, not shown in        figure) is extended from its 3′-end through incorporation of the        UTP and ATP by a polymerase. Then the initiator is activated by        piperidine, which releases the primary amine. The primary amine        attacks the neighboring NTA, which opens the NTA rings        structure, releases CSO, and as a result, produces a primary        amine. This primary amine now attacks the next NTA unit in the        array. As a result, a polymer, attached through its functional        groups (OH and NH₂) to the RNA strand, is formed. Finally, the        linkers connecting the RNA strand with the NTA units are        cleaved. The resulting polymer is a β-peptide, carrying the        functional groups —OH and —NH₂, encoded by the ribonucleic acid        sequence UA. The sequence 5′-UA-3′ encodes a β-dipeptide in the        N-terminal to C-terminal direction, similar to the way that        Nature encodes α-peptides. The β-peptide is attached to the        encoding RNA through its N-terminal end.    -   C) Schematic representation of the incorporation, polymerisation        and activation. Upon cleavage of a subset of linkers, the        encoded polymer becomes attached to the downstream        oligonucleotide.

FIG. 9. Nucleotide-derivatives that are known to be incorporated intoRNA or DNA strands by DNA or RNA polymerases.

Top: Nucleotide, the four bases and the site of attachment of themolecular moiety (R).

Center: Nucleotides with appendices (R) that are accepted as substratesby polymerases.

Bottom: Nucleotides with appendices (R) that may be used with thepresent invention. Compound (a) would be used in for example fill-inexperiments (see FIG. 15). Compound (b) would be used for example inzipping polymerization reactions (see FIGS. 14 and 14, example 1).Compound (c) would be used for example in ring-opening polymerizationreactions (see FIGS. 18 and 18, example 1).

FIG. 10. Cleavable linkers and protection groups.

Cleavable linkers and protection groups, agents that may be used fortheir cleavage and the products of cleavage.

FIG. 11. Polymerization by reaction between neighboring reactive groupstype II.

For clarity, only the polymerization reaction (and not the activation)is shown in the figure. X represents the reactive groups type II of thefunctional entity. In this case the two reactive groups type II areidentical.

Polymerization (reaction of X with X to form XX) either happensspontaneously when the monomer building block has been incorporated, oris induced by a change of conditions (e.g. pH), or by the addition of aninducing factor (chemical or UV exposure, for example)

FIG. 11 ex.1. Coumarin-based polymerization.

Light-induced reaction of the coumarin units, followed by activation(cleavage of the linker), results in a polymer backbone of aromatic andaliphatic ring structures. Examples of functional groups (phosphate,carboxylic acid and aniline) are shown.

FIG. 12. Polymerization between neighboring non-identical reactivegroups type II.

In this example, X may react with Y but not another X. Likewise, Y doesnot react with Y. Polymerization can either happen during theincorporation of building blocks (as shown in the figure), or afterincorporation of several building blocks.

FIG. 13. Cluster formation in the absence of directional polymerisation.

When the incorporated monomers are not fixed with regard to rotationabout the bond that links the functional entities to the complementingelements, cluster formation may result, as shown in the figure.

This represents a significant problem for longer polymers. The problemmay be solved by (i) fixing the incorporated monomers in a preferredorientation which does not allow X and Y (reactive groups type II) toexchange positions in the array (e.g., by coupling the functional entityand the complementing element via a double bond or two bonds, e.g.coupling the functional entity both to the base and the ribose of anucleotide, or to the two bases of a dinucleotide), (ii) employingdirectional polymerisation (“zipping”, see for example FIG. 17), or(iii) setting up conditions that ensure that the monomers react duringor right after incorporation into the complementing template, i.e., eachmonomer reacts with the previously incorporated monomer before the nextmonomer is incorporated (see for example FIG. 14, with example).

FIG. 14. Zipping-polymerization and simultaneous activation.

Polymerization results in activation of the polymer. The geometry of thereaction between X and Y is in this example the same for all monomersparticipating in the polymerization

FIG. 14, example 1. Simultaneous incorporation, polymerisation andactivation—formation of peptides.

(A). Nucleotide derivatives, to which amino acids thioesters have beenappended, are incorporated. During or after incorporation of anucleotide-derivative, the amine attacks the carbonyl of the (previouslyincorporated) neighboring nucleotide. This results in formation of anamide bond, which extends the peptide one unit. When the next monomer isincorporated, this may attack the thioester carbonyl, resulting incleavage of the dipeptide from the nucleotide, to form a tripeptide. Theprocess continues further downstream the complementing template, untilincorporation of nucleotide derivatives stops. Importantly, the geometryof the nucleophilic attack remains unchanged. As the local concentrationof nucleophilic amines is much higher on the template than in solution,reactions in solution is not expected to significantly affect theformation of the correct encoded polymer. Furthermore, the reactivity ofthe amine with the ester may be tuned in several ways. Parameters thatwill affect the reactivity include: (i) pH and temperature, (ii) length,point of attachment to the nucleotide, and characteristics (charge,rigidity, hydrophobicity, structure) of the linker that connects theester and the nucleotide, (iii) nature of ester (thio-, phospho-, orhydroxy-ester); (iv) the nature of the substituent on the sulfur (see(B) below). In addition, the efficiency of correct polymer formation isalso affected by the rate of incorporation and rate of reaction onceincorporated. The rate of incorporation is determined by kcat and Km.The kcat and Km values may be tuned by changing the conditions (pH,concentration of nucleotides, salts, templates and enzymes), by choiceof enzyme, or by changing the characteristics of the enzyme by proteinengineering. Also, the nature and size of the nucleotide-derivatives mayinfluence its rate of incorporation.

This general scheme involving incorporation, polymerisation andactivation during or right after building block incorporation, can beapplied to most nucleophilic polymerisation reactions, includingformation of various types of peptides, amides, and amide-like polymers(e.g., mono-, di-, tri-, and tetra-substituted α-, β-, γ-, andΩ-peptides, polyesters, polycarbonate, polycarbarmate, polyurea), usingsimilar structures.

-   -   (B). Four different thioesters with different substituents and        therefore different reactivity towards nucleophiles.

FIG. 14, example 2. Simultaneous incorporation, polymerization andactivation—formation of a polyamine.

This figure shows a “rolling-circle polymerization reaction” where thechain containing the nucleophilic center attacks the electrophileattached to the DNA-part, using this DNA-part as the leaving group.

FIG. 15. “Fill-in” polymerization (symmetric XX monomers).

Fill-in polymerization by reaction between reactive groups type II (“X”in the figure) and bridging molecules (Y—Y) in figure).

For clarity, only the polymerization reaction (not the activation) isshown in the figure. The thick line represents double or single strandednucleic acid or nucleic acid analog. X represents the reactive groupstype II of the functional entity. In this case the two reactive groupstype II are identical. (Y—Y) is added to the mixture before, during orafter incorporation of the monomer building blocks. Likewise,significant reaction between X and Y may take place during or afterincorporation of the monomers.

FIG. 15, ex.1. Poly-imine formation by fill-in polymerization.

Dialdehyde is added in excess to incorporated diamines. As a result, apoly-imine is formed. In the example, the polymer carries the followingsequence of functional groups: cyclopentadienyl, hydroxyl, andcarboxylic acid.

FIG. 15, example 2. Polyamide formation.

After incorporation of nucleotides to which have been appendeddi-amines, EDC (1-Ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide) anddicarboxylic acid is added in excess to the primary amines on theoligonucleotide using standard coupling conditions. Alternatively, adi-(N-hydroxy-succinimide ester) may be added in excess, at a pH of7-10. As a result, two amide-bonds are formed between two neighboringnucleotide-appendices. After this polymerisation, the appendices areseparated from the oligonucleotide backbone (activation), leaving onelinker intact, and the protected functional groups are deprotected toexpose the functional groups. The final result is a DNA-taggedpolyamide.

An alternative route to polyamides would be to incorporate nucleotidesto which had been appended di-carboxylic acids, and then add di-aminesand EDC, to form amide bonds between individual nucleotides of theoligonucleotide. Alternatively, the nucleotide derivatives might containN-hydroxy-succinimidyl (NHS) esters, which would react with the addedamines without the need to add EDC. Initially, this latter method wasconsidered to be problematic in the case where incorporation is mediatedby a polymerase, as the NHS-esters probably would react with amines onthe polymerase, potentially inhibiting the activity of the polymerase.However, practical experiments have shown that it is possible toincorporate NHS-derivatised nucleotides.

(A). The backbone of the resulting polymer comprises or essentiallyconsists of amide-bonded aromatic rings. The substituents of thisexample are a protected primary amine, a branched pentyl group, atertiary amine and a pyrimidyl. The primary amine is protected in orderto avoid its reaction with the dicarboxylic acid. Appropriate protectinggroups would be for example Boc-, Fmoc, benzyloxycarbonyl (Z, cbz),trifluoracetyl, phthaloyl, or other amino protecting groups describede.g. in (T. W. Green and Peter G. M. Wuts (1991), Protective Groups inOrganic Synthesis).(B). The backbone comprises or essentially consists of aromatic rings,connected by amide bonds. The substituents are indanyl,diphenylphosphinyl, carboxamidoethyl and guanidylpropyl, the latter tworepresenting the asparagine side chain, and the arginine side chain,respectively. The guanidyl function is protected, as it is more reactivethan standard amines. An appropriate protecting group would be Mtr(4-methoxy-2,3,6-trimethylbenzenesulfonyl), Mts (mesitylene-2-sulfonyl)or Pbf (2,2,4,6,7-pentamethyldihydro-benzifuran-5-sulfonyl).

FIG. 15, example 3. Polyurea formation.

The incorporated nucleotide derivatives react with phosgen or aphosgen-equivalent such as CDI to form a polyurea. The linkers arecleaved and the protected hydroxyl is deprotected.

Appropriate leaving groups (Lv) are chloride, imidazole, nitrotriazole,or other good leaving groups commonly employed in organic synthesis

FIG. 15, example 4. Chiral and achiral polyurea backbone formation.

In this example, the functional group Rx is used as a cleavable linker,that generates the desired functional group upon activation. In both (A)and (B), a polyurea is formed.

In (A), the functional group is attached to the backbone via a chiralcarbon. The hydrogen on this carbon is drawn to emphasize this. Beforepolymerisation, there is free rotation about the bond connecting thechiral carbon and the functional group. When the reactive groups type II(the amines) react with the phosgen equivalent (e.g., acarbonyldiimidazole) to form the polymer, the building blocks may beinserted in either of two orientations (as indicated by the position ofthe hydrogen, left or right). As a result, each residue of the polymerhas two possible chiral forms. Therefore, a given encoding molecule willencode a polymer with a specific sequence of residues, but an encodedpolymer of 5 or 15 residues will have 2⁵=32 or 2¹⁵=32768 stereoisomers,respectively. In certain cases it may be advantageous to incorporatesuch additional structural diversity in the library (for example whenthe polymer is relatively short). In other cases such additionaldiversity is not desirable, as the screening efficiency may becomecompromised, or it may become too difficult to deconvolute the structureof a polymer that has been isolated in a screening process, togetherwith the other stereoisomers encoded by the same encoding molecule (forexample when the polymer is long).

In (B), the chiral carbon of (A) has been replaced by a nitrogen. As aresult, the resulting polymer backbone is achiral, and the encodingmolecule encodes one specific structure.

FIG. 15, example 5. Polyphosphodiester formation.

The incorporated nucleotide derivatives react with the activatedphosphodiester to form a polyphosphodiester. Then the linkers arecleaved, resulting in a polyphosphodiester, attached through a linker tothe encoding molecule.

An example of an appropriate leaving groups (Lv) is imidazole.

FIG. 15, example 6. Polyphosphodiester formation with one reactive grouptype II in each monomer building block.

Each incorporated nucleotide contains an activated phosphodiester. Uponaddition of a dihydroxylated compound such as 1,3-dihydroxypyridine, afunctionalised polyphosphodiester is formed. Finally, the functionalgroups Rx are liberated from the complementing template by cleavage ofthe protection groups/cleavable linker that connected them to theoligonucleotide.

FIG. 15, example 7. Pericyclic, “fill-in” polymerization.

After incorporation of the nucleotide-derivatives, 1,4-benzoquinone isadded in excess, resulting in the formation of a polycyclic compound.Finally, the polymeric structure is activated by cleaving the linkersthat connect the polymer to the nucleotides, except for one(non-cleavable) linker which is left intact.

FIG. 16. Encoded “Fill-in”.

Fill-in by encoding is performed by the method depicted. The encodedfill-in moiety is the Y—R_(x)—Y of the second building block. Using thismethod it is possible to link two functional entities X—R_(x)—X by apredetermined functional entity Y—R_(x)—Y. In some embodiments this maybe of advantage because the encoded fill-in functional entity Y—R_(x)—Ydoes not have to be the same through out the molecule, as is the casefor the method shown in FIG. 15.

FIG. 17A. “Fill-in” polymerization (asymmetric XS monomers).

Fill-in polymerization by reaction between reactive groups type II (“X”and “S” in the figure) and bridging molecules (T-Y) in figure).

For clarity, only the polymerization reaction (not the activation) isshown. The thick line represents double or single stranded nucleic acidor nucleic acid analog. X and S represent the reactive groups type II ofthe functional entity. In this case the two reactive groups type II arenon-identical. (T-Y) is added to the mixture before, during or afterincorporation of the monomer building blocks. Likewise, significantreaction between X and Y, and between S and T may take place during orafter incorporation of the monomers.

FIG. 17B, example 1. Fill-in polymerization by modified Staudingerligation and ketone-hydrazide reaction.

The reactive groups (type II) X and S of the building blocks are azideand hydrazide. The added molecule that fills the gaps between thebuilding blocks carry a ketone and a phosphine moiety. The reactionsbetween a ketone and a hydrazide, and between a azide and a phosphine,are very chemoselective. Therefore, most functional groups Rx can beemployed without the need for protection during the polymerizationreactions. Examples for the molecular moieties R, R1, X and Y may befound in (Mahal et al. (1997), Science 276, pp. 1125-1128; Saxon et al.(2000), Organic Letters 2, pp. 2141-2143).

FIG. 18A. “Zipping” polymerization.

The initiator molecule (typically located at one of the ends of thenascent polymer) is activated, for example by deprotection or by achange in pH. The initiator then reacts with the reactive group X of theneighbouring monomer. This activates the reactive group Y for attack onthe neighbouring X. Polymerisation then travels to the other end of themolecule in a “zipping” fashion, until all the desired monomers havebeen connected. The activation of the initiator (and reactive groups Y)may be both for attack by it on the neighbouring reactive group, oractivation of it for attack by the neighbouring reactive group.

FIG. 18B, example 1. Radical polymerisation.

The initiator molecule, an iodide, is activated by the addition of aradical initiator, for example ammonium persulfate, AIBN(azobis-isobutyronitrile) or other radical chain reaction initiators.The radical attacks the neighboring monomer, to form a new radical and abond between the first two monomers. Eventually the whole polymer isformed, and the polymer may be activated, which simultaneously createsthe functional groups Rx.

FIG. 18C, example 2. Cationic polymerisation.

A cation is created by the exposure of the array to strong Lewis acid.The double bond of the neighbouring monomer reacts with this cation,whereby the positive charge migrates to the neighbouring monomer.Eventually the whole polymer is formed, and finally it is activated.

FIG. 19A. Zipping polymerization by ring opening.

The initiator reacts with the reactive group X in the ring structure,which opens the ring, whereby the reactive group Y in the samefunctional entity is activated for reaction with a reactive group X in aneighboring functional entity.

FIG. 19B, example 1. “Zipping” polymerization ofN-thiocarboxyanhydrides, to form β-peptides.

After incorporation of the building blocks, the initiator isdeprotected. The primary amine then attacks the carbonyl of theneighbouring N-thiocarboxyanhydride (NTA) unit. As a result, CSO isreleased, and a primary amine is generated. This amine will now reactwith the next NTA unit in the array, and eventually all the NTA unitswill have reacted, to form a b-peptide. Finally, the oligomer isactivated.

A number of changes to this set-up can be envisaged. For example,instead of thiocarboxyanhydrides, one might use carboboxyanhydrides. Theinitiator might be protected with a base- or photolabile group. If abase-labile protection group is chosen, the stability of thecarboxyanhydride must be considered. At higher pH it may be advantageousto use carboxyanhydrides rather than thiocarboxyanhydrides.

Finally, the initiator might be unprotected and for example coupled tothe primer. In this case the concentration of the initiator in solutionwill be very low (typically nanomolar to micromolar), wherefore only aninsignificant amount of initiator will react with the carboxyanhydrides.After or during incorporation of the building blocks the localconcentration of initiator and carboxyanhydride will be much higher,leading to efficient polymerization.

Other types of peptides and peptide-like polymers (e.g., mono-, di-,tri-, and tetra-substituted α-, β-, γ-, and Ω-peptides, polyesters,polycarbonate, polycarbarmate, polyurea) can be made, using similarcyclic structures. For example, α-peptides can be made by polymerizationof 5-membered carboxyanhydride rings.

FIG. 19C, example 2. “Zipping” polymerization of2,2-diphenylthiazinanone units to form β-peptides.

The deprotected nucleophile, a primary amine, attacks the carbonyl ofthe neighboring thioester, thereby forming an amide bond. The releasedthiol reorganizes, to form a thioketone. As a result a free primaryamine is generated, which attacks the carbonyl of a neighboringthioester, etc. Eventually an α-substituted β-peptide is formed, linkedthrough its C-terminal end. The reactivity of the primary amine with theester may be modified for example by the choice of ester (thioester orregular ester), pH during the polymerization reaction and the choice ofsubstituents on the aromatic ring(s). The relative reactivity of thesecondary amine contained in the cyclic moiety and the primary aminereleased upon ring-opening, may be adjusted by the bulk at the carbonbetween the secondary amine and the thioester. For example, replacingthe two aromatic rings with one aromatic ring will decrease the bulkaround the secondary amine, making it more nucleophilic, whereas thenucleophilicity of the primary amine that is formed upon ring-opening isnot affected by the bulk at this position. Other peptides and amide-likepolymers may be formed by this principle. For example, γ-peptides may beformed by polymerization of 7-membered thiazinanone rings.

FIG. 19D, example 3. Polyether formation by ring-opening polymerisation.

The initiator is deprotected by for example base or acid. The formedanion the attacks the epoxide of the neighboring monomer, to form aether-bond. As a result, an anion is formed in the neighboring unit.This attacks the next monomer in the array, and eventually thefull-length polyether has been formed. Depending on the conditions theattack will be at the most or least hindered carbon of the epoxide(under acidic or basic conditions, respectively).

In the final step, the encoded polyether is activated. In this case, thepolymer is fully released from the encoding molecule. The screening forrelevant characteristics (e.g., effect in a cell-based assay orenzymatic activity) may be performed in microtiter wells or micelles,each compartment containing a specific template molecule and thetemplated polyether, in many copies. In this way, the template andtemplated molecule is physically associated (by the boundaries of thecompartment), and therefore the templates encoding polyethers withinteresting characteristics may be collected from those compartments,pooled, amplified and “translated” into more copies of polyethers whichmay then be exposed to a new round of screening.

FIG. 20. Zipping-polymerization and activation by rearrangement.

The initiator is activated for attack by Y. Reaction of initiator and Yresults in release of the initiator from the complementing element. Uponreaction with the initiator, a rearrangement of the building blockmolecule takes place, resulting in activation of X for reaction with Y.After a number of reactions and rearrangements, a polymer has beenformed.

FIG. 21. Zipping-polymerization and activation by ring opening.

Reaction of the initiator with X in the ring structure opens the ring,resulting in activation of Y. Y can now react with X in a neighboringfunctional entity. As a result of ring-opening, the functional entitiesare released from the complementing elements.

FIG. 22. Directional polymer formation using fixed functional units.

-   -   (A) The functional entity of a building block may be attached to        the complementing element through two linkers. This may fix the        functional entity in a given orientation relative to the        complementing template. As a result, rotation around the linker        that connects functional entity and complementing element (as        depicted in FIG. 13) is not possible, and cluster formation        therefore unlikely.    -   (B) Two linkers connect the two bases of a        dinucleotide-derivative with the functional unit, which in this        case is a dipeptide. Incorporation of such di-nucleotide        derivatives into a double helical structure will position the        amine (X in (A) above) in proximity to the ester (Y in (A)        above). This ester may be activated, for example as a        N-hydroxysuccinimide ester. After reaction of the amine and the        ester, a polypeptide is formed. This polypeptide will be a        directional polymer, with N-to-C-terminal directionality. In the        present case, the polymerisation reaction will cleave the ester        from the base to which it is linked. Therefore, activation of        the formed polymer only requires cleavage of the linker that        connects the base at the 3′-end of the dinucleotide with the        amino-terminal end of the functional entity.    -   Rotational fixation of the functional entity relative to the        complementing element may be achieved in other ways. For        example, the functional entity may be coupled to the        complementing element through a double bond, or it may be        attached through two bonds to the base and ribose moity of a        nucleotide, respectively, or it may be coupled to different        positions on the ribose or base. Finally, it is also possible to        link to the phosphate moity, especially of a dinucleotide.

FIG. 23 shows four examples of bifunctional FEs attached via a singlelinker to the parent nucleotide (left) or with an additional linkerusing a second attachment point (right). The second attachment can beanywhere on a neighbour nucleotide (A), on the sugar moiety of theparent nucleotide (B, linked through ester functionality or C, withester functionality free, and D, also with ester functionality free), itcan be another base position of the parent nucleotide (not shown), orthe FE could be linked to the phosphate backbone (not shown).

FIG. 24 show a DNA double helix (upper strand 5′-GCTTTTTTAG-3′) bearinglinker-FE 1A attached in different ways. DNA backbones are shown asarrows, sugars and bases as rings. Linker-FE atoms are depicted in stickrepresentation and coloured by atom. A. Example of a conformationbearing singly-attached FEs. B. Most probable product of A. C. Exampleof a singly-attached FE configuration leading to clustering and therebyto an incomplete product, D. E. Minimum energy conformation bearingdoubly-attached FEs and the only possible product, F. G. Stickrepresentation of the released product from F. H. Stick representationof the released product from B. I. Stick representation of the releasedproduct from D.

FIG. 25 show a DNA double helix (upper strand 5′-GCTTTTAG-3′) bearinglinker-FE 1B attached in different ways. DNA backbones are shown asarrows, sugars and bases as rings. Linker-FE atoms are depicted in stickrepresentation and coloured by atom. A. Minimum energy conformationbearing singly-attached FEs. B. Most probable product of A. C. Exampleof a singly-attached FE configuration leading to clustering and therebyto an incomplete product, D. E. Minimum energy conformation bearingdoubly-attached FEs and the only possible product, F. G. Stickrepresentation of the released product from B and F. H. Stickrepresentation of the released product from D.

FIG. 26. Templating of molecules—principle and variations.

In the FIGS. 26-27, 29-31, 33-35, 37-49, and 53, the template, thecomplementing template, both the template and the complementingtemplate, or a complementing element is indicated by a horizontal (bold)line. In FIGS. 26-28, 35-37, and 39, a circle is used to indicate afunctional entity.

-   -   A. Monomer building blocks used in this figure. A black dot        indicates a cleavable linker.    -   B. General principle.        -   Step 1—Incorporation. The monomer building blocks are            specifically incorporated into a complimentary template, by            specific interaction between coding elements (of the            template) and complementing elements (of the monomer            building blocks).        -   Step 2—Reaction. A reaction is induced by which functional            entities (FE) of the individual monomer building blocks            become coupled, by reaction of reactive groups type II.        -   Step 3—Activation. Some or all of the linkers connecting the            FE units with complementing elements are cleaved, thereby            partly or fully releasing the templated molecule.        -   Step 4 (not shown in figure)—Screening, Amplification and            Modification. The template-templated molecule complexes may            be taken through a screening process that enriches the pool            for complexes with desired features. Then the templates of            the enriched pool may be amplified and modified, by e.g.            mutagenic PCR, and the templated molecules regenerated by            performing step 1-3.    -   C. Templating of linear, branched and circular templates.        -   Linear, branched and circular templates may generate linear,            branched and circular templated molecules. In the example            shown, the branched template may be generated by            incorporation of a modified nucleotide (e.g., carrying a            thiol) into an oligonucleotide, followed by reaction with an            oligonucleotide containing a thiol-reactive component (e.g.,            a maleimide-unit at one end). The circular template may            likewise be a oligonucleotide, carrying reactive groups at            the end that may react to covalently close the circle (e.g.,            thiols at both ends of the oligonucleotide could form an            disulfide bond). Upon cleavage of all but one of the linkers            connecting the FEs and complementing elements, a circular            templated molecule is formed, attached to the template at            one point.    -   D. Templating of linear, branched, circular and scrambled linear        molecules by linear template.        -   (a) A linear templated molecule with the same sequence of            FEs as obtained after incorporation, but before reaction, of            the monomer building blocks. (b) A linear templated molecule            with a scrambled sequence, i.e., the sequence of the FEs in            the templated molecule does not correspond to the sequence            obtained right after incorporation, but before reaction of            the FEs. (c) A circular templated molecule obtained by            pairwise reaction of the following FEs with each other:            FE1/FE2, FE2/FE3, FE3/FE5, FE5/FE4, FE4/FE1. (d) A branched            molecule obtained by pairwise reaction of the following            functional entities with each other: FE1/FE2, FE2/FE3,            FE2/FE4, and FE4/FE5. (e) A branched molecule obtained by            pairwise reaction of the following functional entities with            each other: FE1/FE2, FE2/FE4, FE2/FE5, FE2/FE3.

FIG. 27A-C. Non-equal number of reactive groups (X) and (Y). The numberof reactive groups (X) can be higher than, equal to, or lower than thenumber of reactive groups (Y). When the number of (X) and (Y) aredifferent, scrambling results. In the figure the scaffold (the molecularmoiety to which the functional groups of the monomer building blocksbecome attached) is directly attached to the template. The scaffold mayalso be part of a monomer building block (i.e., the functional entity ofthe monomer building block comprises a scaffold moiety, includingreactive groups type II (Y).

FIG. 27A. Number of encoded reactive groups X per template equals thenumber of reactive groups (Y) on the anchorage point (also called thescaffold).

FIG. 27B. Number of encoded reactive groups X per template is less thanthe number of encodable substitutent positions Y on the scaffold. Thisleads to scrambling regarding which of the reactive groups (Y) on thescaffold (anchorage point) will react with an (X) on the monomerbuilding blocks.

FIG. 27C. Number of encoded reactive groups X per template is largerthan the number of reactive groups on the scaffold. This leads toscrambling regarding which of the reactive groups (Y) on the scaffold(anchorage point) will react with a reactive group (X) on the monomerbuilding blocks.

FIG. 28. Monomer building blocks.

-   -   (A) A monomer building block with one reactive group type II        (X), connecting the functional group (Rx) with the complementing        element. This type of monomer building block may be used for the        simultaneous reaction and activation protocol (FIG. 14).    -   (B) A monomer building block with two reactive groups type II (X        and Y), connecting the complementing element and the functional        group (Rx).    -   (C) A monomer building block with one reactive group type II        (X). The reactive group (X) does not link the functional group        (Rx) and the complementing element, wherefore a linker (L) is        needed for the activation step (in order to release the        functional entity from the complementing element)    -   (D) A monomer building block with four reactive groups type II        (Y). The four reactive groups and the functional group Rx may        serve as a scaffold, onto which substituents (encoded by        monomers complementing the same template) are coupled through        reaction of reactive groups (X) on these monomer building blocks        with the reactive groups (Y) on this monomer building block. In        this example, no cleavable linker is indicated. Therefore, after        the templating reactions the templated molecule may be attached        to the template through the linker of this monomer building        block.

FIG. 29. Templating involving simultaneous reaction and activation.

Templating using 4 monomer building blocks each with one reactive grouptype II (X), and an anchorage point carrying 4 reactive groups (Y). Thereaction of X and Y involves simultaneous activation (cleavage) whichreleases X from the complementing element.

(A) The reactive groups type 11 (X) are of similar kind.

(B) The reactive groups type II (X1, X2, X3, X4) are of different kinds,i.e. the pairwise reactions between reactions X1/Y1, X2/Y2, X3/Y3, andX4/Y4 are orthogonal or partly orthogonal. For example, X1 preferablyreacts with Y1, not Y2, Y3 or Y4. The anchorage point may be attacheddirectly to the template, or to the complementing template. In case theanchorage point is attached to a complementing element, as a whole it isconsidered a monomer building block.

FIG. 30. Reaction types allowing simultaneous reaction and activation.

Different classes of reactions are shown which mediate translocation ofa functional group from one monomer building block to another, or to ananchorage point. The reactions have been grouped into three differentclasses: Nucleophilic substitutions, addition-elimination reactions, andtransition metal catalyzed reactions These reactions are compatible withsimultaneous reaction and activation (as described in general terms inFIG. 14).

FIG. 30(A) Reaction of nucleophiles with carbonyls. As a result of thenucleophilic substitution, the functional group R is translocated to themonomer building block initially carrying the nucleophile.

FIG. 30(B) Nucleophilic attack by the amine on the thioester leads toformation of an amide bond, in effect translocating the functional groupR of the thioester to the other monomer building block.

FIG. 30(C) Reaction between hydrazine and β-ketoester leads to formationof pyrazolone, in effect translocating the R and R′ functional groups tothe other monomer building block.

FIG. 30(D) Reaction of hydroxylamine with β-ketoester leads to formationof the isoxazolone, thereby translocating the R and R′ groups to theother monomer building block.

FIG. 30(E) Reaction of thiourea with β-ketoester leads to formation ofthe pyrimidine, thereby translocating the R and R′ groups to the othermonomer building block.

FIG. 30(F) Reaction of urea with malonate leads to formation ofpyrimidine, thereby translocating the R group to the other monomerbuilding block.

FIG. 30(G) Depending on whether Z═O or Z═NH, a Heck reaction followed bya nucleophilic substitution leads to formation of coumarin orquinolinon, thereby translocating the R and R′ groups to the othermonomer building block.

FIG. 30(H) Reaction of hydrazine and phthalimides leads to formation ofphthalhydrazide, thereby translocating the R and R′ groups to the othermonomer building block.

FIG. 30(I) Reaction of amino acid esters leads to formation ofdiketopiperazine, thereby translocating the R group to the other monomerbuilding block.

FIG. 30(J) Reaction of urea with α-substituted esters leads to formationof hydantoin, and translocation of the R and R′ groups to the othermonomer building block.

FIG. 30(K) Alkylation may be achieved by reaction of variousnucleophiles with sulfonates. This translocates the functional groups Rand R′ to the other monomer building block.

FIG. 30(L) Reaction of a di-activated alkene containing an electronwithdrawing and a leaving group, whereby the alkene is translocated tothe nucleophile.

FIG. 30(M) Reaction of disulfide with mercaptane leads to formation of adisulfide, thereby translocating the R′ group to the other monomerbuilding block.

FIG. 30(N) Reaction of amino acid esters and amino ketones leads toformation of benzodiazepinone, thereby translocating the R group to theother monomer building block.

FIG. 30(0) Reaction of phosphonates with aldehydes or ketones leads toformation of substituted alkenes, thereby translocating the R″ group tothe other monomer building block.

FIG. 30(P) Reaction of boronates with aryls or heteroaryls results intransfer of an aryl group to the other monomer building block (to form abiaryl).

FIG. 30(Q) Reaction arylsulfonates with boronates leads to transfer ofthe aryl group.

FIG. 30(R) Reaction of boronates with vinyls (or alkynes) results intransfer of an aryl group to the other monomer building block to form avinylarene (or alkynylarene).

FIG. 30(S) Reaction between aliphatic boronates and arylhalides, wherebythe alkyl group is translocated to yield an alkylarene.

FIG. 30(T) Transition metal catalysed alpha-alkylation through reactionbetween an enolether and an arylhallide, thereby translocating thealiphatic part.

FIG. 30(U) Condensations between e.g. enamines or enolethers withaldehydes leading to formation of alpha-hydroxy carbonyls oralpha,beta-unsaturated carbonyls. The reaction translocates thenucleophilic part.

FIG. 30(V) Alkylation of alkylhalides by e.g. enamines or enolethers.The reaction translocates the nucleophilic part.

FIG. 30(W) [2+4] cycloadditions, translocating the diene-part.

FIG. 30(X) [2+4] cycloadditions, translocating the ene-part.

FIG. 30(Y) [3+2] cycloadditions between azides and alkenes, leading totriazoles by translocation of the ene-part.

FIG. 30(Z) [3+2] cycloadditions between nitriloxides and alkenes,leading to isoxazoles by translocation of the ene-part.

FIGS. 31A & B. Templating involving non-simultaneous reaction andactivation: Reaction of reactive groups (type II), followed by cleavageof the linkers that connect functional entities with complementingelements.

Templating using 4 monomer building blocks each with one reactive grouptype II (X), and an anchorage point carrying 4 reactive groups (Y). Thereaction of X and Y does not involve simultaneous activation (cleavage),wherefore the reaction of X and Y is followed by cleavage of the linkerL, which releases the functional group Rx from the complementingelement.

FIG. 31(A) The reactive groups type II (X) are of similar kind, i.e.,they may react with the same type of reactive group (Y). FIG. 31(B) Thereactive groups type II (X1, X2, X3, X4) are of different kinds, i.e.the reactions between X1/Y1, X2/Y2, X3/Y3, and X4/Y4 are orthogonal orpartly orthogonal. For example, X1 preferably reacts with Y1, not Y2, Y3or Y4. The anchorage point may be attached directly to the template, orto the complementing template. In case the anchorage point is attachedto a complementing element, as a whole it is considered a monomerbuilding block.

FIG. 32A-G. Pairs of reactive groups (X) and (Y), and the resulting bond(XY).

A collection of reactive groups that may be used for templated synthesisare shown, along with the bonds formed upon their reaction. Afterreaction, activation (cleavage) may be required (see FIG. 31).

FIG. 33A-C. Anchorage sites for the templated molecule.

The templated molecule may be attached to the template that encodes it(A) through a linker that is connected directly to the template near theend of the template, or (B) through a linker that is connected directlyto the template, at a more central position on the template, or (C) byway of a monomer building block carrying the anchorage point (a reactivegroup that becomes the linkage to the templated molecule).

FIG. 34. Scrambling.

When the functional entities react after incorporation of the monomerbuilding blocks, the position or sequence of functional groups in thetemplated molecule may not always be uniquely determined by the templatesequence.

-   -   (1) The functional groups R1, R2, R3, and R4 may take any of the        four positions on the scaffold molecule (i.e., the reactive        group X of a monomer building block may react with any of the        reactive groups Y on the anchorage point.    -   (2) The sequence of one arm of this branched molecule may be        e.g. R5-R3-R2 (as shown), or R5-R2-R3 (not shown), or R5-R4-R3        (not shown), or any other of a number of possible sequences.        Also, the identity of the functional group coupled to e.g. the        left part of the molecule, may be either of any of R1, R2, R3,        or R4.    -   (3) As in (2), a number of possible sequences of functional        groups are possible, in addition to the shown sequence        R1-R2-R5-R4-R3.    -   (4) Here a non-scrambled templated molecule is shown, in which        the sequence of the functional entitities when incorporated        corresponds to the sequence of the templated molecule        (R1-R2-R3-R4-R5). When desired, scrambling may be partly or        fully avoided by directional encoding or the use of for example        zipper boxes in the linkers (see FIGS. 40, 44-47).    -   (5) As in (2) and (3), a number of possible sequences and        positions of the functional entities are possible.

FIG. 35. Monomer building blocks—examples of linker design.

Different designs of monomer building blocks are shown, used in variousschemes of templating.

The complementing element may be represented by an oligonucleotide, towhich a linker carrying the functional entity is attached. The linkermay occupy an internal position with respect to the complementingelement or alternatively occupy a terminal position. Both thecomplementing element and the linker may be made up of anoligonucleotide (DNA, RNA, LNA, PNA, other oligomers capable ofhybridizing to the linker of a monomer building block and mixturesthereof). The horizontal part represents the complementing element, andthe vertical part represents the linker. The portion of the linkermarked “a” may be present or absent. Region “a” represents aninteraction region of which one preferred embodiment is a sequence ofnucleotides. Region “a” may be annealed to a complementary singlestranded nucleotide sequence “a′” in order to make the linker morerigid. Alternatively region “a” may be used for interaction with othermonomer building blocks (i.e. zipper box see FIG. 42), whereby thefunctional entities of such two monomer building blocks will be broughtin close proximity, which will increase probability of reaction betweenthese two functional entities. Other uses of such regions includesinteraction between different monomer building blocks wherebydirectional encoding may be achieved. “Nu” is a nucleophile that mayreact with an electrophile “E”.

Different designs of monomer building blocks are shown, used in variousschemes of templating.

FIG. 35 (A) The complementing element may be an oligonucleotide, towhich a linker carrying the functional entity is attached to the centralpart of the oligonucleotide. The portion of the linker marked “a” mayrepresent a nucleotide sequence to which a single stranded nucleotidemay be annealed in order to make the linker more rigid.

FIG. 35 (B) Both the complementing element and the linker may be made upof an oligonucleotide. The horizontal part here represents thecomplementing element, and the vertical part represents the linker. Thelinker may contain a sequence “a” that functions as a zipper box (seeFIG. 42).

FIG. 35 (C) The monomer building blocks of (C) is an initiator oranchorage point which may be used to initiate the encoding process.

FIG. 36 Preparation of functional entities to oligonucleotide-basedmonomer building blocks.

Reactions and reagents are shown that may be used for the coupling offunctional entities to modified oligonucleotides (modified with thiol,carboxylic acid, halide, or amine), without significant reaction withthe unmodified part of the oligonucleotide or alternatively, connectivereactions for linkage of linkers to complementing elements.Commercially, mononucleotides are available for the production ofstarting oligonucleotides with the modifications mentioned.

FIG. 37 Oligonucleotide-based monomer building blocks. Examples oflinker and functional entity (FE) design and synthesis.

Examples are shown where the complementing elements of the monomerbuilding blocks comprises oligonucleotides of length e.g. 8-20nucleotides (oligonucleotide is drawn as a thick black line). Part of orall of the oligonucleotide may comprise the complementing element. Inthe case where only part of the oligonucleotide represents thecomplementing element, the remaining portion of the oligonucleotide mayconstitute a linker. In the examples, a linker is attached to the baseon the 3′- or 5′-end of the oligonucleotide. This linker may be attachedon any nucleotide in the oligonucleotide sequence, and also, it may beattached to any molecular moiety on the oligonucleotide, as long as itdoes not abolish specific interaction of the complementing element withthe template.

-   -   (A) A monomer building block in which the linker (L) connects        the base of the terminal nucleotide with the functional entity.    -   (B) A monomer building block in which a polyethylene glycol        (PEG) linker of between one and twenty ethylene glycol units        connects the complementing element with the functional entity        which contains a nucleophile (a primary amine).    -   (C) A monomer building block in which a linker (L) connects the        functional entity which contains an electrophile (an ester or        thioester).    -   (D) A monomer building block comprising a Boc-protected amine        (which may be deprotected with mild acid), and an ester. The        deprotected amine may react with an ester of another monomer        building block, to give an amide bond.

FIG. 38. Oligonucleotide-based monomer building blocks. Example ofcoding and complementing element design, allowing for high monomerdiversity.

-   -   (A) Template carrying 6 coding elements (BOX 1-6), each        containing a partly random sequence (X specifies either C or G),        and a constant sequence that is identical for all sequences in        the group (e.g., all BOX 1 sequences carry a central ATATTT        sequence). By using C and G only (or, alternatively, A and T        only), the individual sequences (e.g., the sequences belonging        to the group of BOX 1 sequences), have almost identical        annealing temperatures wherefore mis-annealing is insignificant.        In the example, BOX 2 and BOX 3 are identical wherefore BOX 2        and BOX 3 may encode the same type of functional entities        (comprising the same type of reactive groups of type II). The        attachment point of the linker that connects the complementing        element and the functional entity is not specified in the        figure. Ideally, the linker is attached to a nucleotide in the        constant region, in order to avoid bias in the annealing        process.    -   (B) Example of coding element sequences. Example BOX 1 and BOX 6        sequences are shown. The example BOX1 sequence represents one        specific sequence out of 1024 different sequences that anneal        specifically to the corresponding BOX 1 complementing elements;        the example BOX 6 sequence represents one specific sequence out        of 128 different sequences that anneal to the corresponding BOX        6 complementing elements.    -   (C) Templating using six monomers. Five classes of coding        elements are used (BOX 2 and 3 are of the same class, i.e., the        corresponding complementing elements of this class may anneal to        both BOX 2 and 3). Reactive groups type II X and Y react; S and        T react; A and B react; and C and D react. In the example the        X/Y pair is orthogonal to S/T orthogonal to NB orthogonal to        C/D. Reaction of X with Y results in cleavage of R1 from the        complementing element and translocation to R4. Reaction of S and        T, followed by cleavage of the linker L leads to translocation        of R2 and R3 onto R4. Reaction of A with B, and C with D        translocates R5 and R6 to R4.

In this example, the functional entity of the monomer binding to BOX 4serves as a “scaffold” onto which is added various substituents.

FIG. 39: A typically panning protocol for selection of templatedmolecules Templates presenting the various small molecule variants areproduced by DNA encoding technology. These templated molecules areincubated with the immobilized target molecule. Templated molecules withlow affinity for the target are washed away. The remaining templatedmolecules are eluted and the template is amplified using PCR. Theenriched templates are then ready to be used as a coding strand for thenext cycle.

FIG. 40: Array of templated molecules

The figure shows a templated molecule chip. A DNA library is spotted inarray format on a suitable surface. The templated molecule library(single-stranded template DNA) is added and allows hybridizing to thecomplement DNA strand. This will allow site-specific immobilization ofthe templated molecules. A biological sample containing target moleculesis added and non-bound material is washed off. The final step is thedetection of bound material in each single spot.

FIG. 41. Use of rigid or partially rigid linkers to increase probabilityof reaction between the functional entities of the incorporated monomerbuilding blocks.

FIG. 41 (A) By using linkers comprising one or more flexible regions(“hinges”) and one or more rigid regions, the probability of twofunctional entities getting into reactive contact may be increased.

FIG. 41 (B) Symbol used for monomer building block with a rigid part andtwo flexible hinges.

FIG. 41 (C) A monomer building block with the characteristics describedin (B): The monomer building block contains an oligonucleotide ascomplementing element (horizontal line), and a oligonucleotide as linkerconnecting the functional entity (FE) with the complementing element.Annealing of a complementary sequence to the central part of the linkerleads to formation of a rigid double helix; at either end of the linkera single-stranded region remains, which constitutes the two flexiblehinges.

FIG. 42A-B. Use of zipper box to increase probability of reactionbetween the functional entities of the incorporated monomer buildingblocks.

FIG. 42 (A) The linkers in this example carry zipper boxes (a) or (a′),that are complementary. By operating at a temperature that allowstransient interaction of (a) and (a′), the reactive groups X and Y arebrought into close proximity during multiple annealing events, which hasthe effect of keeping X and Yin close proximity in a larger fraction ofthe time than otherwise achievable. Alternatively, one may cycle thetemperature between a low temperature (where the zipper boxes pairwiseinteracts stably), and a higher temperature (where the zipper boxes areapart, but where the complementing element remains stably attached tothe coding element of the template). By cycling between the high and lowtemperature several times, a given reactive group X is exposed toseveral reactive groups Y, and eventually will react to form an XY bond.

FIG. 42 (B) Sequences of two oligonucleotide-based monomer buildingblocks. The region constituting the complementing element, linker andzipper box is indicated.

FIG. 43A-F. Templated synthesis of organic compounds—examples.

FIG. 43 (A) Three monomer building blocks are used. Each monomerbuilding block comprises an activated ester (reactive group of type II,(X)) where the ester moiety carries a functional group Rx. Upon reactionbetween the esters and the amines on the scaffold (scaffold may beattached to the template), amide bonds are formed, and the Rx groups arenow coupled to the scaffold via amide bonds. This is thus an example ofsimultaneous reaction (amide formation) and activation (release of theRx moiety from the complementing elements), see FIG. 29.

FIG. 43 (B) Analogously to (A), three amines react with three esters toform three amide bonds, thereby coupling the functional groups Rx to thescaffold moiety. However, as opposed to (A), the scaffold is hereencoded by the template.

FIG. 43 (C) Three monomer building blocks are used. The nucleophilicamine at the far right (part of the anchorage point) attacks the estercarbonyl of the third monomer; the amine of the third monomer attacksthe thioester of the second monomer, and the Horner-Wittig Emmansreagent of the first monomer reacts with the aldehyde of the thirdmonomer under alkaline conditions. This forms the templated molecule.The double bond may be post-templating modified by hydrogenation to forma saturated bond, or alternatively, subjected to a Michael addition.

FIG. 43 (D) The thiol of the scaffold reacts with the pyridine-disulfideof monomer 1. The amine of the scaffold reacts with the ester of thesecond monomer. The double nitril activated alpha-position is acylatedby the monomer 3's thioester in the presence of base. The aryliodideundergoes Suzuki coupling with the arylboronate of monomer 4 to yieldthe biaryl moiety.

FIG. 43 (E) Monomer 1 acylates the primary amine. The aryliodideundergoes a Suzuki coupling by monomer 2 and the benzylic amine isacylated by monomer 3.

Acylation of the hydrazine followed by cyclization leads to formation ofan hydroxypyrazole. The arylbromide undergoes Suzuki coupling with thearyl boronate of monomer 1 and finally (FIG. 43F) the aldehyde reactionswith the Horner-Wittig-Emmons reagent of monomer 4 to yield an alpha,beta-unsaturated amide, which may be further functionalized by eitherreduction with H₂/Pd—C or undergo Micael addition with nucleophiles.

FIGS. 44A&B. α- and β-peptides, hydrazino peptides and peptoids.Encoding by use of oligonucleotide-based monomer building blocks.

It is shown how templated synthesis may be used to generate α- andβ-peptides, hydrazino peptides and peptoids.

FIG. 45. Templating of α-, β-, γ-, and β-peptide through use of cyclicanhydrides

It is shown how templated synthesis may be used to generate α-, β-, γ-and (β-peptides, through the use of cyclic anhydrides.

FIG. 46A-B. Generation of new reactive groups upon reaction of thereactive groups X and Y.

In cases where the reaction of X and Y leads to formation of a newreactive group Z, this may be exploited to increase the diversity of thetemplated molecule, by incorporating monomer building blocks carryingreactive groups Q that react with Z.

FIG. 46 (A) X and Y react to form Z, which in itself does lead torelease from the complementing element. Upon reaction of Z with Q, andcleavage of the linker that connects Z to the complementing element, thetemplated molecule is formed.

FIG. 46 (B) In this case, reaction of X and Y to form Z simultaneouslycleaves the linker connecting X to the complementing element. Uponreaction of Z with Q, the templated molecule is formed.

FIG. 46C, example 1. Templated synthesis by generating a new reactivegroup.

The reaction of the functional entities of the first three monomerbuilding blocks leads to formation of two double bonds, which may reactwith two hydroxylamines carried in by the monomer building blocks addedin the second step, and leads to formation of an ester, which may reactwith the an hydroxylamine, carried in by the monomer added in the secondstep. Finally, the linkers are cleaved, generating the templatedmolecule.

FIG. 47. Cleavable linkers.

Cleavable linkers, the conditions for their cleavage, and the resultingproducts are shown.

FIG. 48A-C. Post-templating modification of templated molecule.

After the templating process has been performed, the templated moleculesmay be modified to introduce new characteristics. This list describessome of these post-templating modifications.

FIG. 49 shows the result of example 64.

FIG. 50 shows the result of example 65.

FIG. 51 shows the result of example 66.

FIG. 52 shows the result of example 67.

FIG. 53 shows the result of example 68.

FIG. 54 shows the result of example 72.

FIG. 55A-C shows the display of a templated molecule attached to thecomplementing template.

FIG. 56 show the result of example 99.

FIGS. 57 A and B show the result of example 99.

FIGS. 58 A and B show the result of example 99.

FIG. 59 shows the result of example 99.

FIG. 60 shows the result of example 102.

FIG. 61 show the result of example 104.

FIG. 62 show the result of example 105.

FIG. 63 show the result of example 106.

FIG. 64 show the result of example 112.

DEFINITIONS

α-peptide: Peptide comprising or essentially consisting of at least twoα-amino acids linked to one another by a linker including a peptidebond.

Amino acid: Entity comprising an amino terminal part (NH₂) and a carboxyterminal part (COOH) separated by a central part comprising a carbonatom, or a chain of carbon atoms, comprising at least one side chain orfunctional group. NH₂ refers to the amino group present at the aminoterminal end of an amino acid or peptide, and COOH refers to the carboxygroup present at the carboxy terminal end of an amino acid or peptide.The generic term amino acid comprises both natural and non-natural aminoacids. Natural amino acids of standard nomenclature as listed in J.Biol. Chem., 243:3552-59 (1969) and adopted in 37 C.F.R., section1.822(b)(2) belong to the group of amino acids listed in Table 2 hereinbelow. Non-natural amino acids are those not listed in Table 2. Examplesof non-natural amino acids are those listed e.g. in 37 C.F.R. section1.822(b)(4), all of which are incorporated herein by reference. Furtherexamples of non-natural amino acids are listed herein below. Amino acidresidues described herein can be in the “D” or or “L” isomeric form.

TABLE 2 Natural amino acids and their respective codes. Symbols 1-Letter3-Letter Amino acid Y Tyr tyrosine G Gly glycine F Phe phenylalanine MMet methionine A Ala alanine S Ser serine I Ile isoleucine L Leu leucineT Thr threonine V Val valine P Pro proline K Lys lysine H His histidineQ Gln glutamine E Glu glutamic acid W Trp tryptophan R Arg arginine DAsp aspartic acid N Asn asparagine C Cys cysteine

Amino acid precursor: Moiety capable of generating an amino acid residuefollowing incorporation of the precursor into a peptide.

Amplifying: Any process or combination of process steps that increasesthe number of copies of a templated molecule. Amplification of templatedmolecules may be carried out by any state of the art method including,but not limited to, a polymerase chain reaction to increase the copynumber of each template, and using the templates for synthesisingadditional copies of the templated molecules comprising a sequence offunctional groups resulting from the synthesis of the templated moleculebeing templated by the template. Any amplification reaction orcombination of such reactions known in the art can be used asappropriate as readily recognized by those skilled in the art.Accordingly, templated molecules can be amplified by using thepolymerase chain reaction (PCR), ligase chain reaction (LCR), in vivoamplification of cloned DNA, and the like. The amplification methodshould preferably result in the proportions of the amplified mixturebeing essentially representative of the proportions of templates ofdifferent sequences in a mixture prior to amplification.

Base: Nitrogeneous base moiety of a natural or non-natural nucleotide,or a derivative of such a nucleotide comprising alternative sugar orphosphate moieties. Base moieties include any moiety that is differentfrom a naturally occurring moiety and capable of complementing one ormore bases of the opposite nucleotide strad of a double helix.

Building block: Species comprising a) at least one complementing elementcomprising at least one recognition group capable of recognising apredetermined coding element, b) at least one functional entitycomprising a functional group and a reactive group, and c) at least onelinker separating the at least one functional entity from the at leastone complementing element, wherein the building block does not comprisea ribosome. Preferred building blocks are capable of being incorporatedinto a nucleotide strand and/or capable of being linked by reactionsinvolving reactive groups of type I and/or type II as described herein.

Cleavable linker: Residue or bond capable of being cleaved underpredetermined conditions.

Cleaving: Breaking a chemical bond. The bond may be a covalent bond or anon-covalent bond.

Coding element: Element of a template comprising a recognition group andcapable of recognising a predetermined complementing element of abuilding block. The recognition may result from the formation of acovalent bond or from the formation of a non-covalent bond betweencorresponding pairs of coding elements and complementing elementscapable of interacting with one another.

Coding element complementation: Contacting a coding element with apredetermined complementing element capable of recognising said codingelement.

Complementing: Process of bringing a coding element into reactivecontact with a predetermined complementing element capable ofrecognising said coding element. When the coding element and thecomplement element comprises a natural nucleotide comprising a basemoiety, predetermined sets of nucleotides are capable of complementingeach other by means of hydrogen bonds formed between the base moieties.

Complementing element: Element of a building block. Linked to at leastone functional entity by means of a linker. See coding element.

Complementing template: A sequence of complementing elements, whereineach complementing element is covalently linked to a neighbouringcomplementing element. A complementing element is capable of recognisinga predetermined coding element. The complementing template may be linearor branched.

Complex: Templated molecule linked to the template that templated thesynthesis of the templated molecule. The template can be a complementingtemplate as defined herein that is optionally hybridised or otherwiseattached to a corresponding template of linked coding elements.

Contacting: Bringing e.g. corresponding reactive groups or correspondingbinding partners or hybridization partners into reactive contact witheach other. The reactive contact is evident from a reaction or theformation of a bond or a hybridization between the partners.

Corresponding binding partners: Binding partners capable of reactingwith each other.

Corresponding reactive groups: Reactive groups capable of reacting witheach other.

Functional entity: Entity forming part of a building block. Thefunctional entity comprises a functional group and a reactive groupcapable of linking neighbouring, functional groups.

Functional group: Group forming part of a templated molecule. Thesequence of functional groups in a templated molecule is a result of thecapability of the template to template the synthesis of the templatedmolecule.

Interacting: Used interchangably with contacting. Bringing species suchas e.g. corresponding binding partners in the form of e.g. codingelements and complementing elements into reactive contact with eachother. The reaction may be mediated by recognition groups formingcorresponding binding partners by means of covalent or non-covalentbonds. The interaction may occur as a result of mixing a templatecomprising a plurality of coding elements with a plurality of buildingblocks.

Ligand: Used herein to describe a templated molecule capable oftargeting a target molecule. In a population of candidate templatemolecules, a ligand is one which binds with greater affinity than thatof the bulk population. In a candidate mixture there can exist more thanone ligand for a given target. The ligands can differ from one anotherin their binding affinities for the target molecule.

Linker: A residue or chemical bond separating at least two species. Thespecies may be retained at an essentially fixed distance, or the linkermay be flexible and allow the species some freedom of movement inrelation to each other. The link can be a covalent bond or anon-covalent bond. Linked species include e.g. a complementing elementand a functional entity of a building block, neighbouring codingelements of a template, neighbouring complementing elements of acomplementing template, and neighbouring functional groups of atemplated molecule.

Natural nucleotide: Any of the four deoxyribonucleotides, dA, dG, dT,and dC (constituents of DNA), and the four ribonucleotides, A, G, U, andC (constituents of RNA) are the natural nucleotides. Each naturalnucleotide comprises or essentially consists of a sugar moiety (riboseor deoxyribose), a phosphate moiety, and a natural/standard base moiety.Natural nucleotides bind to complementary nucleotides according towell-known rules of base pairing (Watson and Crick), where adenine (A)pairs with thymine (T) or uracil (U); and where guanine (G) pairs withcytosine (C), wherein corresponding base-pairs are part ofcomplementary, anti-parallel nucleotide strands. The base pairingresults in a specific hybridization between predetermined andcomplementary nucleotides. The base pairing is the basis by whichenzymes are able to catalyze the synthesis of an oligonucleotidecomplementary to the template oligonucleotide. In this synthesis,building blocks (normally the triphosphates of ribo or deoxyriboderivatives of A, T, U, C, or G) are directed by a templateoligonucleotide to form a complementary oligonucleotide with thecorrect, complementary sequence. The recognition of an oligonucleotidesequence by its complementary sequence is mediated by corresponding andinteracting bases forming base pairs. In nature, the specificinteractions leading to base pairing are governed by the size of thebases and the pattern of hydrogen bond donors and acceptors of thebases. A large purine base (A or G) pairs with a small pyrimidine base(T, U or C). Additionally, base pair recognition between bases isinfluenced by hydrogen bonds formed between the bases. In the geometryof the Watson-Crick base pair, a six membered ring (a pyrimidine innatural oligonucleotides) is juxtaposed to a ring system composed of afused, six membered ring and a five membered ring (a purine in naturaloligonucleotides), with a middle hydrogen bond linking two ring atoms,and hydrogen bonds on either side joining functional groups appended toeach of the rings, with donor groups paired with acceptor groups.

Neighbouring: Elements, groups, entities or residues located next to oneanother in a sequence are said to be neighbouring. In cases where twocomplementing elements, each linked to a functional entity, are linkedto one another through one (or more) complementing element(s) that isnot linked to a functional entity, the aforementioned complementingelements are said to be neighbouring and said two complementing elementsdefine neighbouring functional entities and neighbouring coding elementsthat can be linked to one another, either directly or through one (ormore) coding element(s).

Non-natural amino acid: Any amino acid not included in Table 2 hereinabove. Non-natural amino acids includes, but is not limited to modifiedamino acids, L-amino acids, and stereoisomers of D-amino acids.

Non-natural base pairing: Base pairing among non-natural nucleotides, oramong a natural nucleotide and a non-natural nucleotide. Examples aredescribed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,037,120, wherein eight non-standardnucleotides are described, and wherein the natural base has beenreplaced by a non-natural base. As is the case for natural nucleotides,the non-natural base pairs involve a monocyclic, six membered ringpairing with a fused, bicyclic heterocyclic ring system composed of afive member ring fused with a six membered ring. However, the patternsof hydrogen bonds through which the base pairing is established aredifferent from those found in the natural AT, AU and GC base pairs. Inthis expanded set of base pairs obeying the Watson-Crickhydrogen-bonding rules, A pairs with T (or U), G pairs with C, iso-Cpairs with iso-G, and K pairs with X, H pairs with J, and M pairs with N(FIG. 2). Nucleobases capable of base pairing without obeyingWatson-Crick hydrogen-bonding rules have also been described (Berger etal., 2000, Nucleic Acids Research, 28, pp. 2911-2914).

Non-natural nucleotide: Any nucleotide not falling within the definitionof a natural nucleotide.

Nucleotide: Nucleotides as used herein refers to both naturalnucleotides and non-natural nucleotides capable of being incorporated—ina template-directed manner—into an oligonucleotide, preferably by meansof an enzyme comprising DNA or RNA dependent DNA or RNA polymeraseactivity, including variants and functional equivalents of natural orrecombinant DNA or RNA polymerases. Corresponding binding partners inthe form of coding elements and complementing elements comprising anucleotide part are capable of interacting with each other by means ofhydrogen bonds. The interaction is generally termed “base-pairing”.Nucleotides may differ from natural nucleotides by having a differentphosphate moiety, sugar moiety and/or base moiety. Nucleotides mayaccordingly be bound to their respective neighbour(s) in a template or acomplementing template by a natural bond in the form of a phosphodiesterbond, or in the form of a non-natural bond, such as e.g. a peptide bondas in the case of PNA (peptide nucleic acids).

Nucleotide analog: Nucleotide capable of base-pairing with anothernucleotide, but incapable of being incorporated enzymatically into atemplate or a complementary template. Nucleotide analogs often includesmonomers or oligomers containing non-natural bases or non-naturalbackbone structures that do not facilitate incorporation into anoligonucleotide in a template-directed manner. However, interaction withother monomers and/or oligomers through specific base pairing ispossible. Alternative oligomers capable of specifically base pairing,but unable to serve as a substrate of enzymes, such as DNA polymerasesand RNA polymerases, or mutants or functional equivalents thereof, aredefined as nucleotide analogs herein. Oligonucleotide analogs includese.g. nucleotides in which the phosphodiester-sugar backbone of naturaloligonucleotides has been replaced with an alternative backbone includepeptide nucleic acid (PNA), locked nucleic acid (LNA), and morpholinos.

Nucleotide derivative: Nucleotide or nucleotide analog furthercomprising an appended molecular entity. Often, derivatized buildingblocks (nucleotides to which a molecular entity have been appended) canbe enzymatically incorporated into oligonucleotides by RNA or DNApolymerases, using as substrate the triphosphate of the derivatizednucleoside. In many cases such derivatized nucleotides are incorporatedinto the growing oligonucleotide chain with high specificity, meaningthat the derivative is inserted opposite a predetermined nucleotide inthe template. Such an incorporation will be understood to be a specificincorporation. The nucleotides can be derivatized on the bases, theribose/deoxyribose unit, or on the phosphate. Preferred sites ofderivatization on the bases include the 8-position of adenine, the5-position of uracil, the 5- or 6-position of cytosine, and the7-position of guanine. The nucleotide-analogs described below may bederivatized at the corresponding positions (Benner, U.S. Pat. No.6,037,120). Other sites of derivatization may be used, as long as thederivatization does not disrupt base pairing specificity. Preferredsites of derivatization on the ribose or deoxyribose moieties are the5′, 4′ or 2′ positions. In certain cases it may be desirable tostabilize the nucleic acids towards degradation, and it may beadvantageous to use 2′-modified nucleotides (U.S. Pat. No. 5,958,691).Again, other sites may be employed, as long as the base pairingspecificity is not disrupted. Finally, the phosphates may bederivatized. Preferred derivatizations are phosphorothiote. Nucleotideanalogs (as described below) may be derivatized similarly tonucleotides. It is clear that the various types of modificationsmentioned herein above, including i) derivatization and ii) substitutionof the natural bases or natural backbone structures with non-naturalbases and alternative, non-natural backbone structures, respectively,can be applied once or more than once within the same molecule.

Oligonucleotide: Used herein interchangebly with polynucleotide. Theterm oligonucleotide comprises oligonucleotides of both natural and/ornon-natural nucleotides, including any combination thereof. The naturaland/or non-natural nucleotides may be linked by natural phosphodiesterbonds or by non-natural bonds. Oligonucleotide is used interchancablywith polynucleotide.

Oligomer: Molecule comprising a plurality of monomers that may beidentical, of the same type, or different. Oligomer is used synonymouslywith polymer in order to describe any molecule comprising more than twomonomers. Oligomers may be homooligomers comprising a plurality ofidentical monomers, oligomers comprising different monomers of the sametype, or heterooligomers comprising different types of monomers, whereineach type of monomer may be identical or different.

Partitioning: Process whereby templated molecules, or complexescomprising such molecules linked to a template, are preferentially boundto a target molecule and separated from templated molecules, orcomplexes comprising such molecules linked to a template, that do nothave an affinity for—and is consequently not bound to—such targetmolecules. Partitioning can be accomplished by various methods known inthe art. The only requirement is a means for separating targeted,templated molecules bound to a target molecule from templated moleculesnot bound to target molecules. The choice of partitioning method willdepend on properties of the target molecule and of the templatedmolecule and can be made according to principles and properties known tothose of ordinary skill in the art.

Peptide: Plurality of covalently linked amino acid residues defining asequence and linked by amide bonds. The term is used analogously witholigopeptide and polypeptide. The amino acids may be both natural aminoacids and non-natural amino acids, including any combination thereof.The natural and/or non-natural amino acids may be linked by peptidebonds or by non-peptide bonds. The term peptide also embracespost-translational modifications introduced by chemical orenzyme-catalyzed reactions, as are known in the art. Suchpost-translational modifications can be introduced prior topartitioning, if desired. Amino acids as specified herein willpreferentially be in the L-stereoisomeric form. Amino acid analogs canbe employed instead of the 20 naturally-occurring amino acids. Severalsuch analogs are known, including fluorophenylalanine, norleucine,azetidine-2-carboxylic acid, S-aminoethyl cysteine, 4-methyl tryptophanand the like.

Plurality: At least two.

Polymer: Templated molecule characterised by a sequence of covalentlylinked residues each comprising a functional group, including H.Polymers according to the invention comprise at least two residues.

Polynucleotide: See oligonucleotide,

Precursor: Moiety comprising a residue and being capable of undergoing areaction during template directed synthesis of a templated molecule,wherein the residue part of the precursor is built into the templatedmolecule.

Reactive group: Corresponding reactive groups being brought intoreactive contact with each other are capable of forming a chemical bondlinking e.g. a coding element and its complementing element, or couplingfunctional groups of a templated molecule.

Recognition group: Part of a coding element and involved in therecognition of the complementing element capable of recognising thecoding element. Preferred recognition groups are natural and non-naturalnitrogeneous bases of a natural or non-natural nucleotide.

Recombine: A recombination process recombines two or more sequences by aprocess, the product of which is a sequence comprising sequences fromeach of the two or more sequences. When involving nucleotides, therecombination involves an exchange of nucleotide sequences between twoor more nucleotide molecules at sites of identical nucleotide sequences,or at sites of nucleotide sequences that are not identical, in whichcase the recombination can occur randomly. One type of recombinationamong nucleotide sequences is referred to in the art as gene shuffling.

Repetitive sequence: Sequence of at least two elements, groups, orresidues, occurring more than once in a molecule.

Residue: A polymer comprises a sequence of covalently linked residues,wherein each residue comprises a functional group.

Ribose derivative: Ribose moiety forming part of a nucleoside capable ofbeing enzymatically incorporated into a template or complementingtemplate. Examples include e.g. derivatives distinguishing the ribosederivative from the riboses of natural ribonucleosides, includingadenosine (A), guanosine (G), uridine (U) and cytidine (C). Furtherexamples of ribose derivatives are described in e.g. U.S. Pat. No.5,786,461. The term covers derivatives of deoxyriboses, and analogouslywith the above-mentioned disclosure, derivatives in this casedistinguishes the deoxyribose derivative from the deoxyriboses ofnatural deoxyribonucleosides, including deoxyadenosine (dA),deoxyguanosine (dG), deoxythymidine (dT) and deoxycytidine (dC).

Selectively cleavable linker: Selectively cleavable linkers are notcleavable under conditions wherein a cleavable linker is cleaved.Accordingly, it is possible to cleave the cleavable linkers linkingcomplementing elements and functional groups in a templated moleculewithout at the same time cleaving selectively cleavable linkerslinking—in the same templated molecule—a subset of complementingelements and functional groups. It is thus possible to obtain a complexcomprising a templated molecule and the template that has directed thetemplate-mediated synthesis of the templated molecule, wherein thetemplate and the templated molecule are linked by one or more,preferably one, selectively cleavable linker(s).

Specific recognition: The interaction of e.g. a coding element withpreferably one predetermined complementing element. A specificrecognition occurs when the affinity of a coding element recognitiongroup for a complementing group results in the formation ofpredominantly only one type of corresponding binding partners. Simplemis-match incorporation does not exclude a specific recognition ofcorresponding binding partners. Specific recognition is a term which isdefined on a case-by-case basis. In the context of a given interactionbetween predetermined binding partners, e.g. a templated molecule and atarget molecule, a binding interaction of templated molecule and targetmolecule of a higher affinity than that measured between the targetmolecule and a candidate template molecule mixture is observed. In orderto compare binding affinities, the conditions of both binding reactionsmust be essentially similar and preferably the same, and the conditionsshould be comparable to the conditions of the intended use. For the mostaccurate comparisons, measurements will be made that reflect theinteraction between templated molecule as a whole and target as a whole.The templated molecules of the invention can be selected to be asspecific as required, either by establishing selection conditions thatdemand a requisite specificity, or by tailoring and modifying thetemplated molecules.

Subunit: Monomer of coding element comprising at least one such subunit.

Support: Solid or semi-solid member to which e.g. coding elements can beattached during interaction with at least one complementing element of abuilding block. Functional molecules or target molecules may also beattached to a solid support during targeting. Examples of supportsincludes planar surfaces including silicon wafers as well as beads.

Tag: Entity capable of identifying a compound to which it is associated.

Target molecule: Any compound of interest for which a templated moleculein the form of a ligand is desired. A target molecule can be a protein,fusion protein, peptide, enzyme, nucleic acid, nucleic acid bindingprotein, carbohydrate, polysaccharide, glycoprotein, hormone, receptor,receptor ligand, cell membrane component, antigen, antibody, virus,virus component, substrate, metabolite, transition state analog,cofactor, inhibitor, drug, controlled substance, dye, nutrient, growthfactor, toxin, lipid, glycolipid, etc., without limitation.

Template: Template refers to both a template of coding elements and a(complementing) template of complementing elements unless otherwisespecified. When referring to a template of coding elements, each codingelement is covalently linked to a neighbouring coding element. Eachcoding element is capable of recognising a predetermined complementingelement. The template may be linear or branched. A template of codingelements actively takes part in the synthesis of the templated molecule,and the templating activity involves the formation of specific pairingpartners in the form of coding element:complementing element hybrids,wherein the complementing element forms part of a building block alsocomprising the functional group forming part of the templated molecule.The template is preferably a string of nucleotides or nucleotideanalogs. When the template comprises a string of nucleotides, thenucleotides may be natural or non-natural, and may be linked by e.g.phosphorothioate bonds or natural phosphodiester bonds. Nucleotideanalogs may be linked e.g. by amide bonds, peptide bonds, or anyequivalent means capable of linking nucleotide analogs so as to allowthe nucleotide analog string to hybridize specifically with anotherstring of nucleotides or nucleotide analogs. The sugar moiety of anucleotide or nucleotide analog may be a ribose or a deoxyribose, aribose derivative, or any other molecular moiety that allows thetemplate or complementing template to hybridise specifically to anotherstring of nucleotides or nucleotide analogs.

Template directed synthesis: Used synonymously with template directedincorporation and templated synthesis. Template directed synthesis isthe process, wherein the formation of a templated molecule comprising asequence of covalently linked, functional groups involves contacting astring of coding elements with particular complementing elements. Theprocess thus defines a one-to-one relationship between coding elementsand functional groups, and the contacted coding element of the templatedirects the incorporation of the functional group into the templatedmolecule comprising a sequence of covalently linked, functional groups.Accordingly, there is a predetermined one to one relationship betweenthe sequence of functional groups of the templated molecule and thesequence of coding elements of the template that templated the synthesisof the templated molecule. Thus, during the templated synthesis of thetemplated molecule, a functional group is initially contacting—by meansof a linker moiety and/or a complementing element, or otherwise—thecoding element capable of templating that particular functional groupinto the templated molecule. When the template comprises or essentiallyconsists of nucleotides, a template directed synthesis of anoligonucleotide is based on an interaction of each nucleotide with itspairing partner in the template in a one-base-to-one-base pairingmanner. The interaction specifies the incorporation of complementingnucleotides opposite their base pairing partners in the template.Consequently, one base, including a heterocyclic base, from eacholigonucleotide strand interact when forming specific base-pairs. Thisbase pairing specificity may be achieved through Watson-Crickhydrogen-bonding interactions between the bases, where the bases may benatural (i.e. A, T, G, C, U), and/or non-natural bases such as thosee.g. disclosed e.g. in U.S. Pat. No. 6,037,120, incorporated herein byreference. Further examples of non-natural bases are e.g. PNA (peptidenucleic acid), LNA (lock nucleic acid) and morpholinos. Base pairing ofoligonucleotides containing non-standard base pairs can be achieved byother means than hydrogen bonding (e.g. interaction between hydrophobicnucleobases with “complementary” structures; Berger et al., 2000,Nucleic Acids Research, 28, pp. 2911-2914). The interactingoligonucleotide strands as well as the individual nucleotides are saidto be complementary. The specificity of the interaction betweenoligomers results from the specific base pairing of a nucleotide withanother nucleotide or a predetermined subset of nucleotides, for exampleA base pairing with U, and C base pairing with G.

Templated: Feature of the templated molecule of the complex comprising atemplate linked to the templated molecule, wherein the templatedmolecule is obtainable by template directed synthesis using thetemplate. Thus, one component of the complex (the template) is capableof templating the synthesis of the other component (the templatedmolecule). The term is also used to describe the synthesis of thetemplated molecule that involves the incorporation into the templatedmolecule of functional groups, wherein the incorporation of eachfunctional group involves contacting a coding element with a particularfunctional group, or with a building block comprising said functionalgroup, wherein the contacted coding element of the template directs theincorporation of functional groups into the templated molecule linked tothe template that templated in this way the synthesis of the templatedmolecule. Thus, during the templated synthesis of the templatedmolecule, a functional group is initially contacting—either directly orby means of a linker moiety and/or a complementing element—the codingelement capable of templating that particular functional group into thetemplated molecule.

Templated molecule: Molecule comprising a sequence of covalently linked.functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is obtainable bytemplate directed synthesis using the template. Thus, one component ofthe complex (the template) is capable of templating the synthesis of theother component (the templated molecule). When the template comprises oressentially consists of nucleotides, the template is capable of beingamplified, wherein said template amplification results in a plurality oftemplated molecules, wherein each templated molecule is generated bytemplate directed synthesis using the template. Following amplificationof a template, or a complementing template, templated molecules can begenerated by a template directed synthesis using either a template ofcoding elements or a complementing template of complementing elements asa template for the template directed synthesis of the templatedmolecule.

Templating: Process of generating a templated molecule.

Variant: Template or templated molecule exhibiting a certain degree ofidentity or homology to a predetermined template or templated molecule,respectively.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

In one preferred embodiment of the present invention, there is provideda “chemical display of templated molecules” which enables the generationof a huge number of “templated polymers” (e.g. from about 10³ to aboutor more than e.g. 10¹⁸ as described elsewhere herein), wherein eachtemplated molecule is individually linked to a “template” that serves asidentification of that individual polymer (its sequence of residues), aswell as a means for amplification (many copies of the molecule can beprepared by a process that replicates the template). Preferredembodiments of the invention are disclosed in FIG. 1 illustratingvarious steps of the method of the invention.

Step 1. Synthesis

Different monomer building blocks are synthesized. Building blockscomprise a functional entity and a complementing element that are linkedby means of a cleavable linker (FIGS. 3 and 4). Preferred buildingblocks comprise a nucleotide to which have been appended a functionalentity through a cleavable linker, and where the functional entitycomprises or essentially consists of an “activatable” polymer unit (FIG.6).

Step 2. Incorporation

The building blocks are used as substrates in a template-dependentpolymer synthesis. In one embodiment, the building blocks arenucleotide-derivatives and a polymerase is preferably used toincorporate the nucleotide-derivatives into an oligonucleotide strandaccording to the directions of a oligonucleotide template. As a result,a complementing template (a string of incorporated building blocks) isformed, from which the functional entities protrude. The sequence offunctional entities is determined by the sequence of coding elements,such as nucleotides, of the template.

FIG. 1 describes the use of a building block that carries theselectively cleavable linker which, after polymerization and activation,is capable of linking the templated polymer to its template.Alternatively, the selectively cleavable linker can be comprised by anoligo capable of annealing upstream or downstream of the polymerencodingportion of the template (see for example FIG. 7 or 8), or the link couldbe to the template directly.

The building block can preferably be incorporated by an enzyme, such asfor example DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase, Reverse Transcriptase, DNAligase, RNA ligase, Taq DNA polymerase, HIV-1 Reverse Transcriptase,Klenow fragment, or any other enzyme that will catalyze theincorporation of complementing elements such as mono-, di- orpolynucleotides. In some of these cases, a primer is required (forexample DNA polymerase). In other cases, no primer is required (e.g.,RNA polymerase).

Step 3. Polymerization

Each functional entity has preferably reacted with neighbouringfunctional entities to form a polymer during or after formation of thecomplementing template. A change in conditions, e.g., photolysis, changein temperature, or change in pH, may initiate the polymerisation eitherduring or after complementing template formation.

Step 4. Activation

The formed polymer is preferably released from the complementingelements by cleavage of at least one linker, or a plurality of cleavablelinkers, except at one or more predetermined position(s), including asingle position, where the linker is not cleavable under conditionsresulting in cleavage of the remaining linkers. The result is atemplated polymer attached at one or more positions, preferably only atone position, to the template that encodes it.

Step 5. Selection and Amplification

A selection process can subsequently be performed, wherein a huge numberof different templated molecules, each attached to the template thatdirected its synthesis, is challenged with a molecular or physicaltarget (e.g. a biological receptor or a surface), or is exposed to acertain screen. Templated molecules having desired characteristics(e.g., binding to a receptor) are recovered and amplified, by firstamplifying the templates, and then using the templates for a new roundof templated polymer synthesis. The process of selection andamplification can be repeated several times, until a polymer withappropriate characteristics (e.g., high affinity for the receptor) isisolated.

A typical selection protocol involves the addition of a population (alibrary) of template-templated molecule complexes to an affinity column,to which a certain molecular target (e.g., a receptor) had beenimmobilized. After washing the column, the binders are eluted. Thiseluate consists of an enriched population of template-templated moleculecomplexes with affinity for the immobilized target molecule. Theenriched population may be taken through an amplification round, andthen be subjected to yet a selection round, where the conditionsoptionally may be more stringent. After a number of suchselection-and-amplification rounds, an enriched population of highaffine binders are obtained.

When selecting for the ability of a templated molecule to becomeinternalized into a cell, the selection step may involve a simple mixingof the population of template-templated molecule complexes with cells.After incubation (to allow the internalization of the template-templatedmolecule complexes), the cells are washed, and the internalizedtemplate-templated molecule complexes may be recovered by lysis of thecells. As above, the template-templated molecule complexes may beamplified and taken through further rounds ofselection-and-amplification. After a number ofselection-and-amplification rounds, an enriched population of templatedmolecules with the ability to internalize are obtained.

Building Blocks—Molecular Design

The building blocks (also termed “monomers”) is preferably of thegeneral design shown in FIGS. 3 and 4. The monomer in one embodimentcomprises the following elements: Complementing element-Linker-Backbonecomprising reactive group(s) type II-Functional group, where thecomplementing element comprises or essentially consists of a recognitiongroup and reactive group(s) type I. In this case the linker ispreferably a “traceless linker”, i.e., a linker that does not leave any(undesirable) molecular entity on the functional entity. Building blockswith this composition are used in for example (FIG. 15, example 7).

Alternatively, the monomer may have the composition Complementingelement-Linker-Functional Group-Backbone containing reactive group(s)type II, in which case the desired functional group is created as aresult of cleavage of the linker. Building blocks with this compositionare used in for example (FIG. 17, example 1).

The functional groups must be compatible with the desired method forincorporation of complementing elements, their polymerization andactivation. Obviously, it is important to preserve the integrity of thetemplate and the templated molecule in these processes.

Functional groups that are not compatible with the conditions ofincorporation, polymerization or activation must be protected duringthese processes, or alternatively, the functional groups must beintroduced after these processes have taken place. The latter is done bytemplating a functional group (e.g., an activated disulfide) that iscompatible with the incorporation, polymerization and activation, andthat will specifically react with a bifunctional molecule (e.g., a thiolconnected to the desirable functional group, R_(x)), added afteractivation. Alternatively, functionalities may be introduced by e.g.oxidation, or any other form of treatment, of the incorporatedfunctional entities after activation. In this way, functionalities suchas components of natural effector molecules or synthetic drugs that areotherwise difficult to handle, may be incorporated.

In some embodiments of the process of the invention as described herein,there is no need for a cleavable linker, as the polymerisation reactioninvolves cleavage of the linker (FIG. 14 and FIG. 14, example 1).

When being nucleotides, the complementing elements may contain one, twoor several nucleotides or nucleotide-analogs. The use of di-, tri- orlonger oligonucleotides presents a number of advantages. First, a highermonomer diversity may be encoded by the template. Second, therequirements for the site of attachment of the functional entity to thecomplementing element becomes more relaxed. Third, there would be lessbulk per mononucleotide in the formed polynucleotide, potentiallyleading to higher display-efficiencies. Fourth, it would allow thedisplay of polymers with longer residue-unit-length. Also, it wouldallow the display of bigger functional groups.

In cases where a polymerase is employed for the incorporation ofnucleotide comprising building blocks, it is preferred that thenucleotides are derivatized in a way that allows their specific andefficient incorporation into the growing strand.

More than 100 different nucleoside- and nucleotide-derivatives arecommercially available or can be made using simple techniques (Eaton,Current Opinion in Chemical Biology, 1997, 1: 10-16). Moreover, manynucleotide-derivatives, modified on the bases or the riboses, areincorporated efficiently and specifically by various polymerases, inparticular T7 RNA polymerase and Reverse Transcriptase (FIG. 9).Nucleotides with additions of up to 300 Da have been incorporatedspecifically and efficiently (Wiegand et al., Chemistry and Biology,1997, 4: 675-683; Fenn and Herman, Analytical Chemistry, 1990, 190:78-83; Tarasow and Eaton, Biopolymers, 1998, 48: 29-37). In addition tothe four natural base pairs (AT or AU, TA or UA, CG, GC), at least 8base pairs are known to hybridise specifically, some of which areincorporated into oligonucleotides by polymerases in atemplate-dependent manner.

The incorporation of complementing elements may be catalyzed by chemicalor biological catalysts. When the building blocks are nucleotides,particularly relevant catalysts are template-dependent DNA- andRNA-polymerases, including reverse transcriptases, and DNA- andRNA-ligases, ribozymes and deoxyribozymes. Specific examples includeHIV-1 Reverse Transcriptase, AMV Reverse Transcriptase, T7 RNApolymerase and T7 RNA polymerase mutant Y639F, Sequenase, Taq DNApolymerase, Klenow Fragment (Large fragment of DNA polymerase I),DNA-ligase, T7 DNA polymerase, T4 DNA polymerase, T4 DNA Ligase, E. coliRNA polymerase, rTh DNA polymerase, Vent DNA polymerase, Pfu DNApolymerase, Tte DNA polymerase, ribozymes with ligase or replicaseactivities such as described in (Johnston et al., Science, May 18, 2001,pp. 1319-1325), and other enzymes that accept nucleotides and/oroligonucleotides as substrates. Mutant or engineered polymerases withimproved characteristics, for example broadened nucleotide substratespecificity, and mutants in which the proofreading function has beeneliminated (for example by deleting the nuclease activity), areparticularly relevant. The polymerases may use single or double strandednucleotides as templates, and produce single or double strandednucleotide products.

Sites of modification that have been shown to be accepted by polymerasesinclude the following non-exhaustive list of examples (See also FIG. 9):

Nucleotide Site of modification dATP 3-position dATP 7-position dATP8-position dATP 2′ (deoxyribose moiety) dTTP 4′ (deoxyribose moiety)dGTP 7-position dCTP 2′ (deoxyribose moiety) dUTP 2′ (deoxyribose) UTP5-position ATP 8-position

Terminal transferase, RNA ligases, Polynucleotide kinases and othertemplate independent enzymes that accept nucleotides and/oroligonucleotides as substrates, including engineered or mutant variants,may be used for some of the applications and method variations describedin the present invention.

It may be possible to attach the functional entities at other sites inthe nucleotide, without eliminating hybridization or incorporationspecificity. Particularly when employing complementing elements that aredi-, tri- or polynucleotides, it may be possible to attach functionalentities at these alternative sites without inhibiting specificincorporation.

Cleavable and Non-Cleavable Linkers

A selection of cleavable linkers and protection groups, as well as theagents that cleave them, are illustrated in (FIG. 10). In one aspect ofthe invention, the linker may be selected from the following list:Carbohydrides and substituted carbohydrides; Vinyl, polyvinyl andsubstituted polyvinyl; Acetylene, polyacetylene; Aryl/hetaryl,polyaryl/hetaryl and substituted polyaryl/polyhetaryl; Ethers,polyethers such as e.g. polyethylenglycol and substituted polyethers;Amines, polyamines and substituted polyamines; Double stranded, singlestranded or partially double stranded natural and unnaturalpolynucleotides and substituted double stranded, single stranded orpartially double stranded natural and unnatural polynucleotides;Polyamides and natural and unnatural polypeptides and substitutedpolyamides and natural and unnatural polypeptides.

It one aspect of the invention it is preferred that linkers do not reactwith other linkers, complementing elements or functional entities, inthe same monomer or in another monomer. Also, in some of the schemesproposed herein, it is desirable that the linker is not cleaved by theconditions of polymerization. Finally, it is preferred that theconditions of linker cleavage does not affect the integrity of thetemplate, complementing template or functional entities.

Linkers can be cleaved in any number of ways when subjected topredetermined conditions. Linkers may e.g. be cleaved with acid, base,photolysis, increased temperature, added agents, enzymes, ribozymes orother catalysts. Examples of cleavable linkers and their respectiveprotection groups are shown in (FIG. 10), along with the conditions forlinker cleavage, and the cleavage products.

To maintain a physical link between the template and the templatedmolecule, at least one non-cleavable linker is needed. Thisnon-cleavable linker is preferably flexible, enabling it to expose thetemplated molecule in an optimal way.

Functional Groups

The one or more functional groups that appear on the functional entitymay be selected from a variety of chemical groups which gives thetemplated molecules the desired properties or serves another beneficialpurpose, like higher lipophilicity for recovery purposes. A non-limitingselection of functional groups is indicated below: Hydroxy; alkoxy,Hydrogen; Primary, secondary, tertiary amines; Carboxylic acids;Carboxylic acids esters; Phosphates, phosphonates; Sulfonates,sulfonamides; Amides; Carbamates; Carbonates; Ureas; Alkanes, Alkenes,Alkynes; Anhydrides; Ketones; Aldehydes; Nitatrates, nitrites; Imines;Phenyl and other aromatic groups; Pyridines, pyrimidines, purines,indole, imidazole, and heterocyclic bases; Heterocycles; polycycles;Flavins; Halides; Metals; Chelates; Mechanism based inhibitors; Smallmolecule catalysts; Dextrins, saccharides; Fluorescein, Rhodamine andother fluorophores; Polyketides, peptides, various polymers; Enzymes andribozymes and other biological catalysts; Functional groups forpost-polymerization/post activation coupling of functional groups;Drugs, e.g., taxol moiety, acyclovir moiety, “natural products”;Supramolecular structures, e.g. nanoclusters; Lipids; andOligonucleotides, oligonucleotide analogs (e.g., PNA, LNA, morpholinos).

Reactive Groups of Type II

A variety of reactive groups II may be used in the templated synthesis.Examples of reactive groups include, but are not limited toN-carboxyanhydrides (NCA), N-thiocarboxyanhydrides (NTA), Amines,Carboxylic acids, Ketones, Aldehydes, Hydroxyls, Thiols, Esters,Thioesters, conjugated system of double bonds, Alkyl halides,Hydrazines, N-hydroxysuccinimide esters, Epoxides, Haloacetyls,UDP-activated saccharides, Sulfides, Cyanates, Carbonylimidazole,Thiazinanones, Phosphines, Hydroxylamines, Sulfonates, Activatednucleotides, Vinylchloride, Alkenes, and quinines.

Polymerization

Reactions that lead to polymer formation are termed polymerizationreactions. The major reaction-classes are anionic polymerizations,cationic polymerizations, radical polymerizations, and pericyclicpolymerizations.

Although polymerisation reactions in solution is achievable by state ofthe art methods, polymerisation of functional entities linked to anarray as described herein does not constitute standard type reactions.Only a few polymerisation reactions have so far been performed in anarray format, and not in connection with the methods of the presentinvention. Consequently, it will be a matter of molecular design of thefunctional entities and their linkers and attachment points on thecomplementing elements (e.g. attachment to the base, ribose or phosphateof a nucleotide), as well as a matter of optimising the polymerisationconditions, in order to preferably reduce minimize or even eliminate anyundesirable reactions taking place in solution while increasing ormaximizing a correct template-directed polymerisation on the array.

The present invention in one embodiment employs polymerization reactionswhich are in principle known from the state of the art in the sense thatthey are routinely used in solution synthesis schemes. However, in thepresent invention, the reactants (reactive groups) are held in closeproximity by their attachment to elements of a complementing template.This increases the local concentration significantly. Typical synthesisschemes in solution use 1 μM-1 mM concentrations of the reactants. Whenarrayed as disclosed herein, the local concentration will typically befrom a thousand-fold to a million-fold higher. As a result, thereactions can in principle be much more efficient. However, thereactions are preferably designed in such a way that the occurrence ofundesirable side-reactions are avoided. The molecular design and thepolymerization conditions according to the invention reflect this factand can be further optimised by the skilled person searching for thepolymerization conditions and molecular design that maximizes therelative template directed polymerization polymerization in solution.

Depending on the type of initiator and reactive groups, thepolymerization may be initiated and/or catalyzed by changes in pH and/ortemperature, addition of reactants or catalysts, enzymes or ribozymes,or light, UV or other electromagnetic radiation, etc. Particularlyrelevant enzymes include proteases, protein ligase (e.g., sub-tiligase),UDP-glycogen synthetases, CGTases and polyketide synthases. In caseswhere the conditions and molecular designs have been finely adjusted, soas to allow efficient polymerization of the reactants when arrayed onthe complementing template, but insignificant reaction in solution, thepolymerization need not be initiated. The increased local concentrationin the array simply drives the polymerization.

In the case where incorporation of monomer building blocks areincorporated by an enzyme, one might fuse this enzyme with one of theenzymes mentioned above (e.g., the UDP-glykogen synthetase). This wouldallow the fusion-protein to first incorporate a monomer through reactionof its reactive groups type I, and right thereafter (as thenow-incorporated monomer emerges from the active site of the enzyme),the other half of the fusion-protein (e.g., the UDP-glykogen synthetase)would link the functional entity of that monomer to the functionalentity of the previous monomer in the complementing template.

The functional groups (or backbone structures) may have to be protected,in order to not react with the reactive groups or other components ofthe system during incorporation, polymerization and activation. This maybe achieved using standard protection groups, some of which arementioned in (FIG. 10).

The polymerization reactions described herein below are divided into twomajor groups, dependent on whether the functional entity is held in afixed orientation relative to the complementing template.

Group 1: The Functional Entities can Rotate Relative to theComplementing Elements (and can Therefore Rotate Relative to theComplementing Template).

Direct Linkage of Reactive Groups: The Reactive Group Type II of OneMonomer React Directly with the Reactive Croup Type II of AnotherMonomer.

a). In one example, the functional entity carries two reactive groups X1and X2 of the same kind. “Same kind” in this respect means that a givenX1 can react with both an identical X1 and a non-identical X2. In (FIG.11) X1 and X2 are identical, wherefore they are both symbolized with anX. X may react with another X to form XX (FIG. 11). As an example, Xmight be a thiol (—SH) and the resulting product a disulfide (—SS—). Asanother example, X could be a coumarin moiety which upon photo-inductionreacts with a coumarin moiety of a neighbouring monomer (FIG. 11,example 1).

In most cases, the reaction of X with X results in the loss of an atomor a molecular moiety; in the case of the thiol, for example, twoprotons are lost upon disulfide formation. The fact that XX (the resultof the reaction between two reactive groups type II) does not containall the components of X plus X, is indicated in (FIG. 5, A) where infact both types of reactive groups (both type I and II) upon reactionforms a molecular entity that is slightly different from the reactivegroups (symbolized by overlapping circles in the figure).

b). The two reactive groups type II may be of a different kind.“Different kind” here means that they react with different types ofmolecules. For example, X and Y might be nucleophiles and electrophiles,respectively. X and Y react to form XY (FIG. 12). For longer templatedmolecules, free rotation of the functional entities relative to thecomplementing template represents a potential problem, if the functionalentities do not react until many monomers have been incorporated. Inthis case, cluster formation (FIG. 13) may result, which decreases theamount of full-length, templated polymers. The problem is, however, onlysignificant for longer polymers; from experience with biological displayof α-peptides, such as phage-display and poly-some-display, it is knownthat display efficiencies as low as 1% is enough to isolate peptideswith high binding affinity for a given target.

In certain cases the incorporated monomers react right after theirincorporation into the complementing template (at which time the nextmonomer in the complementing template has not been incorporated yet).Therefore, the last incorporated monomer will react with the second-lastincorporated monomer, which is already part of the complementingtemplate. As a result, cluster formation will not be a significantproblem in this case.

X and Y might be an amine and a carboxylic acid. In the presence ofcarbodiimide, X and Y will react to form an amide XY.

Another version of this type of polymerization involves the simultaneouspolymerization and activation of the polymer (FIG. 14). The monomers donot contain a separate linker moiety; rather, the polymerizationreaction leads to activation (release of the functional entity from thecomplementing template). In this scheme, each monomer is incorporatedand reacts with the previously incorporated monomer, leading to thepreviously incorporated monomers release from the complementingtemplate, before the next monomer is incorporated. (FIG. 14, example 1)shows the use of this principle for the formation of polyamides, in thiscase β-peptides. The method may obviously be used for other peptidesalso, as well as any kind of polyamides.

By appropriate design of the monomers, one may generate other types ofpolymer bonds by nucleophilic substitution reactions, including amide,ester, carbamate, carbonate, phosphonate, phosphodiester, sulfonamide,urea, carbopeptide, glycopeptide, saccharide, hydrazide, disulfide andpeptoid bonds.

In (FIG. 14, example 2) the same principle is applied to a differenttype of reaction, a “rolling circle polymerization reaction”. An alkylsulfonate is here used as an efficient leaving group, to drive theformation of a secondary amine. The result is a functionalizedpolyamine, attached at one end to the template that directed itssynthesis. In an analogous way, one may generate polyether andpoly-thioether using similar molecular designs. Polymers that can begenerated by the use of the principles described in (FIGS. 14 and 14,example 1 and 2) include oligodeoxynucleotides, oligoribonucleotides,chimeric oligonucleotides, oligonucleotide analogs (e.g., PNA, LNA),peptoids, polypeptides and β-peptides.

“Fill-in” Polymerization: An Additional Molecule Mediates LinkageBetween Reactive Groups Type II from Neighbouring Monomers.

a). The functional entity carry one or two reactive groups X1 and X2 ofthe same kind, where X1 cannot react with another X1 or X2. For example,X1 and X2 could be a primary and secondary amine, respectively. In orderto polymerize, a compound of the kind Y1-linker-Y2 is added, where Y1and Y2 are of the same kind. Y can react with X, but is sterically orchemically excluded from reaction with another Y. As a result, a X—Y—Y—Xis formed (FIG. 15). As an example, X could be an amine, and Y aactivated ester. Upon reaction, this would form an ester-ester bond(X—Y—Y—X) between two functional entities.

It is preferred that the two X of one monomer does not to anysignificant extent react with the same Y-linker-Y molecule. This can beprevented e.g. by imposing steric constraints on the molecules, e.g., Ysin the Y-linker-Y molecule are further apart than the Xs in the monomer.

(FIG. 15, example 2) provides two examples of “fill-in” polymerizationof polyamides. In (FIG. 15, example 2, A and B), the reactive groupstype II are amines, and the Y-linker-Y molecule is a dicarboxylic acidor an activated di-ester. In either case, the resulting product is adi-amide polymer. Obviously, the kind of X and Y could be switched, sothat in the examples X was a carboxylic acid and Y an amine. Othercombinations of X and Y, and their resulting bonds, are given in FIG.25, which summarizes some of the kinds of polymers that may be generatedby the various polymerization principles described in the presentpatent.

For certain reactions, the linking molecule need only contain onereactive group X. An example is shown in (FIG. 15, example 3A), wherethe functional entities contain two reactive groups type II (amines),and the added molecule is a phosgen equivalent such as1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole. The resulting bond is an urea bond. In (FIG.15, example 5) the monomers contain two hydroxyl groups, to which isadded an activated phosphodiester or an activated phosphine derivativesuch as a bis-aminophosphine following activation with tetrazole andoxidation with tert-butylhydroperoxide. The result is a phosphodiesterbond.

The functional entity may in certain cases contain only one reactivegroup type II. An example is shown in (FIG. 15, example 6), where anactivated phosphodiester makes up the only reactive group type II of themonomer. Upon reaction with a dihydroxy, a phosphodiester backbone isformed.

As yet another example of fill-in polymerization, (FIG. 15, example 7)shows the pericyclic reaction of dienes (functional entity) reactingwith alkenes (linking molecule), to form a polycyclic compound.

A general consideration when using the fill-in polymerization principle,is the number of stereoisomers templated by the same template. Forexample, in (FIG. 15, example 4, A), the functional entity contains twoprimary amines. The functional entity is connected to the complementingtemplate through a chiral carbon. The functional entity may rotatefreely around the bond that connects this chiral atom with thecomplementing template. Therefore, the reaction of the amines (X) withthe linking molecules (activated carbonyls, (Y)) will result in theformation of 2^(n) different isomers, where n is the number of residuesof the polymer.

The isomers represent a significant increase in diversity. For example,for a 10-meric polymer, the chirality represents a 1024-fold increase indiversity. This may in certain cases be an advantage, for example if themonomer diversity is low, or if the desire is to make short polymers.However, such “scrambling” of the genetic code (i.e., one templateencodes different polymer structures) also decreases the stringency ofthe selection process. Therefore, in certain cases scrambling is notdesirable. One may then choose to connect the functional entities to thecomplementing elements via non-chiral atoms. In (FIG. 15, example 4, B)is shown an example of an achiral atom (nitrogen) connecting thefunctional entity with the complementing template. Scrambling mayinvolve cases where one complementing element specifies differentisomers (as described above), and scrambling may also involve caseswhere a complementing element specifies slightly different or entirelydifferent functional entities.

b). The functional entity carries two different reactive groups of typeII, X and S (FIG. 16). X does not react with X or S, and vice cersa.Before, during or after incorporation of monomers, molecules of the formT-linker-Y are added. X may react with Y, and S may react with T,leading to formation of X—S-T-Y linkages between the functionalentities. It is important to ensure that X and S of one functionalentity cannot react with T and Y of one linking molecule. This may beensured by appropriate design of the structure of the functionalentities and linking molecule. (FIG. 16, example 1) provides an exampleof a functional entity with different reactive groups type II, in thiscase an azide and a hydrazide (X and S), and a linking molecule withdifferent reactive groups, in this case a phosphine and a ketone(T-linker-Y).

For longer templated molecules, free rotation of the functional entitiesrelative to the complementing template represents a potential problem,if the functional entities do not react until many monomers have beenincorporated. In this case, cluster formation (FIG. 13) may result,which decreases the amount of full-length, templated polymers. Theproblem is, however, only significant for longer polymers, as explainedabove. If the linking molecules are present during incorporation of thecomplementing elements, the incorporated monomers may react with thelinking molecules right after their incorporation, or in the case ofenzyme-mediated incorporation, as soon as they emerge from the activesite of the enzyme. Cluster formation will not be a significant problemin these cases.

“Zipping” Polymerization: The Polymerization Reaction Travels from OneEnd of the Template to the Other.

In this approach, the polymerization reaction is directional, i.e., thereaction cascade starts at one end of the complementing template, andthe reactions migrate to the other end of the complementing template,thereby forming a templated polymer.

a). General principle (FIG. 18). After incorporation of some or all ofthe monomer building blocks, polymerization is initiated from one end ofthe template, and travels down the template. For example, the initiatormay be coupled to the first or last complementing element to beincorporated, or it may be coupled to the primer used in DNApolymerase-mediated incorporation of nucleotide-derivatives. Either way,the initiator will react with the neighbouring monomer's reactive grouptype II, which induces a change in the functional entity of thatmonomer, allowing this monomer to react with the next monomer in thechain, and so on. Eventually, all the monomers have reacted, and apolymer has been formed.

It may be desirable to protect the initiator, keeping it from reactingwith the neighbouring monomer until incorporation is complete,whereafter the initiator is deprotected. This allows the experimenter toremove all non-incorporated initiators and complementing elements beforeactivating the initiator, which eliminates reaction in solution betweenthe initiator and the complementing elements.

Deprotection of the initiator may be by change in pH or temperature,exposure to electromagnetic radiation, or addition of an agent (thatremoves a protection group, or introduces an initiator at a specificposition, or ligates or coordinates to the naïve initiator, to make it amore potent initiator). The agent could be a chemical catalyst or anenzyme, for example an esterase or peptidase.

b). Zipping by radical polymerization (FIG. 18, example 1). Theinitiator is a alkyl-iodide, and the functional entities contain adouble bond. Upon addition of a radical initiator, for exampleammoniumpersulfate, AIBN (azobis-isobutyronitrile) or other radicalchain reaction initiators, a radical chain reaction is initiated,whereby the alkenes react to form an extended, functionalized alkane.Eventually, the polymer has been made, and it is activated (cleaved fromthe complementing template, except at one point). The radical remainingat the end of the polymer may be quenched by a radical terminationreaction.

c). Zipping by cationic polymerization (FIG. 18, example 2). Theinitiator is a Lewis acid. Upon deprotection with acid or otherinitiation reagent, a cation is generated. The carbocation attacks thedouble bond of the neighbouring monomer, and as a result a carbocationis generated in this monomer. Eventually, the full-length polymer hasbeen formed, and the polymer is activated.

d). Zipping by nucleophilic (anionic) polymerization (FIG. 18, example3). In this example, the initiator is a protected hydroxyl anion. Thefunctional entity carries a peroxide. Upon deprotection of the initiatorthe hydroxyl-anion is formed (e.g., by alkaline deprotection). Underbasic conditions, the initiator attacks the neighbouring epoxide at theleast hindered carbon in the ring. This in turn generates ahydroxyl-anion, which attacks the neighbouring epoxide. Eventually, thefull polymer is formed, and the polyether may be activated. In thisexample, all of the linkers that connect the polyether to thecomplementing template are cleaved.

This type of polymerization is also an example of ring-openingpolymerization.

e). Zipping polymerization by ring opening (FIG. 19). The generalprinciple of ring-opening polymerization is shown. The initiator attacksthe reactive group X of the neighbouring monomer. X is part of a ringstructure, and as a result of the reaction between the initiator and X,the ring opens, whereby the other reactive group of the monomer isactivated for attack on the next monomer in the array. Polymerizationtravels down the strand, and eventually the full-length polymer has beenformed.

f). β-peptide formation by ring-opening polymerization ofcarboxyanhydrides (FIG. 19, example 1). The deprotected initiator, anucleophilic amine, attacks the most electrophilic carbonyl of theN-thiocarboxyanhydride, to form an amide. CSO is released, generating aprimary amine, which then attacks the next monomer in the array.Eventually polymerization is complete, and the polymer may be activated,creating a β-peptide attached to the complementing template or templatethrough its C-terminal end. The principle may be used to form othertypes of peptides, for example D- and L-form mono- and disubstitutedα-peptides, β-peptides, γ-peptides, carbopeptides and peptoids (polyN-substituted glycin), and other types of polyamides. Also, theprinciple can be employed for the generation of other polymers, such aspolyesters, polyureas, and polycarbamates.

g). β-peptide formation by ring-opening polymerization of thiazinanoneunits (FIG. 19, example 2). The deprotected initiator attacks the cyclicthioester, to form an amide. As a result, the ring breaks down torelease a free thioketone. This generates an amine, which may now attackthe thioester of the next monomer in the array. When polymerization hastravelled to the other end of the template, it is activated, generatinga β-peptide attached to its template through the C-terminal end.

The principle may be used to form other types of peptides, for exampleD- and L-form mono- and disubstituted α-peptides, β-peptides,γ-peptides, carbopeptides and peptoids (poly N-substituted glycin), andother types of polyamides. Also, the principle can be employed for thegeneration of other polymers, such as polyesters, polyureas, andpolycarbamates.

h) Zipping polymerization by rearrangement (FIG. 20). Upon activation ofthe initiator, which in this case could be an electrophile, the reactivegroup type II of the neighbouring monomer attacks the initiator, and asa result, releases the initiator from the complementing element. In theattacking monomer, the reaction of Y with the initiator leads to arearrangement of the monomer, which results in activation of X, theother reactive group type II of the monomer (for example, thereorganization creates a nucleophile). Then, the next monomer in thearray attacks this nucleophile. Eventually, full-length polymer has beenformed, attached at one end to the template that directed its synthesis.

i). Zipping and activation in one step (FIG. 21). By appropriate designof the functional entities used for ring-opening polymerization,activation may be achieved as a direct result of the polymerizationreaction. By simply turning the functional entity upside-down, i.e.,attach the portion of the ring that does not get incorporated into thefinal polymer to the complementing template, saves the experimenter anactivation step (compare FIG. 21 and FIG. 19). As a specific example,attachment of the 2,2-diphenylthiazinanone ring structure of (FIG. 19,example 2) to the complementing elements through one of the phenylgroups would lead to activation as a result of the polymerizationreaction.

Group 2: The Functional Entity Cannot Rotate Freely Relative to theComplementing Element

In this embodiment, the X and Y reactive groups type II are held in thedesired orientation relative to the complementing template (FIG. 22, A).X and Y can therefore react, or react with a linker molecule, withoutthe risk of cluster formation (compare with FIG. 13).

The functional entity may be held in the fixed orientation by a doublebond, or by bonds to different atoms in the complementing element. (FIG.22, B) provides an example, where the functional entity is covalentlycoupled to the two bases of a di-nucleotide (the complementing elementis a dinucleotide, the functional entity contains a dipeptide, and thereactive groups are the amine and the ester moieties, respectively).

Polymers that can be made by this method include all of the polymersmentioned in the non-zipping polymerizations above, for examplepeptides, amides, esters, carbamates, oximes, phosphodiesters, secondaryamines, ethers, etc.

The FIGS. 23 to 25 relates to how a cluster formation can be avoided bycovalent constrains.

A special situation arises employing bifunctional functional entities(FE) due to a potential free rotation around the linker-nucleotide bond.A bifunctional FE bears two different reactive groups ‘X’ and ‘Y’, e.g.both a nucleophile and an electrophile, where ‘X’ on one FE is meant toreact with ‘Y’ on the neighbour FE either directly or through across-linking agent. If all linker-FE units orient identically withrespect to the parent nucleotide, directional polymerization will takeplace and a complete product of say 5 units will be formed (‘FIG. 13top’). However, rotation around the linker-bond of some, but not all,linker-FE entities so that the relative orientation of the twofunctionalities reverses leads to a clustering situation, where thereacting groups are arranged so that reaction can take place in twodifferent directions (‘FIG. 13 bottom’). This unfavourable situation canbe avoided by using fixed functional entities thereby preventingrotation around the nucleotide-linker bond. Fixing the FEs may beobtained by attaching the FE not by one but by two covalent bonds (i.e.two linkers) to the nucleotide. The additional bond may be formeddirectly by one of the functionalities, or the two reactive groups maybe attached separate ‘arms’ on a fixed backbone. In the first situationthe additional bond may be broken during the reaction, whereas theadditional bond in the latter should be constructed so that also thisbond is cleavable after reaction, to release the final product.

The primary attachment points of the linker-FE units are typicallywithin the bases of the nucleotides, preferably position C5 in T/U and Cor position C7 in deaza A and deaza G. In order to construct anefficient inhibition of linker-bond rotation, the second bond shouldpreferably be somewhat distant from this attachment point. That is, thesecond attachment could be anywhere in a neighbour nucleotide,preferably in the base or in the sugar part, it could be a second atomin the same base, preferably position C6 in T/U and C or position C8 orN6 in (deaza)A or (deaza)G, or it could be an atom of the sugar moiety,preferably position C2 or C3. Explicit examples are given in FIG. 23.

It should be noted that nucleotides bearing some of thesedoubly-attached linkers may be necessary to incorporate by other meansthan using a polymerase. An alternative to polymerase incorporation isthe imidazole approach described elsewhere herein.

In order to show the effect of covalently constraining the FE to ensuredirectional polymerization a series of computer calculations have beenperformed on two examples shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B. The purpose is toanalyse various modes of attack for each linker-FE construction,estimating the most probable reaction and thereby the most probableproduct. Therefore, the conformational space covered by the linker-FEunit and the zones occupied by the reactive groups needs to beestimated.

The conformational space of a specific linker-FE system, i.e. the rangeof the FE, can be estimated by doing a conformational search.Conformational searches can be performed employing various differentsoftware and within these programs using different searching methods andis standard knowledge within the field. For systems of the sizementioned in this text it is not possible to perform a convergedconformational search, that is, to ensure that enough steps have beentaking so that the complete potential energy surface has been coveredand thereby that the located minimum energy conformation is truly theglobal minimum for the molecule. However, the purpose of thesecalculations is to get a picture of the space allowed to be covered by alinker-FE unit and thereby to estimate the most likely approach ofattack between two FEs and the possibility for the reacting groups toget within reaction distance. Efficient conformational searching methodsemploying a rather limited number of steps fulfil this purpose.

By conformations are here meant individual structural orientationsdiffering by simple rotation about single bonds. Different conformationsmay in addition give rise to different overall configurations, by whichis meant an overall arrangement of the two reactive groups on allmodified nucleotides that give rise to one specific direction ofreaction. That is, four linker-FE units arranged with all ‘X's’ in thesame direction corresponds to one specific configuration, and fourlinker-FE units arranged e.g. with two ‘X's’ pointing in one directionand the two other in the opposite direction corresponds to anotherspecific configuration. Within one configuration many differentconformations are possible, but all of these result in the same ‘mostprobable’ product since the overall orientation (direction) of reactivegroups is preserved.

The calculations performed in this investigation have been performedemploying the MacroModel7.2 software from Schrödinger Inc (MMOD72).Within this program package a series of different searching protocolsare available, including the ‘Mixed Monte Carlo Multiple Minimum/LowMode’ method (MCMM/LM), shown to be very effective in locating energyminima for large complicated systems.

Computational Details

Double-stranded DNA with the base sequence 5′-GCTTTTTTAG-3′ (upperstrand) (example displayed in FIG. 24) or 5′-GCTTTTAG-3′ (upper strand)(example displayed in FIG. 25) was built using HyperChem7 from HyperCubeInc in the most frequent B-conformation. The linker-FE units were builtusing ChemDraw Ultra 6.0 and Chem3D Ultra 6.0 from ChemOffice. Linker-FEunits and DNA were imported into MMOD72. The linkers were then fused tothe corresponding nucleotides using the build feature in MMOD72, fusingthe methyl carbon atom of the T nucleotides with the appropriate linkeratom, in effect creating a modified U nucleotide. In all calculationsall DNA atoms were kept frozen, that is, were not allowed to move, inorder to decrease the size of the systems and to avoid distortionswithin the DNA strand. The total system was energy minimised (keepingthe DNA atoms frozen) employing the OPLS_AA force field supplied inMMOD72. It was necessary to constrain the dihedral angle bridging thenucleotide and the linker, i.e. the dihedral of N1, C6, C5 and the firstlinker atom was set to 180.0 degrees and a force constant of between 100and 1000 applied. Without the constraint none of the MMOD72 force fieldspreserved the plane, presumably due to a too weak out-of-plane forceconstant for this particular dihedral.

Conformational analyses were performed using the MCMM/LM method, running2000 steps with an energy cutoff of 50 kJ/mol, and with a minimum andmaximum distance travelled by the fastest moving atom of 3 and 8 Å,respectively. Depending on the specific size of the system, 11-19torsions were allowed to vary, and finally each conformer was minimizedby 500-1000 PR Conjugate Gradient steps (this resulted in mostconformers being minimized to within a convergence threshold of 0.05kJ/mol). The chirality of chiral atoms was preserved during thecalculations. In addition, for the systems with covalently constrainedlinkers one ring closure bond (either the formed amide bond or thebase-S bond) was chosen within each ring.

Results

One way of creating a second attachment point is to link one of thefunctional entities via a breakable bond to a neighbour nucleotide. Ineffect, this means that dinucleotides in stead of mononucleotides areemployed and also that the length of the FE is increased. Using thisapproach, a series of valid attachment points exist; FIG. 23A is anexample of attachment to the same position of the neighbour base. Linker1A is constructed from a β-dipeptide, with the amino end connected tothe 5′ base via a disulfide bond prone for reductive cleavage and thecarboxy-end directly linked to the 3′ base. When reaction takes placethe amino group from one dinucleotide-linker-FE unit will break theester bond of the preceding dinucleotide-linker-FE. Employing the samelinker-FE unit without the second attachment point corresponds toemploying dipeptides on one-nucleotide-spaced mononucleotides. Such alinker-FE bears two reactive groups on separate arms and has freerotation about the nucleotide-linker bond and is therefore an example ofa bifunctional linker-FE which bears the risk of cluster formation incase of lack of directional polymerization.

Running 2000 conformational search steps of the singly-attached linkerresults in 490 unique conformations (849 conformations after 500minimization steps, 490 after additional 500 steps) with the ‘global’minimum located once. The lowest-energy conformation which results in acomplete product has rank 8 and is shown in FIG. 24A and the resultingmost probable product (still attached the DNA backbone) in FIG. 24B. Ascan be seen, the reactive groups arrange with all amino groups upwardsand all carboxy groups downwards, and the two reactions that arerequired to give a complete product are straight-forward. The releasedcomplete product is shown as FIG. 24H. However, by far the mostconformations, including the ‘global’ minimum, do not have this overallconfiguration. FIG. 24C shows the conformation of second highest rankand the most probable product is depicted in FIG. 24D. As can be seen,this arrangement of the reactive groups results in the formation of anincomplete product. The two linker-FE units in the 3′ end have formed anamide bond, but the 5′ linker-FE unit has the opposite overallorientation resulting in two carboxy groups (one from the 5′ linker-FEunit and one from the merged 3′ linker-FE units) being the two closereactive groups and thus no reaction is possible. Release of thisproduct therefore results in a dimer (and a monomer); the dimer isdepicted in FIG. 22. Of the 364 unique conformations within 10 kJ/mol ofthe located minimum approximately 330 results in the formation ofvarious incomplete products.

Running 2000 conformational search steps of the doubly-attached linkerresults in 125 unique conformations with the ‘global’ minimum locatednine times. This minimum energy conformation is shown in FIG. 24E, whereall FEs are seen to arrange with the amino groups pointing downwards andcarboxy groups upwards. Clearly, this overall configuration is the onlyone possible for the doubly-attached linker, giving rise to only oneprobable product shown in FIG. 24F (still attached the DNA backbone).Release of this product gives the complete three-unit product, FIG. 24G.

Thus, this example shows first of all that rotation aroundnucleotide-linker bonds do result in (many) configurations unable toform complete products. However, another important issue is thedifference in complete products formed. The FEs employed in this exampleare constructed from unsubstituted β-amino acids and therefore there isno difference between the complete products shown in FIGS. 24 G and H.However, using singly-attached FEs the polarity of the formed productscan change (i.e. free amino group from the 3′ attached FE or free aminogroup from the 5′ attached FE) and thereby potentially very differentproducts can be formed. By employing fixed functional entities only oneoverall configuration is possible and only one product with one specificpolarity can be formed.

Another possibility of attachment point is the sugar of the parentnucleotide, as exemplified in FIGS. 23 B, C, and D. This choice allowsthe employment of mononucleotides in stead of linked dinucleotides asmentioned above. Both hydrogens of C2 can be replaced by linker atoms,however, for shorter ring structures it is preferred to use the onefacing the same plane as the base does. Carbon 3 of the sugar moietyforms a linkage to the phosphate group, but there is still oneattachment possibility left which can be utilised for linker fixationpurposes. The same holds for C1, however the space around thissubstitution possibility is limited. Carbon atoms 4 and 5 of the sugarmoiety are quite distant from the base attachment point and thereforerequire large ring systems to be utilised for this purpose.

Linker-FE 1B is constructed from a γ-amino acid attached via a disulfidebond prone for reductive cleavage to the C5 position of T/U. Thelinker-FE unit 1B is therefore another typical example of a bifunctionallinker-FE system capable of rotation of the nucleotide-linker bond whichbears the risk of cluster formation due to lack of directionalpolymerization. A fixation of this FE is shown in example 1B (right) andutilises the C2 position at the same side of the plane as the base. TheFE now contains a γ-amino acid linked through the carboxyl group to thesugar via a hydrolysable ester bond and in the amino end to the C5position of T/U via a disulfide bond prone for oxidation.Doubly-attached linker-FE unit 1B is therefore a bifunctional linker-FEwith one reactive group free and the other providing the secondattachment. Using almost the same linker-FE unit but letting thecarboxyl end free by introducing a second ester group as a hydrolysablelinker is shown in example 1C. Computational analyses of linker-FEs 1Band 1C result in similar conclusions, and results below refer to linker1B.

Conformational searches of the two different schemes clearly reveal theeffect of preventing rotation of the linker bond by additional covalentattachment. Running 2000 conformational search steps of thesingly-attached linker-FE results in 445 unique conformations with the‘global’ minimum located once. This conformation is shown in FIG. 25Aand the resulting most probable product (still attached the DNAbackbone) in FIG. 25B. As can be seen this product is the completeproduct, that is, all four units are linked together via amide bonds.The released complete product is shown as FIG. 25G. However, many otheroverall configurations are possible for this system, with one exampleshown in FIG. 25C. The most probable product resulting from the 3Cconfiguration is depicted in FIG. 25D and as can be seen, thisarrangement of reactive groups results in the formation of an incompleteproduct, that is, the linker-FE units are linked two and two togetherwith no possibilities of a merging reaction. Release of this productresults in two dimers, depicted in FIG. 25H. Of the 334 uniqueconformations within 10 kJ/mol of the located minimum approximately 215results in formation of various incomplete products.

Running 2000 conformational search steps of the doubly-attached FEresults in 386 unique conformations with the ‘global’ minimum locatedtwice. This conformation is shown in FIG. 25E and the resulting mostprobable product (still attached the DNA backbone) in FIG. 25F. However,since there are no possibilities of interchange of reactive groups, theconformations differ only by minor variations in dihedrals (e.g.rotation of the CH₂NH₂ group). Clearly, only one overall configurationis possible for the doubly-attached FE, giving rise to only one probableproduct, the complete four-unit product (FIG. 25G).

Thus, the computational investigations clearly show that there isextensive rotation around nucleotide-linker bonds and that thisflexibility will result in a significant proportion of the formedproducts not being complete. The calculations also show that usingcovalently fixed functional entities is one way to prevent linkerrotation and thereby effectively secure unidirectional polymerisation.In addition, the complete products that do result from usingunconstrained FEs form a diverse group, since there is more than onepossibility of arranging the reactive groups in a way that allowsreactions between all units to happen. Naturally, these tendencies willbe even more pronounced using more than three to four linker-FE units aswas applied in these examples.

Building Blocks Capable of Transferring Functional Entities.

The following section describes the formation and use of monomerbuilding blocks capable of transferring a functional entity from onemonomer building block to another monomer building block, i.e. twofunctional entities of two monomer building blocks react, whereby onefunctional entity is cleaved from its monomer building block under theconditions applied.

General Section

Protection and deprotection of maleimide derivatives:

Maleimide derivatives (e.g. R═H, alkyl, aryl, alkoxy etc.) may at anystep below, be present in a protected form. Protection is achieved byreaction with furan. Deprotection may be achieved by thermolysis, asdescribed by Masayasu et al., J. Chem. Soc., Perkin Trans. 1 (1980)2122.

A. Acylation Reactions

General route to the formation of acylating monomer building blocks andthe use of these:

N-hydroxymaleimide (1) may be acylated by the use of an acylchloridee.g. acetylchloride or alternatively acylated in e.g. THF by the use ofdicyclohexylcarbodiimide or diisopropylcarbodiimide and acid e.g. aceticacid. The intermediate may be subjected to Michael addition by the useof excess 1,3-propanedithiol, followed by reaction with either4,4′-dipyridyl disulfide or 2,2′-dipyridyl disulfide. This intermediate(3) may then be loaded onto an oligonucleotide carrying a thiol handleto generate the monomer building block (4). The reaction of this monomerbuilding block with an amine carrying monomer building block isconducted as follows:

The template oligonucleotide (1 nmol) is mixed with a thiooligonucleotide loaded with a building block e.g. (4) (1 nmol) and anamino-oligonucleotide (1 nmol) in hepes-buffer (20 μL of a 100 mM hepesand 1 M NaCl solution, pH=7.5) and water (39 uL). The oligonucleotidesare annealed to the template by heating to 50° C. and cooled (2°C./second) to 30° C. The mixture is then left o/n at a fluctuatingtemperature (10° C. for 1 second then 35° C. for 1 second), to yieldtemplate bound (5).

B. Alkylation and C. Vinylation Reactions

General route to the formation of alkylating/vinylating monomer buildingblocks and use of these:

Alkylating monomer building blocks may have the following generalstructure:

R¹ and R² may be used to tune the reactivity of the sulphate to allowappropriate reactivity. Chloro and nitro substitution will increasereactivity. Alkyl groups will decrease reactivity. Ortho substituents tothe sulphate will due to steric reasons direct incoming nucleophiles toattack the R-group selectively and avoid attack on sulphur. E.g.

3-Aminophenol (6) is treated with maleic anhydride, followed bytreatment with an acid e.g. H₂SO₄ or P₂O₅ and heat to yield themaleimide (7). The ring closure to the maleimide may also be achievedwhen an acid stable O-protection group is used by treatment with or Ac₂Owith or without heating, followed by O-deprotection. Alternativelyreflux in Ac₂O, followed by O-deacetylation in hot water/dioxane toyield (7). Further treatment of (7) with SO₂Cl₂ with or withouttriethylamine or potassium carbonate in dichloromethane or a higherboiling solvent will yield the intermediate (8), which may be isolatedor directly further transformed into the aryl alkyl sulphate by thequench with the appropriate alcohol, in this case MeOH, whereby (9) willbe formed. The organic building block (9) may be connected to an oligonucleotide, as follows.

A thiol carrying oligonucleotide in buffer 50 mM MOPS or hepes orphosphate pH 7.5 is treated with a 1-100 mM solution and preferably 7.5mM solution of the organic building block (9) in DMSO or alternativelyDMF, such that the DMSO/DMF concentration is 5-50%, and preferably 10%.The mixture is left for 1-16 h and preferably 2-4 h at 25° C. To givethe alkylating in this case methylating monomer building block (10).

The reaction of the alkylating monomer building block (10) with an aminecarrying monomer building block may be conducted as follows:

The template oligonucleotide (1 nmol) is mixed with a thiooligonucleotide loaded with a building block (1 nmol) (10) and anamino-oligonucleotide (1 nmol) in hepes-buffer (20 μL of a 100 mM hepesand 1 M NaCl solution, pH=7.5) and water (39 uL). The oligonucleotidesare annealed to the template by heating to 50° C. and cooled (2°C./second) to 30° C. The mixture is then left o/n at a fluctuatingtemperature (10° C. for 1 second then 35° C. for 1 second), to yield thetemplate bound methylamine (11).

A vinylating monomer building block may be prepared and used similarlyas described above for an alkylating monomer building block. Althoughinstead of reacting the chlorosulphonate (8 above) with an alcohol, theintermediate chlorosulphate is isolated and treated with an enolate orO-trialkylsilylenolate with or without the presence of fluoride. E.g.

Formation of the vinylating monomer building block (13):

The thiol carrying oligonucleotide in buffer 50 mM MOPS or hepes orphosphate pH 7.5 is treated with a 1-100 mM solution and preferably 7.5mM solution of the organic building block (12) in DMSO or alternativelyDMF, such that the DMSO/DMF concentration is 5-50%, and preferably 10%.The mixture is left for 1-16 h and preferably 2-4 h at 25° C. To givethe vinylating monomer building block (13).

The sulfonylenolate (13) may be used to react with amine carryingmonomer building block to give an enamine (14a and/or 14b) or e.g. reactwith an carbanion to yield (15a and/or 15b). E.g.

The reaction of the vinylating monomer building block (13) and an amineor nitroalkyl carrying monomer building block may be conducted asfollows:

The template oligonucleotide (1 nmol) is mixed with a thiooligonucleotide loaded with a building block (1 nmol) (13) and anamino-oligonucleotide (1 nmol) or nitroalkyl-oligonucleotide (1 nmol) in0.1 M TAPS, phosphate or hepes-buffer and 300 mM NaCl solution,pH=7.5-8.5 and preferably pH=8.5. The oligonucleotides are annealed tothe template by heating to 50° C. and cooled (2° C./second) to 30° C.The mixture is then left o/n at a fluctuating temperature (10° C. for 1second then 35° C. for 1 second), to yield template bound (14a/b or15a/b). Alternative to the alkyl and vinyl sulphates described above mayequally effective sulphonates as e.g. (31) (however with R″ instead asalkyl or vinyl), described below, be prepared from (28, with the phenylgroup substituted by an alkyl group) and (29), and be used as alkylatingand vinylating agents.

D. Alkenylidation Reactions

General route to the formation of Wittig and HWE monomer building blocksand use of these:

Commercially available building block (16) may be transformed into theNHS ester (17) by standard means, i.e. DCC or DIC couplings.

An amine carrying oligonucleotide in buffer 50 mM MOPS or hepes orphosphate pH 7.5 is treated with a 1-100 mM solution and preferably 7.5mM solution of the organic building block in DMSO or alternatively DMF,such that the DMSO/DMF concentration is 5-50%, and preferably 10%. Themixture is left for 1-16 h and preferably 2-4 h at 25° C. To give thephosphine bound monomer building block (18). This monomer building blockis further transformed by addition of the appropriate alkylhalide, e.g.N,N-dimethyl-2-iodoacetamide as a 1-100 mM and preferably 7.5 mMsolution in DMSO or DMF such that the DMSO/DMF concentration is 5-50%,and preferably 10%. The mixture is left for 1-16 h and preferably 2-4 hat 25° C. To give the monomer building block (19). Alternative to this,may the organic building block (17) be P-alkylated with an alkylhalideand then be coupled onto an amine carrying oligonucleotide to yield(19).

An aldehyde bound monomer building block (20), e.g. formed by thereaction between the NHS ester of 4-formylbenzoic acid and an aminecarrying oligonucleotide, using conditions similar to those describedabove, will react with (19) under slightly alkaline conditions to yieldthe alkene (21).

The reaction of monomer building blocks (19) and (20) may be conductedas follows:

The template oligonucleotide (1 nmol) is mixed with monomer buildingblock (19) (1 nmol) and (20) (1 nmol) in 0.1 M TAPS, phosphate orhepes-buffer and 1 M NaCl solution, pH=7.5-8.5 and preferably pH=8.0.The reaction mixture is left at 35-65° C. preferably 58° C. over nightto yield template bound (21).

As an alternative to (17) may phosphonates (24) be used instead. Theymay be prepared by the reaction between diethylchlorophosphite (22) andthe appropriate carboxy carrying alcohol. The carboxylic acid is thentransformed into the NHS ester (24) and the process and alternativesdescribed above may be applied. Although instead of a simpleP-alkylation, the phosphite will undergo Arbuzov's reaction and generatethe phosphonate. Monomer building block (25) benefits from the fact thatit is more reactive than its phosphonium counterpart (19).

E. Transition Metal Catalyzed Arylation, Hetaylation and VinylationReactions

Electrophilic monomer building blocks (31) capable of transferring anaryl, hetaryl or vinyl functionality may be prepared from organicbuilding blocks (28) and (29) by the use of coupling procedures formaleimide derivatives to SH-carrying oligonucleotide's described above.Alternative to the maleimide, may NHS-ester derivatives prepared frome.g. carboxybenzensulfonic acid derivatives, be used by coupling of suchto an amine carrying oligonucleotide. The R-group of (28) and (29) isused to tune the reactivity of the sulphonate to yield the appropriatereactivity.

The transition metal catalyzed cross coupling is conducted as follows:

A premix of 1.4 mM Na₂PdCl₄ and 2.8 mM P(p-SO₃C₆H₄)₃ in water left for15 min was added to a mixture of the template oligonucleotide (1 nmol)and monomer building block (30) and (31) (both 1 nmol) in 0.5 M NaOAcbuffer at pH=5 and 75 mM NaCl (final [Pd]=0.3 mM). The mixture is thenleft o/n at 35-65° C. preferably 58° C., to yield template bound (32).

Corresponding nucleophilic monomer building blocks capable oftransferring an aryl, hetaryl or vinyl functionality may be preparedfrom organic building blocks type (35).

This is available by estrification of a boronic acid by a diol e.g.(33), followed by transformation into the NHS-ester derivative. TheNHS-ester derivative may then be coupled to an oligonucleotide, by useof coupling procedures for NHS-ester derivatives to amine carryingoligonucleotide's described above, to generate monomer building blocktype (37). Alternatively, may maleimide derivatives be prepared asdescribed above and loaded onto SH-carrying oligonucleotide's.

The transition metal catalyzed cross coupling is conducted as follows:

A premix of 1.4 mM Na₂PdCl₄ and 2.8 mM P(p-SO₃C₆H₄)₃ in water left for15 min was added to a mixture of the template oligonucleotide (1 nmol)and monomer building block (36) and (37) (both 1 nmol) in 0.5 M NaOAcbuffer at pH=5 and 75 mM NaCl (final [Pd]=0.3 mM). The mixture is thenleft o/n at 35-65° C. preferably 58° C., to yield template bound (38).

F. Reactions of Enamine and Enolether Monomer Building Blocks

Monomer building blocks loaded with enamines and enolethers may beprepared as follows:

For Z═NHR (R═H, alkyl, aryl, hetaryl), a 2-mercaptoethylamine may bereacted with a dipyridyl disulfide to generate the activated disulfide(40), which may then be condensed to a ketone or an aldehyde underdehydrating conditions to yield the enamine (41).

For Z═OH, 2-mercaptoethanol is reacted with a dipyridyl disulfide,followed by O-tosylation (Z═OTs). The tosylate (40) may then be reacteddirectly with an enolate or in the presence of fluoride with aO-trialkylsilylenolate to generate the enolate (41). The enamine orenolate (41) may then be coupled onto an SH-carrying oligonucleotide asdescribed above to give the monomer building block (42).

The monomer building blocks (42) may be reacted with a carbonyl carryingoligonucleotide like (44) or alternatively an alkylhalide carryingoligonucleotide like (43) as follows:

The template oligonucleotide (1 nmol) is mixed with monomer buildingblock (42) (1 nmol) and (43) (1 nmol) in 50 mM MOPS, phosphate orhepes-buffer buffer and 250 mM NaCl solution, pH=7.5-8.5 and preferablypH=7.5. The reaction mixture is left at 35-65° C. preferably 58° C. overnight or alternatively at a fluctuating temperature (10° C. for 1 secondthen 35° C. for 1 second) to yield template bound (46), where Z═O or NR.For compounds where Z═NR slightly acidic conditions may be applied toyield product (46) with Z═O.

The template oligonucleotide (1 nmol) is mixed with monomer buildingblock (42) (1 nmol) and (44) (1 nmol) in 0.1 M TAPS, phosphate orhepes-buffer buffer and 300 mM NaCl solution, pH=7.5-8.5 and preferablypH=8.0. The reaction mixture is left at 35-65° C. preferably 58° C. overnight or alternatively at a fluctuating temperature (10° C. for 1 secondthen 35° C. for 1 second) to yield template bound (45), where Z═O or NR.For compounds where Z═NR slightly acidic conditions may be applied toyield product (45) with Z═O.

Enolethers type (13) may undergo cycloaddition with or withoutcatalysis. Similarly, may dienolethers be prepared and used. E.g. byreaction of (8) with the enolate or trialkylsilylenolate (in thepresence of fluoride) of an α,β-unsaturated ketone or aldehyde togenerate (47), which may be loaded onto an SH-carrying oligonucleotide,to yield monomer building block (48).

The diene (49), the ene (50) and the 1,3-dipole (51) may be formed bysimple reaction between an amino carrying oligonucleotide and theNHS-ester of the corresponding organic building block. Reaction of (13)or alternatively (31, R″=vinyl) with dienes as e.g. (49) to yield (52)or e.g. 1,3-dipoles (51) to yield (53) and reaction of (48) or (31,R″=dienyl) with enes as e.g. (50) to yield (54) may be conducted asfollows:

The template oligonucleotide (1 nmol) is mixed with monomer buildingblock (13) or (48) (1 nmol) and (49) or (50) or (51) (1 nmol) in 50 mMMOPS, phosphate or hepes-buffer buffer and 2.8 M NaCl solution,pH=7.5-8.5 and preferably pH=7.5. The reaction mixture is left at 35-65°C. preferably 58° C. over night or alternatively at a fluctuatingtemperature (10° C. for 1 second then 35° C. for 1 second) to yieldtemplate bound (52), (53) or (54).

Linker Cleavage

Activation (cleavage of some or all of the linkers connecting thecomplementing elements and the functional entity) may be done by changesin pH and/or temperature, addition of reactants or catalysts, enzymes orribozymes, or light, UV or other electromagnetic radiation, etc.Particularly relevant enzymes include proteases, esterases andnucleases. A list of cleavable linkers and the conditions for cleavageis shown in (FIG. 10).

Other cleavable linkers include the 4-hydroxymethyl phenoxyacetic acidmoiety, which is cleaved by acid, the2-[(tert-butyldiphenylsiloxy)methyl]benzoic acid moiety which iscelavable with fluoride, and the phosphate of a 2-hydroxymethyl benzoicacid moiety which provides a linker cleavable by the combination ofalkaline phosphatase treatment followed by treatment with mild alkalinetreatment.

In most cases, it is desirable to have at least two different types oflinkers connecting the complementing elements with the functionalentities. This way, it is possible to selectively cleave all but one ofthe linkers between the complementing template and the functionalentities, thereby obtaining a polymer physically linked through just onelinker to the template that templated its synthesis. This intact linkershould affect the activities of the attached polymer as little aspossible, but other than that, the nature of the linker is notconsidered an essential feature of this invention. The size of thelinker in terms of the length between the template and the templatedpolymer can vary widely, but for the purposes of the invention,preferably the length is in the range from the length of just one bond,to a chain length of about 20 atoms.

Selection and Screening of Templated Molecules

Selection or screening of the templated molecules with desiredactivities (for example binding to particular target, catalyticactivity, or a particular effect in an activity assay) may be performedaccording to any standard protocol. For example, affinity selections maybe performed according to the principles used for phage displayed,polysome-displayed or mRNA-protein fusion displayed peptides. Selectionfor catalytic activity may be performed by affinity selections ontransition-state analog affinity columns (Baca et al., Proc. Natl. Acad.Sci USA. 1997; 94(19):10063-8), or by function-based selection schemes(Pedersen et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 1998, 95(18):10523-8).Screening for a desired characteristic may be performed according tostandard microtiter plate-based assays, or by FACS-sorting assays.

Use of Libraries of Templated Molecules

Selection of Template-Displaying Molecules that Will Bind to KnownTargets

The present invention is also directed to approaches that allowselection of small molecules capable of binding to different targets.The template-displaying molecule technology contains a built-in functionfor direct selection and amplification. The binding of the selectedmolecule should be selective in that they only coordinate to a specifictarget and thereby prevent or induce a specific biological effect.Ultimately, these binding molecules should be possible to use e.g. astherapeutic agents, or as diagnostic agents.

Template-displaying molecule libraries can easily be combined withscreenings, selections, or assays to assess the effect of binding of amolecule ligand on the function of the target. In a more specificembodiment, the template-displaying method provides a rapid means forisolating and identifying molecule ligands which bind tosupra-molecular, macro-supra-molecular, macro-molecular andlow-molecular structures (e.g. nucleic acids and proteins, includingenzymes, receptors, antibodies, and glycoproteins); signal molecules(e.g. cAMP, inositol triphosphate, peptides, prostaglandins); andsurfaces (e.g. metal, plastic, composite, glass, ceramics, rubber, skin,tissue).

Specifically, selection or partitioning in this context means anyprocess whereby the template-displaying molecule complex bound to atarget molecule, the complex-target pair, can be separated fromtemplate-displaying molecules not bound to the target molecule.Selection can be accomplished by various methods known in the art.

The selection strategy can be carried out so it allows selection againstalmost any target. Importantly, no steps in this selection strategy needany detailed structural information of the target or the molecules inthe libraries. The entire process is driven by the binding affinityinvolved in the specific recognition/coordination of the molecules inthe library to a given target. However, in some applications, if needed,functionality can also be included analogous to selection for catalyticactivity using phage display (Soumillion et al. (1994) J. Mol. Biol.237: 415-22; Pedersen et al. (1998) PNAS. 18: 10523-10528). Example ofvarious selection procedures are described below.

This built-in template-displaying molecule selection process is wellsuited for optimizations, where the selection steps are made in seriesstarting with the selection of binding molecules and ends with theoptimized binding molecule. The single procedures in each step arepossible to automate using various robotic systems. This is becausethere is a sequential flow of events and where each event can beperformed separately. In a most preferable setting, a suitabletemplate-displaying molecule library and the target molecule aresupplied to a fully automatic system which finally generates theoptimized binding molecule. Even more preferably, this process shouldrun without any need of external work outside the robotic system duringthe entire procedure.

The libraries of template-displayed molecules will contain moleculesthat could potentially coordinate to any known or unknown target. Theregion of binding on a target could be into a catalytic site of anenzyme, a binding pocket on a receptor (e.g. GPCR), a protein surfacearea involved in protein-protein interaction (especially a hot-spotregion), and a specific site on DNA (e.g. the major groove). Thetemplate-displaying molecule technology will primarily identifymolecules that coordinate to the target molecule. The natural functionof the target could either be stimulated (agonized) or reduced(antagonized) or be unaffected by the binding of the template-displayingmolecules. This will be dependent on the precise binding mode and theparticular binding-site the template-displaying molecules occupy on thetarget. However, it is known that functional sites (e.g. protein-proteininteraction or catalytic sites) on different proteins are more prone tobind molecules that other more neutral surface areas on a protein. Inaddition, these functional sites normally contain a smaller region thatseems to be primarily responsible for the binding energy, the so calledhot-spot regions (Wells, et al. (1993) Recent Prog. Hormone Res. 48;253-262). This phenomenon will increase the possibility to directlyselect for small molecules that will affect the biological function of acertain target.

The template-displaying molecule technology of the invention will permitselection procedures analogous to other display methods such as phagedisplay (Smith (1985) Science 228: 1315-1317). Phage display selectionhas been used successfully on peptides (Wells & Lowman. (1992) Curr. Op.Struct. Biol. 2, 597-604) proteins (Marks et al. (1992) J. Biol. Chem.267: 16007-16010) and antibodies (Winter et al. (1994) Annu. Rev.Immunol. 12: 433-455). Similar selection procedures are also exploitedfor other types of display systems such as ribosome display (Mattheakiset al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 91: 9022-9026) and mRNA display(Roberts, et al. (1997) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 94: 12297-302). However,the enclosed invention, the template-displaying molecule technology,will for the first time allow direct selection of target-specific smallnon-peptide molecules independently of the translation process on theribosome complex. The necessary steps included in this invention are theamplification of the templates and incorporation and reaction of themonomer building blocks. The amplification and incorporation and theincorporation and reaction are either done in the same step or in asequential process.

The linkage between the templated molecule (displayed molecule) and DNAreplication unit (coding template) allows a rapid identification ofbinding molecules using various selection strategies. This inventionallows a broad strategy in identifying binding molecules against anyknown target. In addition, this technology will also allow discovery ofnovel unknown targets by isolating binding molecules against unknownantigens (epitopes) and use these binding molecules for identificationand validation (see section “Target identification and validation”).

As will be understood, selection of binding molecules from thetemplate-displaying molecule libraries can be performed in any format toidentify optimal binding molecules. A typical selection procedureagainst a purified target will include the following major steps:Generation of a template-displaying molecule library: Immobilization ofthe target molecule using a suitable immobilization approach; Adding thelibrary to allow binding of the template-displayed molecules; Removingof the non-binding template-displayed molecules; Elution of thetemplate-displayed molecules bound to the immobilized target;Amplification of enriched template-displaying molecules foridentification by sequencing or to input for the next round ofselection. The general steps are schematically shown in FIG. 39.

In a preferred embodiment, a standard selection protocol using atemplate-displaying molecule library is to use the bio-panning method.In this technique, the target (e.g. protein or peptide conjugate) isimmobilized onto a solid support and the template-displayed moleculesthat potentially coordinate to the target are the ones that are selectedand enriched. However, the selection procedure requires that the boundtemplate-displayed molecules can be separated from the unbound ones,i.e. those in solution. There are many ways in which this might beaccomplished as known to ordinary skilled in the art.

The first step in the affinity enrichment cycle (one round as describedin FIG. 1) is when the template-displayed molecules showing low affinityfor an immobilized target are washed away, leaving the strongly bindingtemplate-displayed molecules attached to the target. The enrichedpopulation, remaining bound to the target after the stringent washing,is then eluted with, e.g. acid, chaotropic salts, heat, competitiveelution with the known ligand or proteolytic release of thetarget/template molecules. The eluted template-displayed molecules aresuitable for PCR, leading to many orders of amplification, i.e. everysingle template-displayed molecule enriched in the first selection roundparticipates in the further rounds of selection at a greatly increasedcopy number. After typically three to ten rounds of enrichment apopulation of molecules is obtained which is greatly enriched for thetemplate-displayed molecules which bind most strongly to the target.This is followed quantitatively by assaying the proportion oftemplate-displaying molecules which remain bound to the immobilizedtarget. The variant template sequences are then individually sequenced.

Immobilisation of the target (peptide, protein, DNA or other antigen) onbeads might be useful where there is doubt that the target will adsorbto the tube (e.g. unfolded targets eluted from SDS-PAGE gels). Thederivatised beads can then be used to select from thetemplate-displaying molecules, simply by sedimenting the beads in abench centrifuge. Alternatively, the beads can be used to make anaffinity column and the template-displaying libraries suspensionrecirculated through the column. There are many reactive matricesavailable for immobilizing the target molecule, including for instanceattachment to —NH₂ groups and —SH groups. Magnetic beads are essentiallya variant on the above; the target is attached to magnetic beads whichare then used in the selection. Activated beads are available withattachment sites for —NH₂ or —COOH groups (which can be used forcoupling). The target can be also be blotted onto nitrocellulose orPVDF. When using a blotting strategy, it is important to make sure thestrip of blot used is blocked after immobilization of the target (e.g.with BSA or similar protein).

In another preferred embodiment, the selection or partitioning can alsobe performed using for example: Immunoprecipitation or indirectimmunoprecipitation were the target molecule is captured together withtemplate-displaying binding molecules; affinity column chromatographywere the target is immobilized on a column and the template-displayinglibraries are flowed through to capture target-binding molecules;gel-shift (agarose or polyacrylamide) were the selectedtemplate-displaying molecules migrate together with the target in thegel; FACS sorting to localize cells that coordinates template-displayingmolecules; CsCl gradient centrifugation to isolate the target moleculetogether template-displaying binding molecules; Mass spectroscopy toidentify target molecules which are labelled with template-displayingmolecules; etc., without limitation. In general, any method where thetemplate-displaying molecule/target complex can be separated fromtemplate-displaying molecules not bound to the target is useful.

TABLE 2 Examples of selection method possible to use to identify bindingmolecules using the template-displaying technology. Type of TargetMethod of choice Soluble receptors Direct immobilization,Immunoprecipitation, affinity column, FACS sorting, MS. Cell surfacereceptor Cell-surface subtraction selection, FACS sorting, Affinitycolumn. Enzyme inhibitors Direct immobilization, Immunoprecipitation,affinity column, FACS sorting, MS. Surface epitopes Cell-surfacesubtraction selection, in-vivo selection, FACS sorting, Affinity column.

Elution of template-displayed molecules can be performed in differentways. The binding molecules can be released from the target molecule bydenaturation, acid, or chaotropic salts and then transferred to anothervial for amplification. Alternatively, the elution can be more specificto reduce the background. Elution can be accomplished using proteolysisto cleave a linker between the target and the immobilizing surface orbetween the displaying molecule and the template. Also, elution can beaccomplished by competition with a known ligand. Alternatively, the PCRreaction can be performed directly in the washed wells at the end of theselection reaction.

A possible feature of the invention is the fact that the bindingmolecules need not be elutable from the target to be selectable sinceonly the encoding template DNA is needed for further amplification orcloning, not the binding molecule itself. It is known that someselection procedure can bind the most avid ligands so tightly as to bevery difficult to elute. However the method of the invention cansuccessfully be practiced to yield avid ligands, even covalent bindingligands.

Alternative selection protocol includes a known ligand as fragment ofeach displayed molecule in the library. That known ligand will guide theselection by coordinate to a defined part on the target molecule andfocus the selection to molecules that binds to the same region. Thiscould be especially useful for increasing the affinity for a ligand witha desired biological function but with a too low potency.

A further aspect of the present invention relates to methods ofincreasing the diversity or complexity of a single or a mixture ofselected binding molecules. After the initial selection, the enrichedmolecules can be altered to further increase the chemical diversity orcomplexity of the displayed molecules. This can be performed usingvarious methods known to the art. For example, using synthesizedrandomized oligonucleotides, spiked oligonucleotides or randommutagenesis. The randomization can be focused to allow preferable codonsor localized to a predetermined portion or sub-sequence of the templatenucleotide sequence. Other preferable method is to recombine templatescoding for the binding molecules in a similar manner as DNA shuffling isused on homologous genes for proteins (Stemmer (1994) Nature370:389-91). This approach can be used to recombine initial libraries ormore preferably to recombine enriched encoding templates.

In another embodiment of the invention when binding molecules againstspecific antigens that is only possible to express on a cell surface,e.g. ion channels or transmembrane receptors, is required, the cellsparticle themselves can be used as the selection agent. In this sort ofapproach, cells lacking the specific target should be used to do one ormore rounds of negative selection or be present in large excess in theselection process. Here, irrelevant template-displayed molecules areremoved. For example, for a positive selection against a receptorexpressed on whole cells, the negative selection would be against theuntransformed cells. This approach is also called subtraction selectionand has successfully been used for phage display on antibody libraries(Hoogenboom et al. (1998) Immunotech. 4: 1-20).

A specific example of a selection procedure can involve selectionagainst cell surface receptors that become internalized from themembrane so that the receptor together with the selected bindingmolecule can make its way into the cell cytoplasm or cell nucleus.Depending on the dissociation rate constant for specific selectedbinding molecules, these molecules largely reside after uptake in eitherthe cytoplasm or the nucleus.

The skilled person in the art will acknowledge that the selectionprocess can be performed in any setup where the target is used as thebait onto which the template-displaying molecules can coordinate.

The selection methods of the present invention can be combined withsecondary selection or screening to identify molecule ligands capable ofmodifying target molecule function upon binding. Thus, the methodsdescribed herein can be employed to isolate or produce binding moleculeswhich bind to and modify the function of any protein or nucleic acid. Itis contemplated that the method of the present invention can be employedto identify, isolate or produce binding molecules which will affectcatalytic activity of target enzymes, i.e., inhibit catalysis ormodifying substrate binding, affect the functionality of proteinreceptors, i.e., inhibit binding to receptors or modify the specificityof binding to receptors; affect the formation of protein multimers,i.e., disrupt quaternary structure of protein subunits; and modifytransport properties of protein, i.e., disrupt transport of smallmolecules or ions by proteins.

A still further aspect of the present invention relates to methodsallowing functionality in the selection process can also be included.For example, when enrichment against a certain target have beenperformed generation a number of different hits, these hits can thendirectly be tested for functionality (e.g. cell signalling). This canfor example be performed using fluorescence-activated cell sorting(FACS).

The altered phenotype may be detected in a wide variety of ways.Generally, the changed phenotype is detected using, for example:microscopic analysis of cell morphology; standard cell viability assays,including both increased cell death and increased cell viability;standard labelling assays such as fluorometric indicator assays for thepresence of level of particular cell or molecule, including FACS orother dye staining techniques; biochemical detection of the expressionof target compounds after killing the cells; etc. In some cases,specific signalling pathways can be probed using various reporter geneconstructs.

Secondary selection methods that can be combined withtemplate-displaying molecule technology include among others selectionsor screens for enzyme inhibition, alteration or substrate binding, lossof functionality, disruption of structure, etc. Those of ordinary skillin the art are able to select among various alternatives of selection orscreening methods that are compatible with the methods described herein.

The binding molecules of the invention can be selected for otherproperties in addition to binding, For example, during selection;stability to certain conditions of the desired working environment ofthe end product can be included as a selection criterion. If bindingmolecules which are stable in the presence of a certain protease isdesired, that protease can be part of the buffer medium used duringselection. Similarly, the selection can also be performed in serum orcell extracts or any type of media. As will be understood, whenutilizing this template-displaying approach, conditions which disrupt ordegrade the template should be avoided to allow amplification. Otherdesired properties can be incorporated, directly into the displayingmolecules as will be understood by those skilled in the art. Forexample, membrane affinity can be included as a property by employingbuilding blocks with high hydrophobicity.

Molecules selected by the template-displaying molecule technology can beproduced by various synthetic methods. Chemical synthesis can beaccomplished since the structure of selected binding molecules isreadily obtained form the nucleic acid sequence of the coding template.Chemical synthesis of the selected molecules is also possible becausethe building blocks that compose the binding molecules are also known inaddition to the chemical reactions that assemble them together.

In a preferred embodiment, the selected binding molecules is synthesizedand tested in various appropriate in vitro and in vivo testing to verifythe selected candidates for biological effects and potency. This may bedone in a variety of ways, as will be appreciated by those in the art,and may depend on the composition of the bioactive molecule.

Target Identification and Validation

In another aspect, the present invention provides methods to identify orisolate targets that are involved in pathological processes or otherbiological events. In this aspect, the target molecules are againpreferably proteins or nucleic acids, but can also include, amongothers, carbohydrates and various molecules to which specific moleculeligand binding can be achieved. In principal, the template-displayingmolecule technology could be used to select for specific epitopes onantigens found on cells, tissues or in vivo. These epitopes might belongto a target that is involved in important biological events. Inaddition, these epitopes might also be involved in the biologicalfunction of the target.

Phage display with antibodies and peptide libraries has been usednumerous times successfully in identifying new cellular antigens. (e.g.Pasqualini et al. (1996) Nature 380: 364-366; Pasqualini et al. (2000)Cancer Res. 60: 722-727; Scheffer et al. (2002) Br J Cancer 86: 954-962;Kupsch et al. (1999) Clin Cancer Res. 5: 925-931; Tseng-Law et al.(1999) Exp. Hematol. 27: 936-945; Gevorkian et al. (1998) Clin. Immunol.Immunopathol. 86: 305-309). Especially effective have been selectiondirectly on cells suspected to express cell-specific antigens.Importantly, when selecting for cell-surface antigen, the templatemolecule can be maintained outside the cell. This will increase theprobability that the template molecule will be intact after release forthe cell surface.

In vivo selection of template-displayed molecules has tremendouspotential. By selecting from libraries of template-displayed moleculesin vivo it is possible to isolate molecules capable of homingspecifically to normal tissues and other pathological tissues (e.g.tumours). This principle has been illustrated using phage display ofpeptide libraries (Pasqualini & Ruoslathi (1996) Nature 280: 364-366).This system has also been used in humans to identify peptide motifs thatlocalized to different organs (Arap et al. (2002) Nat. Med. 2:121-127).A similar selection procedure could be used for the template-displayinglibraries. The coding DNA in phage display is protected effectively bythe phage particle allows selection in vivo. Accordingly, the stabilityof the template in vivo will be important for amplification andidentification. The template can be stabilised using various nucleotidederivatives in a similar way as have been used to stabilise aptamers forin vivo applications (Nolte (1996) Nature Biotechnol. 14: 1116-1121;Pagratis et al. (1997) Nature Biotechnol. 15: 68-72). However, it isreasonable to believe that the template structure will be stabilizedagainst degradation due to the modified bases used for encoding thedisplayed molecule. Other types of protection are also possible wherethe template molecule is shielded for the solution using variousmethods. This could include for example liposomes, pegylation, bindingproteins or other sorts of protection. The template molecule could alsobe integrated into another designed structure that protects the templateform external manipulation. Fort example, the linker can be design to beincorporated in vesicles to position the templates inside the vesicleand the displaying molecules on the outside. The arrangement willprotect the template molecules from external manipulate and at the sametime allow exposure of the displaying molecules to permit selection.

Most antibodies have a large concave binding area which requires to somedegree protruding epitopes on the antigens. Also, the antibody moleculeis a large macromolecule (150 KDa) which will sterically reduce theaccess for a number of different antigens (e.g. on a cell surface). Thetemplate-displaying technology should be able to access and recognizeepitopes inaccessible to antibodies. The small binding molecules will beable to bind into active sites, grooves and other areas on an antigen.The coding template element is also smaller that an antibody which willincrease the physical access of the template-binding molecule par. Inaddition, the diversity and complexity of the template-displayingmolecule libraries will be much greater compare to peptide libraries.This will increase the possibility to find molecules that can coordinateto epitopes inaccessible to peptides due to inadequate chemistry. Alltogether, the template-displaying molecule technology has the potentialto identify novel antigens which is not possible to identify withantibodies or peptides. One of ordinary skill in the art willacknowledge that various types of cells can be used in the selectionprocedure. It will also be understood that the selection for newantigens can be performed using subtraction methods as describedpreviously.

Another aspect of the present invention relates to methods to validatethe identified target. The identified binding molecules can directly beused if they change the biological response of the target. This can bedone either in vitro using any direct or cell-based assay or directly invivo studying any phenotypic response. The strength of this approach isthat the same molecules are used both for identification and validationof various targets. Most favourable, the binding molecules could alsodirectly be used as therapeutic agents.

In another preferred embodiment, the template-displaying molecules areused to pull out the target molecules. This can for instance be achievedby selection against a cDNA library expressed on bacteriophage(libraries vs. libraries). By mixing a template-displaying moleculelibrary with a cDNA library it will be possible to find binding pairsbetween the small molecules in the template-displaying molecule libraryand proteins from the cDNA library. One possibility is to mix a phagedisplay library with a template display library and do a selection foreither the phage or template library. The selected library is thenplated to localized phage clones and the DNA coding for the phage andtemplate displayed molecules can then be identified using PCR. Othertypes of libraries than cDNA could also be used such as nucleic acids,carbohydrates, synthetic polymer.

In another embodiment of the invention the template-displaying moleculetechnology can be used to account for in vivo and in vitro drugmetabolism. That could include both phase I (activation) and phase II(detoxification) reactions. The major classes of reactions areoxidation, reduction, and hydrolysis. Other enzymes catalyzeconjugations. These enzymes could be used as targets in a selectionprocess to eliminate displayed molecule that are prone to coordinate tothese enzymes. The templates corresponding to these displayed moleculescould subsequently be used to compete or eliminate these molecules whenmaking template-displaying molecule libraries. These obtained librarieswill then be free of molecules that will have a tendency of binding toenzymes involved in phase I-II and possible be faster eliminated. Forinstance, a selection on each separate enzyme or any combination ofcytochrome P450 enzymes, flavin monooxygenase, monoamine oxidase,esterases, amidases, hydrolases, reductases, dehydrogenases, oxidasesUDP-glucuronosyltransferases, glutathione S-transferases as well asother relevant enzymes could be performed to identify these bindingmolecules that are prone to coordinate to these metabolic enzymes.Inhibitors are easily selected for due to their binding affinity butsubstrates need at least micro molar affinity to be identified.

Another interesting embodiment of this invention is the possibility todirectly select for molecules that passively or actively becomestransported across epithelial plasma membrane, or other membranes. Onepossible selection assay is to use CaCO-2 cells, a human colonepithelial cell line, which is general, accepted as a good model for theepithelial barrier in the gastrointestinal guts. The CaCO-2 assayinvolves growing a human colon epithelial cell line on tissue culturewell inserts, such that the resultant monolayer forms a biologicalbarrier between apical and basolateral compartments. Thetemplate-displaying molecule libraries are placed either side of thecell monolayer and the molecules that can permeate the cell monolayer iscollected and amplified. This process can be repeated until activemolecules have been identified. Other cell line or setup of this assayis possible and is obvious for skill in the art.

A still further aspect of the present invention relates methods ofselecting for stability of the selected molecules. This could beperformed by subjecting an enriched pool of binding molecules to anenvironment that will possibly degrade or change the structure of thebinding molecules. Various conditions could be certain proteases or amixture of protease, cell extract, and various fluids from for examplethe gastrointestinal gut. Other conditions could be various salts oracid milieu or elevated temperature. Another possibility is to generatea library of known ligands and subject that library to stability testsand selection to identify stable molecules under certain conditions asdescribe above.

Therapeutic Applications

The potential therapeutic applications of the invention are great. Forexample, the template-displaying molecule technology of the inventionmay be used for blocking or stimulating various targets. Atherapeutically relevant target is a substance that is known orsuspected to be involved in a regulating process that is malfunctioningand thus leads to a disease state. Examples of such processes arereceptor-ligand interaction, transcription-DNA interaction, andcell-cell interaction involving adhesion molecules, cofactor-enzymeinteraction, and protein-protein interaction in intracellularsignalling. Target molecule means any compound of interest for which amolecule ligand is desired. Thus, target can, for example, include achemical compound, a mixture of chemical compounds, an array ofspatially localized compounds, a biological macromolecule, such as DNAor mRNA, a bacteriophage peptide display library, a ribosome peptidedisplay library, an extract made from biological materials such asbacteria, plants, fungi, or animal (e.g. mammalian) cells or tissue,protein, fusion protein, peptide, enzyme, receptor, receptor ligand,hormone, antigen, antibody, drug, dye, growth factor, lipid, substrate,toxin, virus, or the like etc., without limitation. Other examples oftargets include, e.g. a whole cell, a whole tissue, a mixture of relatedor unrelated proteins, a mixture of viruses or bacterial strains or thelike. etc., without limitation.

Therapeutic drug targets can be divided into different classes accordingto function; receptors, enzymes, hormones, transcription factors, ionchannels, nuclear receptors, DNA, (Drews, J. (2000) Science287:1960-1964). Among those, receptors, nuclear receptors, and metabolicenzymes constitute overwhelmingly the majority of known targets forexisting drugs. Especially, G Protein-Coupled Receptors (GPCR)constitutes one of the most important classes of drug targets togetherwith proteases for pharmacological intervention. Although the aboveexamples are focused on the most relevant targets, it will beself-evident for a person skilled in the art that any other therapeutictarget may be of interest.

The present invention employing the template-displaying moleculetechnology can be utilized to identify agonists or antagonists for allthese classes of drug targets, dependent on the specific properties eachtarget holds. Most of the targets are possible to obtain in a purifiedform for direct selection procedures. Other targets have to be used whenthey are in their native environments such as imbedded cell surfacereceptors. In those situations the selection using thetemplate-displaying molecule libraries can be performed usingsubtraction-selection described previously.

One specific application of the template-displaying molecule technologyof the invention is to generate molecules that can function asantagonists, where the molecules block the interaction between areceptor and one or more ligands. Another application includes celltargeting. For example, the generated molecules recognizing specificsurface proteins or receptors will be able to bind to certain celltypes. Such molecules may in addition carry another therapeutic agent toincrease the potency and reduce the side-effects (for example cancertreatment). Applications involving antiviral agents are also included.For example, a generated molecule, which binds strongly to epitopes onthe virus particle, may be useful as an antiviral agent. Anotherspecific application of the template-displaying molecule technology ofthe invention is to generate molecules that can function as agonists,where the molecules stimulate or activate a receptor to initiate acellular signalling pathway.

Template-Displaying Molecule Arrays

A still further aspect of the present invention relates to methods fordetecting the presence or absence of, and/or measuring the amount oftarget molecules in a sample, which employs a molecule ligand which canbe isolated by the methods described herein. These molecule ligands canbe used separately or in array system for multiple determinations.

An understanding of protein structures, protein-to-protein interactions,pathways and how proteins influence the origins of disease is of vitalimportance. Nucleic acid microarrays have enabled researchers to pursuenovel biomarkers through genotyping. However, a major hurdle is the lackof correlation between gene expression at the level of mRNA level andthe amount of corresponding protein expressed within the cell (Anderssonet a. (1997) Electrophiresis 18: 533-537). Contrary to DNA and RNAanalysis, the use of biochips for parallel protein function studies hasbeen much more difficult. Unlike hybridization reactions, which arebased on couplings or interactions of linear sequences, the proteininteractions involve polypeptide surfaces arising from 3D foldedamino-acid sequences. The requirement for preparation of 3D foldedproteins substantially complicates fabrication of protein microarrays.The protein microarrays would be very sensitive to and can be easilydegraded by the use of thermal treatments and harsh chemicals. Moreover,the folded protein interactions have a much stronger dependency onsequences compared to the hybridization reactions used on the DNA/RNAbiochips. The sequence dependency of the protein interactions willfurther complicate the reaction kinetics.

The invention described herein provides a possible solution to makingarrays that can measure different amounts at the protein level withoutthe use of proteins or peptides as detection molecules. Thetemplate-displaying molecule technology could be used to identify smallbinding molecules to numerous targets. These binding molecules couldthen be arrayed in specific positions and work as detection molecule tomeasure the amount of various biomarkers. For example, binding moleculeagainst cytokines or enzymes known to be involved in a specific pathwaycould be generate with the describe technology. These binding moleculescould then be spotted in an array format to be used to measure theabsolute or relative amount of each cytokine or enzyme.

One major advantage with this system is that the spotting technologyused for DNA arrays could be identically applied for this system. Thetemplate-displayed molecules could be directly applied to the spottedDNA. Another possibility is that the synthesis could be performeddirectly on the pre-coated template using a polymerase and thenucleotide analogues. Make addressable microarrays with this technologywill lead to high-throughput deposition of thousands of differentfunctional molecules onto different locations of a chip. The overallprincipal is shown in FIG. 40.

The template-displaying molecule technology is not limited in chemistryto the 20 natural occurring amino acids. This will permit synthesis onthe template of more robust and stable molecules that will bind tovarious targets. These more stable molecules will be more suitable tobecome immobilized on a surface and exposed to any harsh conditions suchas heat, low or high pH various detergent. In addition, the shelf-lifeof the arrays will be much longer that arrays made from proteins.

Molecular Biological Tools

Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) is an exemplary method for amplifyingnucleic acids. Descriptions of PCR methods are found (Saiki et al.(1985) Science 230: 1350-1354; Scharf et al. (1986) Science 233:1076-1078; U.S. Pat. No. 4,683,202 (Mullis et al.)). Alternative methodsof amplification include among others cloning of selected DNAs intoappropriate vector and introduction of that vector into a host organismwhere the vector and the cloned DNAs are replicated and thus amplified(Guatelli et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad, Sci. 87: 1874-1878). Ingeneral, any means that will allow faithful, efficient amplification ofselected nucleic acid sequences can be employed in the method of thepresent invention. It is only necessary that the proportionaterepresentations of the sequences after amplification reflect therelative proportions of sequences in the mixture before amplification.

The template variants of the present invention may be produced by anysuitable method known in the art. Such methods include constructing anucleotide sequence by chemical synthesis or a combination of chemicalsynthesis and recombinant DNA technology.

A nucleotide sequence encoding a template variant of the invention maybe constructed by isolating or synthesizing a nucleotide sequenceencoding the appropriate display molecules and then changing thenucleotide sequence so as to effect introduction (i.e. insertion orsubstitution) or removal (i.e. deletion or substitution) of the relevantfunctional entities of the displayed molecules.

The nucleotide sequence corresponding to the template molecules isconveniently modified by site-directed mutagenesis in accordance withconventional methods. Alternatively, the nucleotide sequence is preparedby chemical synthesis, e.g. by using an oligonucleotide synthesizer,wherein oligonucleotides are designed based on the sequence of thedesired templates. For example, small oligonucleotides coding forportions of the desired template may be synthesized and assembled byPCR, ligation or ligation chain reaction (LCR) (Barany, PNAS 88:189-193,1991). The individual oligonucleotides typically contain 5′ or 3′overhangs for complementary assembly.

Alternative nucleotide sequence modification methods are available forproducing template variants for high throughput screening or selection.For instance, methods which involve homologous cross-over such asdisclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,093,257, and methods which involve geneshuffling, i.e. recombination between two or more homologous nucleotidesequences resulting in new nucleotide sequences having a number ofnucleotide alterations when compared to the starting nucleotidesequences. Gene shuffling (also known as DNA shuffling) involves one ormore cycles of random fragmentation and reassembly of the nucleotidesequences, followed by selection to select nucleotide template sequencesencoding variant displaying molecules with the desired properties.

Examples of suitable in vitro gene shuffling methods are disclosed byStemmer et al. (1994), Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA; vol. 91, pp.10747-10751; Stemmer (1994), Nature, vol. 370, pp. 389-391; Smith(1994), Nature vol. 370, pp. 324-325; Zhao et al., Nat. Biotechnol.1998, March; 16(3): 258-61; Zhao H. and Arnold, F B, Nucleic AcidsResearch, 1997, Vol. 25. No. 6 pp. 1307-1308; Shao et al., Nucleic AcidsResearch 1998, Jan. 15; 26(2): pp. 681-83; and WO 95/17413.

Synthetic shuffling involves providing libraries of overlappingsynthetic oligonucleotides based e.g. on a flanking sequence. Thesynthetically generated oligonucleotides are recombined, and theresulting recombinant nucleic acid sequences are screened and if desiredused for further shuffling cycles.

Recombination can be theoretically calculated, which is performed ormodelled using a computer system, thereby partly or entirely avoidingthe need for physically manipulating nucleic acids.

Once assembled (by synthesis, site-directed mutagenesis, DNA shufflingor another method), the nucleotide sequence encoding the templates isused to generate the template-displaying libraries.

Still other aspects of the present invention relates to a pharmaceuticalcomposition comprising the conjugate or the variant of the invention aswell as to methods of producing and using the conjugates and variants ofthe invention.

The term “affinity” is used herein as a qualitative term to describe themolecule-target interaction. A quantitative measure for the affinity isexpressed through the Association Constant (K_(A)). The AssociationConstant and the Dissociation Constant is related to each other by theequation K_(D)=1/K_(A). Evidently, a high affinity corresponds to alower Dissociation Constant. The term “binds to a specific target” meansthat the binding molecules obtained with the template-displayingmolecule technology binds to a chosen target so that a measurableresponse is obtained when tested in a suitable binding or functionalassay. In the present context, the term “therapeutic agent” is intendedto mean any biologically or pharmacologically active substance orantigen-comprising material; the term includes substances which haveutility in the treatment or prevention of diseases or disordersaffecting animals and humans, or in the regulation of any animal orhuman physiological condition and it also includes any biological activecompound or composition which, when administrated in an effectiveamount, has an effect on living cells or organisms.

After the construction of template-displayed libraries,template-displaying molecules bearing the desired ligands can becaptured using the below protocol. Coat two wells of two flat-bottommicrotiter plates with about 1 μg streptavidin in a TBS buffer. Incubateover night at 4° C. Remove the streptavidin solution and wash the wellsat least six times with TBS. Immediately add 2% BSA to block the wellsand incubate for about 30 min. at 37° C. Wash the plate with TBS bufferat least three times. Add about 0.1 μg biotinylated target molecule(biotinylation can be performed as described in the literature) to oneof the wells (use the other as background control) and incubate forabout 30 min at 20° C. and then remove the excess by washing with TBSbuffer at least six times. Block free streptavidin molecules with 1 mMbiotin for 5 min. and wash excess away with TBS buffer at least sixtimes. Add then the template-displaying molecule library to both wellsand allow binding by incubating at 20° C. for about 1 hour. Wash thewells with TBS buffer at least six times to remove template-displayingmolecules that not coordinate to the immobilized target molecule. Elutethe coordinated template-displaying molecules using condition thatremove the binding molecules. In later selection cycles, compare thenumber of eluted molecules between the wells with and without the targetmolecule to make sure there are more template-displaying moleculeseluted in the well with target. That will ensure that there is aspecific enrichment in the selection process. Other types and numerousvariations of selection procedures can be found in the literature (e.g.“Phage display: A laboratory manual” (2001) Barbas et al., Eds. ColdSpring Harbor Laboratory Press, New York),

An alternative to the above capturing is, after the construction oftemplate-displayed libraries, to capture the template-displayingmolecules bearing the desired ligands using the below protocol. Theselection of template-display molecules can be performed usingmagnetically activated cell sorting (Siegel et al. (1997) J. Immunol.Methods 206: 73-85). Positive cells (cells with the antigen of interest)is cell-surface biotinylated using sulfo-NHS-LC-biotin (Pierce). Addapproximately 10⁶ biotinylated cells to 10 μl streptavidin-coatedparamagnetic microbeads (Dynal) and allow binding. Add about 10⁸negative cells (cells without the antigen of interest). These negativecells act as a sink for nonpecific template-displaying molecules, andthe target cells capture the specific template-displaying molecules.Pellet the cell mixture, discard the supernatant, and suspend in thetemplate-displaying library suspension. Incubate about 2 hours at 37° C.on a rotator to keep the cells in suspension. Load thecell/template-displaying library solution on a magnetic column torecover the positive cells by wash off all the negative cells. Finallyelute the positive cells by removing the magnetic field and amplify theeluted templates using PCR. This selection protocol can be repeatedseveral times if needed.

Amplification of Templates Capable of Templating the Synthesis ofTemplated Molecules

In one aspect the present invention relates to methods for amplifyingtemplated molecules that may or may not be bound to a target. The choiceof amplification method depends on the choice of coding or complementingelements. Natural oligonucleotides can be amplified by any state of theart method. These methods include, but is not limited to the polymerasechain reaction (PCR); as wells as e.g. nucleic acid sequence-basedamplification (e.g. Compton, Nature 350, 91-92 (1991)), amplifiedanti-sense RNA (e.g. van Gelder et al., PNAS 85: 77652-77656 (1988));self-sustained sequence replication system (e.g. Gnatelli et al., PNAS87: 1874-1878 (1990)); polymerase independent amplification as describedin e.g. Schmidt et al., NAR 25: 4797-4802 (1997), as well as in vivoamplification of plasmids carrying cloned DNA fragments. Ligase-mediatedamplification methods may also be used, e.g., LCR (Ligase ChainReaction).

For non-natural nucleotides the choices of efficient amplificationprocedures are fewer. As non-natural nucleotides per definition can beincorporated by certain enzymes including polymerases, it will bepossible to perform manual polymerase chain reaction by adding thepolymerase during each extension cycle.

For oligonucleotides containing nucleotide analogs, fewer methods foramplification exist. One may use non-enzyme mediated amplificationschemes (Schmidt et al., NAR 25: 4797-4802 (1997)). Forbackbone-modified oligonucleotide analogs such as PNA and LNA, thisamplification method may be used. Before or during amplification thetemplates or complementing templates may be mutagenized or recombined inorder to create a larger diversity for the next round of selection orscreening.

Characterization of Polymers Isolated by the Selections or ScreeningAssays.

After the final round of selection, it is often desirable to sequenceindividual templates, in order to determine the sequence of individualtemplated polymers. If the template contains natural nucleotides, it isa standard routine to optionally PCR amplify the isolated templates (ifthe template is an RNA molecule, it is necessary to use reversetranscriptase to produce cDNA prior to the PCR-amplification), and thenclone the DNA fragments into for example plasmids, transform these andthen sequence individual plasmid-clones containing one or multipletandem DNA sequences. In this case, it is practical to design arestriction site in both of the flanking sequences to the central randomor partly random sequence of the template (i.e., in the primer bindingsites). This will allow easy cloning of the isolated nucleotides.Sequencing can be done by the standard dideoxy chain termination method,or by more classical means such as Maxam-Gilbert sequencing.

If the template contains non-natural nucleotides, it is not feasible toclone individual sequences by transfer through a microbial host.However, using bead populations where each bead carries oneoligonucleotide sequence, it is possible to clone in vitro, whereafterall the nucleotides attached to a specific bead may be optionallyamplified and then sequenced (Brenner et al., 2000, Proc. Natl. Acad.Sci. USA 97, 1665-1670). Alternatively, one may dilute the population ofisolates adequately, and then aliquot into microtiter plates so that thewells on average contain for example 0.1 templates. By amplifying thesingle templates by for example PCR, it will now be possible to sequenceusing standard methods. Of course, this requires that the non-naturalnucleotides are substrates for the thermostable polymerase used in thePCR.

If alternative methods are used that require shorter oligonucleotides itmay be desirable to design the starting template so as to containrestriction sites on either side of the encoding/templating region ofthe template. Thereby, after the final selection round, the templatescan be restricted, to obtain a short oligonucleotide encoding thetemplated polymer, and then these short oligos can be applied to variousanalytical procedures.

It is also possible to sequence the isolates by the use of a DNA arrayof oligos with random but predetermined sequences.

It may also be desirable to sequence the population of isolates as apool, for example if the sequences are expected to be in register, forexample because the initial library consisted of a degenerate sequencebased on a polymer sequence with a known (relatively high) desiredactivity. Therefore, it is then expected that all the isolates havesequences similar to the initial sequence of the templates beforeselection. Wherefore the population of isolates can be sequenced as awhole, to obtain a consensus sequence for the population as a whole.

Templated Molecules

A non-exhaustive and non-limiting list of oligomers that may betemplated by the various principles described in the present inventionis listed below:

-   -   alpha-, beta-, gamma-, and omega-peptides    -   mono-, di- and tri-substituted peptides    -   L- and D-form peptides    -   cyclohexane- and cyclopentane-backbone modified beta-peptides    -   vinylogous polypeptides    -   glycopolypeptides    -   polyamides    -   vinylogous sulfonamide peptide    -   Polysulfonamide    -   conjugated peptide (i.e., having prosthetic groups)    -   Polyesters    -   Polysaccharides    -   Polycarbamates    -   Polycarbonates    -   Polyureas    -   poly-peptidylphosphonates    -   Azatides    -   peptoids (oligo N-substituted glycines)    -   Polyethers    -   ethoxyformacetal oligomers    -   poly-thioethers    -   polyethylene glycols (PEG)    -   Polyethylenes    -   Polydisulfides    -   polyarylene sulfides    -   Polynucleotides    -   PNAs    -   LNAs    -   Morpholinos    -   oligo pyrrolinone    -   polyoximes    -   Polyimines    -   Polyethyleneimine    -   Polyacetates    -   Polystyrenes    -   Polyacetylene    -   Polyvinyl    -   Lipids    -   Phospholipids    -   Glycolipids    -   polycycles (aliphatic)    -   polycycles (aromatic)    -   polyheterocycles    -   Proteoglycan    -   Polysiloxanes    -   Polyisocyanides    -   Polyisocyanates    -   Polymethacrylates    -   Monofunctional, Difunctional, Trifunctional and Oligofunctional        open-chain hydrocarbons.    -   Monofunctional, Difunctional, Trifunctional and Oligofunctional        Nonaromatic Carbocycles.    -   Monocyclic, Bicyclic, Tricyclic and Polycyclic Hydrocarbons    -   Bridged Polycyclic Hydrocarbones    -   Monofunctional, Difunctional, Trifunctional and Oligofunctional        Nonaromatic Heterocycles.    -   Monocyclic, Bicyclic, Tricyclic and Polycyclic Heterocycles    -   Bridged Polycyclic Heterocycles    -   Monofunctional, Difunctional, Trifunctional and Oligofunctional        Aromatic Garbocycles.    -   Monocyclic, Bicyclic, Tricyclic and Polycyclic Aromatic        Carbocycles Monofunctional, Difunctional, Trifunctional and        Oligofunctional Aromatic Heterocycles.    -   Monocyclic, Bicyclic, Tricyclic and Polycyclic Heterocycles    -   Chelates    -   Fullerenes.    -   Any combination of the above.

The list refers to any linear, branched or cyclic structure thatcontains one or more of the backbone structures listed, and/or containseveral bonds of the same kind (e.g. amide bonds). Heteropolymers(hybrids of different polymer types) can also be templated by thepresent invention.

Below a table is presented stating the polymers producible according tothe present invention as well as the functional entities/reactive groupsrequired to make them. A reference is made to the relevant figure:

Functional Entity Linking Catalyst/ General Specific Polymer (reactivegroups) molecule reagent Figure Figure polycyclic dicounarin light FIG.11 FIG. 11, ex. 1 compound polyester alcohol, carbozylic acidcarbodilmide FIG. 12, FIG. 21 polyester hydroxyl, thamacer FIG. 14polyurea diemins carbanyldimidazole FIG. 16 FIG. 16, ex. 3 polyacetatehalogen, carboxylic acid

FIG. 12, FIG. 22 polyacetate alcohol, carboxylic acid EDC or other FIG.12, carbodilmide FIG. 22 polycarbamate alcohol, locyanate FIG. 12, FIG.22 polycarbonate diol carbanyldimidazole FIG. 16 peptoid secondaryemine, a- FIG. 12, halacetyl FIG. 22 primary amine, a- alkylating agentFIG. 12, haleoactyl FIG. 22 ulycuyan UDP-glecvy glycogen FIG. 12,uynthulavy FIG. 22 polysaccharide UDP-activated polysaccharide FIG. 12,saccharides synthetase FIG. 22 polysaccharide glycoryl Kahns conditionsFIG. 12, sulphide/sulfoxide FIG. 22 activation amebean (kahnsglucorylethar) polyamide amine, y- FIG. 12, hydroxysuccinamide etherFIG. 22 polyamide amide, sachmryllic acid carbocilimide FIG. 12, FIG. 22polyamice d-amine di-carboxylic acid carbocilimide FIG. 16 FIG. 16, ex.2 polyamice d-carboxylic acid di-amine carbocilimide FIG. 16 polyamiceamine, carboxylic acid amine, carboxyllic carbocilimide FIG. 17 acidα-polypeptide carboxyanhydride (5- FIG. 19 FIG. 19, ex. 1 membrane ring)β-polypeptide carboxyanhydride (3- FIG. 19 membrane ring) γ-polypeptidecarboxyanhydride (7- FIG. 19 membrane ring) α-polypeptide2,2-diphenylthinadnanone FIG. 19 FIG. 19, ex. 2 (6-membered ring)β-polypeptide 2,2-diphenylthinadnanone FIG. 19 (8-membered ring)γ-polypeptide 2,2-diphenylthinadnanone FIG. 19 (7-membered ring)α-polypeptide amine, thiester FIG. 14 β-polypeptide amine, thiester FIG.14 FIG. 14, ex. 1 γ-polypeptide amine, thiester FIG. 14 α-polypeptideamine, thiester FIG. 14 polysulfanemide amine, sulfonic acidcarbocilimide FIG. 12, FIG. 22 polyshaehonate di-alcohol activated FIG.16 phoachonate polyshaehonate di-alcohol activated oxidating reagent,FIG. 16 dicycloeshine e.g. bet- betylhydroper acid polyphosphatedi-alcohol diamino alkoxy- oxidating reagent, FIG. 16 phoachine e.g.bartbutyl- hydrocerroxide polyphosphate ester diol dieminophoehyineoxident (BuOOH) FIG. 16 FIG. 16, ex. 6 polyphosphate esterdiaminophosphine diol oxident (BuOOH) FIG. 16 FIG. 16, ex. 6polyurethane diamine disecynate FIG. 15 polyether epoxide FIG. 19 FIG.18, ex. 3 polythioether thioepoxide FIG. 19 polydisulfide thiol, thioloxidant FIG. 11 polyoxime aldehyde, hydroxylamine FIG. 12, FIG. 22polyimine aldehyde, amine FIG. 12, FIG. 22 polyimine aldehyde, amineFIG. 15 FIG. 15, ex. 1 polynucleotides nucleoside-6′-phosphate-2- FIG.12, methylimidazolides FIG. 22 polyamine amine, alkyl sulfonate FIG. 14FIG. 14, ex. 2 alkane alkene FIG. 18 FIG. 18, ex. 1 alkane alkene FIG.18 FIG. 18, ex. 2 polycycloalkane di-diene di-alkene FIG. 15 FIG. 15,ex. 7 (benzoquinone) polyvinyl vinylchloride unit FIG. 18 polystyrenestyrene-unit radical initiator, FIG. 18 AIBN polyethylene ethylene unitFIG. 18 FIG. 18, ex. 1

indicates data missing or illegible when filed

Templates

In one embodiment, the templated molecule is linked by means of a singlelinker to the complementing template or template that templated thesynthesis of the templated molecule. In another embodiment, the methodfor templating a templated molecule comprises the further step ofreleasing the template or complementing template that templated thetemplated molecule, and obtaining a templated molecule that is notlinked to the complementing template or template that templated thesynthesis of the templated molecule.

The template preferably comprises n coding elements in a linearsequence. The template comprising n coding elements can also bebranched. n preferably has a value of from 2 to 200, for example from 2to 100, such as from 2 to 80, for example from 2 to 60, such as from 2to 40, for example from 2 to 30, such as from 2 to 20, for example from2 to 15, such as from 2 to 10, such as from 2 to 8, for example from 2to 6, such as from 2 to 4, for example 2, such as from 3 to 100, forexample from 3 to 80, such as from 3 to 60, such as from 3 to 40, forexample from 3 to 30, such as from 3 to 20, such as from 3 to 15, forexample from 3 to 15, such as from 3 to 10, such as from 3 to 8, forexample from 3 to 6, such as from 3 to 4, for example 3, such as from 4to 100, for example from 4 to 80, such as from 4 to 60, such as from 4to 40, for example from 4 to 30, such as from 4 to 20, such as from 4 to15, for example from 4 to 10, such as from 4 to 8, such as from 4 to 6,for example 4, for example from 5 to 100, such as from 5 to 80, forexample from 5 to 60, such as from 5 to 40, for example from 5 to 30,such as from 5 to 20, for example from 5 to 15, such as from 5 to 10,such as from 5 to 8, for example from 5 to 6, for example 5, such asfrom 6 to 100, for example from 6 to 80, such as from 6 to 60, such asfrom 6 to 40, for example from 6 to 30, such as from 6 to 20, such asfrom 6 to 15, for example from 6 to 10, such as from 6 to 8, such as 6,for example from 7 to 100, such as from 7 to 80, for example from 7 to60, such as from 7 to 40, for example from 7 to 30, such as from 7 to20, for example from 7 to 15, such as from 7 to 10, such as from 7 to 8,for example 7, for example from 8 to 100, such as from 8 to 80, forexample from 8 to 60, such as from 8 to 40, for example from 8 to 30,such as from 8 to 20, for example from 8 to 15, such as from 8 to 10,such as 8, for example 9, for example from 10 to 100, such as from 10 to80, for example from 10 to 60, such as from 10 to 40, for example from10 to 30, such as from 10 to 20, for example from 10 to 15, such as from10 to 12, such as 10, for example from 12 to 100, such as from 12 to 80,for example from 12 to 60, such as from 12 to 40, for example from 12 to30, such as from 12 to 20, for example from 12 to 15, such as from 14 to100, such as from 14 to 80, for example from 14 to 60, such as from 14to 40, for example from 14 to 30, such as from 14 to 20, for examplefrom 14 to 16, such as from 16 to 100, such as from 16 to 80, forexample from 16 to 60, such as from 16 to 40, for example from 16 to 30,such as from 16 to 20, such as from 18 to 100, such as from 18 to 80,for example from 18 to 60, such as from 18 to 40, for example from 18 to30, such as from 18 to 20, for example from 20 to 100, such as from 20to 80, for example from 20 to 60, such as from 20 to 40, for examplefrom 20 to 30, such as from 20 to 25, for example from 22 to 100, suchas from 22 to 80, for example from 22 to 60, such as from 22 to 40, forexample from 22 to 30, such as from 22 to 25, for example from 25 to100, such as from 25 to 80, for example from 25 to 60, such as from 25to 40, for example from 25 to 30, such as from 30 to 100, for examplefrom 30 to 80, such as from 30 to 60, for example from 30 to 40, such asfrom 30 to 35, for example from 35 to 100, such as from 35 to 80, forexample from 35 to 60, such as from 35 to 40, for example from 40 to100, such as from 40 to 80, for example from 40 to 60, such as from 40to 50, for example from 40 to 45, such as from 45 to 100, for examplefrom 45 to 80, such as from 45 to 60, for example from 45 to 50, such asfrom 50 to 100, for example from 50 to 80, such as from 50 to 60, forexample from 50 to 55, such as from 60 to 100, for example from 60 to80, such as from 60 to 70, for example from 70 to 100, such as from 70to 90, for example from 70 to 80, such as from 80 to 100, for examplefrom 80 to 90, such as from 90 to 100.

In some embodiments of the invention it is preferred that the templateis attached to a solid or semi-solid support.

The template in one embodiment preferably comprises or essentiallyconsists of nucleotides selected from the group consisting ofdeoxyribonucleic acids (DNA), ribonucleic acids (RNA), peptide nucleicacids (PNA), locked nucleic acids (LNA), and morpholinos sequences,including any analog or derivative thereof.

In another embodiment, the template of coding elements preferablycomprises or essentially consists of nucleotides selected from the groupconsisting of DNA, RNA, PNA, LNA and morpholinos sequence, including anyanalog or derivative thereof, and the complementing element preferablycomprises or essentially consists of nucleotides selected from the groupconsisting of DNA, RNA, PNA, LNA and morpholinos sequence, including anyanalog or derivative thereof.

It is preferred in various embodiments of the invention that thetemplate can be characterised by any one or more of the followingfeatures: i) That the template is amplifyable, ii) that the templatecomprises a single strand of coding elements, preferably a single strandof coding elements capable of forming a double helix by hybridization toa complementing template comprising a single strand of complementingelements, and iii) that the template comprises a priming site.

Coding Elements

Each coding element is preferably linked to a neighbouring codingelement by a covalent chemical bond. Each coding element can also belinked to each neighbouring coding element by a covalent chemical bond.The covalent chemical bond is preferably selected from the group ofcovalent bonds consisting of phosphodiester bonds, phosphorothioatebonds, and peptide bonds. More preferably, the covalent chemical bond isselected from the group of covalent bonds consisting of phosphodiesterbonds and phosphorothioate bonds.

In preferred embodiments, at least one coding element is attached to asolid or semi-solid support.

The coding elements are selected in one embodiment of the invention fromthe group consisting of nucleotides, including any analog or derivativethereof, amino acids, antibodies, and antigens, and preferably from thegroup consisting of nucleotides, nucleotide derivatives, and nucleotideanalogs, including any combination thereof. In another embodiment, thecoding elements are selected from the group consisting of nucleotides,including nucleotides such as deoxyribonucleic acids comprising a baseselected from adenine (A), thymine (T), guanine (G), and cytosine (C),and ribonucleic acids comprising a base selected from adenine (A),uracil (U), guanine (G), and cytosine (C). Also in this case can eachnucleotide be linked to a neighbouring nucleotide by means of a covalentbond, or linked to each neighbouring nucleotide by means of a covalentbond. The covalent bond is preferably a phosphodiester bond or aphosphorothioate bond.

In other embodiments, the coding elements are natural and non-naturalnucleotides selected from the group consisting of deoxyribonucleic acidsand ribonucleic acids.

Coding Elements and Corresponding Complementing Elements

When the coding elements are preferably selected from the groupconsisting of nucleotides, nucleotide derivatives and nucleotide analogsin which one or more of the base moiety and/or the phosphate moietyand/or the ribose or deoxyribose moiety have been substituted by analternative molecular entity, corresponding complementing elements arecapable of interacting with said coding elements and preferably compriseor essentially consist of nucleotides selected from the group consistingof DNA, RNA, PNA, LNA and morpholinos sequence, including any analog orderivative thereof. Each nucleotide is linked to a neighbouringnucleotide by a covalent chemical bond, or linked to each neighbouringnucleotide by a covalent chemical bond. The covalent chemical bond ispreferably selected from the group of covalent bonds consisting ofphosphodiester bonds and peptide bonds.

Coding Element Subunits

Coding elements in one embodiment preferably comprise or essentiallyconsist of from 1 to 100 subunits, such as from 1 to 80 subunits, forexample from 1 to 60 subunits, such as from 1 to 40 subunits, forexample from 1 to 20 subunits, such as from 1 to 18 subunits, forexample from 1 to 16 subunits, such as from 1 to 14 subunits, forexample from 1 to 12 subunits, such as from 1 to 10 subunits, forexample from 1 to 9 subunits, such as from 1 to 8 subunits, for examplefrom 1 to 7 subunits, such as from 1 to 6 subunits, for example from 1to 5 subunits, such as from 1 to 4 subunits, for example from 1 to 3subunits, such as from 1 to 2 subunits, for example 1 subunit, such asfrom 2 to 100 subunits, such as from 2 to 80 subunits, for example from2 to 60 subunits, such as from 2 to 40 subunits, for example from 2 to20 subunits, such as from 2 to 18 subunits, for example from 2 to 16subunits, such as from 2 to 14 subunits, for example from 2 to 12subunits, such as from 2 to 10 subunits, for example from 2 to 9subunits, such as from 2 to 8 subunits, for example from 2 to 7subunits, such as from 2 to 6 subunits, for example from 2 to 5subunits, such as from 2 to 4 subunits, for example from 2 to 3subunits, such as 2 subunits, such as from 3 to 100 subunits, such asfrom 3 to 80 subunits, for example from 3 to 60 subunits, such as from 3to 40 subunits, for example from 3 to 20 subunits, such as from 3 to 18subunits, for example from 3 to 16 subunits, such as from 3 to 14subunits, for example from 3 to 12 subunits, such as from 3 to 10subunits, for example from 3 to 9 subunits, such as from 3 to 8subunits, for example from 3 to 7 subunits, such as from 3 to 6subunits, for example from 3 to 5 subunits, such as from 3 to 4subunits, for example 3 subunits, for example from 4 to 100 subunits,such as from 4 to 80 subunits, for example from 4 to 60 subunits, suchas from 4 to 40 subunits, for example from 4 to 20 subunits, such asfrom 4 to 18 subunits, for example from 4 to 16 subunits, such as from 4to 14 subunits, for example from 4 to 12 subunits, such as from 4 to 10subunits, for example from 4 to 9 subunits, such as from 4 to 8subunits, for example from 4 to 7 subunits, such as from 4 to 6subunits, for example from 4 to 5 subunits, for example 4 subunits, suchas from 5 to 100 subunits, such as from 5 to 80 subunits, for examplefrom 5 to 60 subunits, such as from 5 to 40 subunits, for example from 5to 20 subunits, such as from 5 to 18 subunits, for example from 5 to 16subunits, such as from 5 to 14 subunits, for example from 5 to 12subunits, such as from 5 to 10 subunits, for example from 5 to 9subunits, such as from 5 to 8 subunits, for example from 5 to 7subunits, such as from 5 to 6 subunits, such as 5 subunits, for examplefrom 6 to 100 subunits, such as from 6 to 80 subunits, for example from6 to 60 subunits, such as from 6 to 40 subunits, for example from 6 to20 subunits, such as from 6 to 18 subunits, for example from 6 to 16subunits, such as from 6 to 14 subunits, for example from 6 to 12subunits, such as from 6 to 10 subunits, for example from 6 to 9subunits, such as from 6 to 8 subunits, for example from 6 to 7subunits, such as 6 subunits, such as from 7 to 100 subunits, such asfrom 7 to 80 subunits, for example from 7 to 60 subunits, such as from 7to 40 subunits, for example from 7 to 20 subunits, such as from 7 to 18subunits, for example from 7 to 16 subunits, such as from 7 to 14subunits, for example from 7 to 12 subunits, such as from 7 to 10subunits, for example from 7 to 9 subunits, such as from 7 to 8subunits, such as 7 subunits, for example from 8 to 100 subunits, suchas from 8 to 80 subunits, for example from 8 to 60 subunits, such asfrom 8 to 40 subunits, for example from 8 to 20 subunits, such as from 8to 18 subunits, for example from 8 to 16 subunits, such as from 8 to 14subunits, for example from 8 to 12 subunits, such as from 8 to 10subunits, for example from 8 to 9 subunits, for example 8 subunits, suchas from 9 to 100 subunits, such as from 9 to 80 subunits, for examplefrom 9 to 60 subunits, such as from 9 to 40 subunits, for example from 9to 20 subunits, such as from 9 to 18 subunits, for example from 9 to 16subunits, such as from 9 to 14 subunits, for example from 9 to 12subunits, such as from 9 to 10 subunits, such as 9 subunits, for examplefrom 10 to 100 subunits, such as from 10 to 80 subunits, for examplefrom 10 to 60 subunits, such as from 10 to 40 subunits, for example from10 to 20 subunits, such as from 10 to 18 subunits, for example from 10to 16 subunits, such as from 10 to 14 subunits, for example from 10 to12 subunits, such as 10 subunits, such as from 11 to 100 subunits, suchas from 11 to 80 subunits, for example from 11 to 60 subunits, such asfrom 11 to 40 subunits, for example from 11 to 20 subunits, such as from11 to 18 subunits, for example from 11 to 16 subunits, such as from 11to 14 subunits, for example from 11 to 12 subunits, such as from 12 to100 subunits, such as from 12 to 80 subunits, for example from 12 to 60subunits, such as from 12 to 40 subunits, for example from 12 to 20subunits, such as from 12 to 18 subunits, for example from 12 to 16subunits, such as from 12 to 14 subunits, for example from 13 to 100subunits, such as from 13 to 80 subunits, for example from 13 to 60subunits, such as from 13 to 40 subunits, for example from 13 to 20subunits, such as from 13 to 18 subunits, for example from 13 to 16subunits, such as from 13 to 14 subunits, for example from 14 to 100subunits, such as from 14 to 80 subunits, for example from 14 to 60subunits, such as from 14 to 40 subunits, for example from 14 to 20subunits, such as from 14 to 18 subunits, for example from 14 to 16subunits, such as from 15 to 100 subunits, such as from 15 to 80subunits, for example from 15 to 60 subunits, such as from 15 to 40subunits, for example from 15 to 20 subunits, such as from 15 to 18subunits, for example from 15 to 16 subunits, such as from 16 to 100subunits, such as from 16 to 80 subunits, for example from 16 to 60subunits, such as from 16 to 40 subunits, for example from 16 to 20subunits, such as from 16 to 18 subunits, for example from 17 to 100subunits, such as from 17 to 80 subunits, for example from 17 to 60subunits, such as from 17 to 40 subunits, for example from 17 to 20subunits, such as from 17 to 18 subunits, for example from 18 to 100subunits, such as from 18 to 80 subunits, for example from 18 to 60subunits, such as from 18 to 40 subunits, for example from 18 to 20subunits, such as from 19 to 100 subunits, such as from 19 to 80subunits, for example from 19 to 60 subunits, such as from 19 to 40subunits, for example from 19 to 30 subunits, such as from 19 to 25subunits, for example from 20 to 100 subunits, such as from 20 to 80subunits, for example from 20 to 60 subunits, such as from 20 to 40subunits, for example from 20 to 30 subunits, such as from 20 to 25subunits.

In preferred embodiments, each coding element subunit comprises oressentially consists of a nucleotide, or a nucleotide analog. Thenucleotide can be a deoxyribonucleic acid comprising a base selectedfrom adenine (A), thymine (T), guanine (G), and cytosine (C), or it canbe a ribonucleic acid comprising a base selected from adenine (A),uracil (U), guanine (G), and cytosine (C). Each nucleotide is linked toa neighbouring nucleotide, or nucleotide analog, by means of a covalentbond, or linked to each neighbouring nucleotide, or nucleotide analog,by means of a covalent bond, including covalent bonds selected from thegroup consisting of phosphodiester bonds, phosphorothioate bonds, andpeptide bonds.

In one embodiment it is preferred that at least some of said nucleotidesare selected from the group consisting of nucleotide derivatives,including deoxyribonucleic acid derivatives and ribonucleic acidderivatives.

Coding Element Subunits and Corresponding Complementing Element Subunits

The coding element subunits are preferably selected from the groupconsisting of nucleotides, nucleotide derivatives and nucleotide analogsin which one or more of a base moiety and/or a phosphate moiety and/or aribose moiety and/or a deoxyribose moiety have been substituted by analternative molecular entity, and the corresponding complementingelement subunits capable of interacting with said coding elementsubunits comprise or essentially consist of nucleotides selected fromthe group consisting of DNA, RNA, PNA, LNA and morpholinos sequence,including any analog or derivative thereof.

Each nucleotide derivative can be linked to a neighbouring nucleotide,or nucleotide analog, by a covalent chemical bond, or each nucleotidederivative can be linked to each neighbouring nucleotide, or nucleotideanalog, by a covalent chemical bond. The covalent chemical bond ispreferably selected from the group of covalent bonds consisting ofphosphodiester bonds, phosphorothioate bonds, and peptide bonds.

Complementing Elements

The complementing template in one embodiment preferably comprises ncomplementing elements in a linear sequence or a branched sequence. npreferably has a value of from 2 to 200, for example from 2 to 100, suchas from 2 to 80, for example from 2 to 60, such as from 2 to 40, forexample from 2 to 30, such as from 2 to 20, for example from 2 to 15,such as from 2 to 10, such as from 2 to 8, for example from 2 to 6, suchas from 2 to 4, such as 2, such as from 3 to 100, for example from 3 to80, such as from 3 to 60, such as from 3 to 40, for example from 3 to30, such as from 3 to 20, such as from 3 to 15, for example from 3 to15, such as from 3 to 10, such as from 3 to 8, for example from 3 to 6,such as from 3 to 4, for example 3, such as from 4 to 100, for examplefrom 4 to 80, such as from 4 to 60, such as from 4 to 40, for examplefrom 4 to 30, such as from 4 to 20, such as from 4 to 15, for examplefrom 4 to 10, such as from 4 to 8, such as from 4 to 6, such as 4, forexample from 5 to 100, such as from 5 to 80, for example from 5 to 60,such as from 5 to 40, for example from 5 to 30, such as from 5 to 20,for example from 5 to 15, such as from 5 to 10, such as from 5 to 8, forexample from 5 to 6, for example 5, such as from 6 to 100, for examplefrom 6 to 80, such as from 6 to 60, such as from 6 to 40, for examplefrom 6 to 30, such as from 6 to 20, such as from 6 to 15, for examplefrom 6 to 10, such as from 6 to 8, such as 6, for example from 7 to 100,such as from 7 to 80, for example from 7 to 60, such as from 7 to 40,for example from 7 to 30, such as from 7 to 20, for example from 7 to15, such as from 7 to 10, such as from 7 to 8, such as 7, for examplefrom 8 to 100, such as from 8 to 80, for example from 8 to 60, such asfrom 8 to 40, for example from 8 to 30, such as from 8 to 20, forexample from 8 to 15, such as from 8 to 10, for example 8, such as 9,for example from 10 to 100, such as from 10 to 80, for example from 10to 60, such as from 10 to 40, for example from 10 to 30, such as from 10to 20, for example from 10 to 15, such as from 10 to 12, such as 10, forexample from 12 to 100, such as from 12 to 80, for example from 12 to60, such as from 12 to 40, for example from 12 to 30, such as from 12 to20, for example from 12 to 15, such as from 14 to 100, such as from 14to 80, for example from 14 to 60, such as from 14 to 40, for examplefrom 14 to 30, such as from 14 to 20, for example from 14 to 16, such asfrom 16 to 100, such as from 16 to 80, for example from 16 to 60, suchas from 16 to 40, for example from 16 to 30, such as from 16 to 20, suchas from 18 to 100, such as from 18 to 80, for example from 18 to 60,such as from 18 to 40, for example from 18 to 30, such as from 18 to 20,for example from 20 to 100, such as from 20 to 80, for example from 20to 60, such as from 20 to 40, for example from 20 to 30, such as from 20to 25, for example from 22 to 100, such as from 22 to 80, for examplefrom 22 to 60, such as from 22 to 40, for example from 22 to 30, such asfrom 22 to 25, for example from 25 to 100, such as from 25 to 80, forexample from 25 to 60, such as from 25 to 40, for example from 25 to 30,such as from 30 to 100, for example from 30 to 80, such as from 30 to60, for example from 30 to 40, such as from 30 to 35, for example from35 to 100, such as from 35 to 80, for example from 35 to 60, such asfrom 35 to 40, for example from 40 to 100, such as from 40 to 80, forexample from 40 to 60, such as from 40 to 50, for example from 40 to 45,such as from 45 to 100, for example from 45 to 80, such as from 45 to60, for example from 45 to 50, such as from 50 to 100, for example from50 to 80, such as from 50 to 60, for example from 50 to 55, such as from60 to 100, for example from 60 to 80, such as from 60 to 70, for examplefrom 70 to 100, such as from 70 to 90, for example from 70 to 80, suchas from 80 to 100, for example from 80 to 90, such as from 90 to 100.

In some embodiments, the complementing template is attached to a solidor semi-solid support.

The complementing template in one embodiment comprises or essentiallyconsists of nucleotides selected from the group consisting ofdeoxyribonucleic acids (DNA), ribonucleic acids (RNA), peptide nucleicacids (PNA), locked nucleic acids (LNA), and morpholinos sequences,including any analog or derivative thereof.

In other embodiments, there is provided a complementing templatecomprising or essentially consisting of nucleotides selected from thegroup consisting of DNA, RNA, PNA, LNA and morpholinos sequence,including any analog or derivative thereof, wherein the correspondingcoding elements of the template comprise or essentially consist ofnucleotides selected from the group consisting of DNA, RNA, PNA, LNA andmorpholinos sequence, including any analog or derivative thereof.

The complementing template is preferably amplifyable and/or comprises asingle strand of complementing elements and/or comprises a single strandof complementing elements capable of forming a double helix byhybridization to a template comprising a single strand of codingelements, and/or comprises a priming site.

Each complementing element is preferably linked to a neighbouringcomplementing element by a covalent chemical bond, or linked to eachcomplementing element is linked to each neighbouring complementingelement by a covalent chemical bond.

The covalent chemical bond is in one embodiment selected from the groupof covalent bonds consisting of phosphodiester bonds, phosphorothioatebonds, and peptide bonds. In other embodiments, the group of covalentbonds consist of phosphodiester bonds and phosphorothioate bonds.

The at least one complementing element can be attached to a solid orsemi-solid support.

The complementing elements can be selected from the group consisting ofnucleotides, including any analog or derivative thereof, amino acids,antibodies, and antigens, and preferably from the group consisting ofnucleotides, nucleotide derivatives, and nucleotide analogs, includingany combination thereof. In one embodiment, it is preferred that thecomplementing elements are selected from the group consisting ofnucleotides, including deoxyribonucleic acids comprising a base selectedfrom adenine (A), thymine (T), guanine (G), and cytosine (C), andribonucleic acids comprising a base selected from adenine (A), uracil(U), guanine (G), and cytosine (C).

Each nucleotide can be linked to a neighbouring nucleotide, ornucleotide analog, by means of a covalent bond, including, or eachnucleotide can be linked to each neighbouring nucleotide, or nucleotideanalog, by means of a covalent bond. The covalent bond can be aphosphodiester bond or a phosphorothioate bond.

In another embodiment, the complementing elements are natural ornon-natural nucleotides selected from the group consisting ofdeoxyribonucleic acids and ribonucleic acids.

Complementing Elements and Corresponding Coding Elements

When the complementing elements are selected from the group consistingof nucleotides, nucleotide derivatives and nucleotide analogs in whichone or more of a base moiety and/or a phosphate moiety and/or a riboseand/or a deoxyribose moiety has been substituted by an alternativemolecular entity, the coding elements capable of interacting with saidcomplementing elements comprise or essentially consist of nucleotidesselected from the group consisting of DNA, RNA, PNA, LNA and morpholinossequence, including any analog or derivative thereof.

Each nucleotide can be linked to a neighbouring nucleotide, ornucleotide analog, by a covalent chemical bond, or linked to eachneighbouring nucleotide, or nucleotide analog, by a covalent chemicalbond. The covalent chemical bond is preferably selected from the groupof covalent bonds consisting of phosphodiester bonds, phosphorothioatebonds, and peptide bonds.

The complementing elements are in one embodiment selected fromnucleotides, and the complementing elements can in one preferredembodiment be linked enzymatically by using an enzyme selected from thegroup consisting of template-dependent DNA- and RNA-polymerases,including reverse transcriptases, DNA-ligases and RNA-ligases, ribozymesand deoxyribozymes, including HIV-1 Reverse Transcriptase, AMV ReverseTranscriptase, T7 RNA polymerase, T7 RNA polymerase mutant Y639F,Sequenase, Taq DNA polymerase, Klenow Fragment (Large fragment of DNApolymerase I), DNA-ligase, T7 DNA polymerase, T4 DNA polymerase, T4 DNALigase, E. coli RNA polymerase, rTh DNA polymerase, Vent DNA polymerase,Pfu DNA polymerase, Tte DNA polymerase, and ribozymes with ligase orreplicase activities.

More preferably, the enzyme is selected from the group consisting ofHIV-1 Reverse Transcriptase, AMV Reverse Transcriptase, T7 RNApolymerase, T7 RNA polymerase mutant Y639F, Sequenase, Taq DNApolymerase, Klenow Fragment (Large fragment of DNA polymerase I),DNA-ligase, T7 DNA polymerase, T4 DNA polymerase, and T4 DNA Ligase. Thenucleotides preferably form a template or complementing template uponincorporation.

In another embodiment, the complementing elements can be selected fromnucleotides, and linked by using a chemical agent, pH change, light, acatalyst, radiation, such as electromagnetic radiation, or byspontaneous coupling when being brought into reactive contact with eachother.

Complementing Element Subunits

The complementing element preferably comprises or essentially consistsof from 1 to 100 subunits, such as from 1 to 80 subunits, for examplefrom 1 to 60 subunits, such as from 1 to 40 subunits, for example from 1to 20 subunits, such as from 1 to 18 subunits, for example from 1 to 16subunits, such as from 1 to 14 subunits, for example from 1 to 12subunits, such as from 1 to 10 subunits, for example from 1 to 9subunits, such as from 1 to 8 subunits, for example from 1 to 7subunits, such as from 1 to 6 subunits, for example from 1 to 5subunits, such as from 1 to 4 subunits, for example from 1 to 3subunits, such as from 1 to 2 subunits, for example 1 subunit, such asfrom 2 to 100 subunits, such as from 2 to 80 subunits, for example from2 to 60 subunits, such as from 2 to 40 subunits, for example from 2 to20 subunits, such as from 2 to 18 subunits, for example from 2 to 16subunits, such as from 2 to 14 subunits, for example from 2 to 12subunits, such as from 2 to 10 subunits, for example from 2 to 9subunits, such as from 2 to 8 subunits, for example from 2 to 7subunits, such as from 2 to 6 subunits, for example from 2 to 5subunits, such as from 2 to 4 subunits, for example from 2 to 3subunits, such as 2 subunits, such as from 3 to 100 subunits, such asfrom 3 to 80 subunits, for example from 3 to 60 subunits, such as from 3to 40 subunits, for example from 3 to 20 subunits, such as from 3 to 18subunits, for example from 3 to 16 subunits, such as from 3 to 14subunits, for example from 3 to 12 subunits, such as from 3 to 10subunits, for example from 3 to 9 subunits, such as from 3 to 8subunits, for example from 3 to 7 subunits, such as from 3 to 6subunits, for example from 3 to 5 subunits, such as from 3 to 4subunits, for example 3 subunits, for example from 4 to 100 subunits,such as from 4 to 80 subunits, for example from 4 to 60 subunits, suchas from 4 to 40 subunits, for example from 4 to 20 subunits, such asfrom 4 to 18 subunits, for example from 4 to 16 subunits, such as from 4to 14 subunits, for example from 4 to 12 subunits, such as from 4 to 10subunits, for example from 4 to 9 subunits, such as from 4 to 8subunits, for example from 4 to 7 subunits, such as from 4 to 6subunits, for example from 4 to 5 subunits, for example 4 subunits, suchas from 5 to 100 subunits, such as from 5 to 80 subunits, for examplefrom 5 to 60 subunits, such as from 5 to 40 subunits, for example from 5to 20 subunits, such as from 5 to 18 subunits, for example from 5 to 16subunits, such as from 5 to 14 subunits, for example from 5 to 12subunits, such as from 5 to 10 subunits, for example from 5 to 9subunits, such as from 5 to 8 subunits, for example from 5 to 7subunits, such as from 5 to 6 subunits, such as 5 subunits, for examplefrom 6 to 100 subunits, such as from 6 to 80 subunits, for example from6 to 60 subunits, such as from 6 to 40 subunits, for example from 6 to20 subunits, such as from 6 to 18 subunits, for example from 6 to 16subunits, such as from 6 to 14 subunits, for example from 6 to 12subunits, such as from 6 to 10 subunits, for example from 6 to 9subunits, such as from 6 to 8 subunits, for example from 6 to 7subunits, such as 6 subunits, such as from 7 to 100 subunits, such asfrom 7 to 80 subunits, for example from 7 to 60 subunits, such as from 7to 40 subunits, for example from 7 to 20 subunits, such as from 7 to 18subunits, for example from 7 to 16 subunits, such as from 7 to 14subunits, for example from 7 to 12 subunits, such as from 7 to 10subunits, for example from 7 to 9 subunits, such as from 7 to 8subunits, such as 7 subunits, for example from 8 to 100 subunits, suchas from 8 to 80 subunits, for example from 8 to 60 subunits, such asfrom 8 to 40 subunits, for example from 8 to 20 subunits, such as from 8to 18 subunits, for example from 8 to 16 subunits, such as from 8 to 14subunits, for example from 8 to 12 subunits, such as from 8 to 10subunits, for example from 8 to 9 subunits, for example 8 subunits, suchas from 9 to 100 subunits, such as from 9 to 80 subunits, for examplefrom 9 to 60 subunits, such as from 9 to 40 subunits, for example from 9to 20 subunits, such as from 9 to 18 subunits, for example from 9 to 16subunits, such as from 9 to 14 subunits, for example from 9 to 12subunits, such as from 9 to 10 subunits, such as 9 subunits, for examplefrom 10 to 100 subunits, such as from 10 to 80 subunits, for examplefrom 10 to 60 subunits, such as from 10 to 40 subunits, for example from10 to 20 subunits, such as from 10 to 18 subunits, for example from 10to 16 subunits, such as from 10 to 14 subunits, for example from 10 to12 subunits, such as 10 subunits, such as from 11 to 100 subunits, suchas from 11 to 80 subunits, for example from 11 to 60 subunits, such asfrom 11 to 40 subunits, for example from 11 to 20 subunits, such as from11 to 18 subunits, for example from 11 to 16 subunits, such as from 11to 14 subunits, for example from 11 to 12 subunits, such as from 12 to100 subunits, such as from 12 to 80 subunits, for example from 12 to 60subunits, such as from 12 to 40 subunits, for example from 12 to 20subunits, such as from 12 to 18 subunits, for example from 12 to 16subunits, such as from 12 to 14 subunits, for example from 13 to 100subunits, such as from 13 to 80 subunits, for example from 13 to 60subunits, such as from 13 to 40 subunits, for example from 13 to 20subunits, such as from 13 to 18 subunits, for example from 13 to 16subunits, such as from 13 to 14 subunits, for example from 14 to 100subunits, such as from 14 to 80 subunits, for example from 14 to 60subunits, such as from 14 to 40 subunits, for example from 14 to 20subunits, such as from 14 to 18 subunits, for example from 14 to 16subunits, such as from 15 to 100 subunits, such as from 15 to 80subunits, for example from 15 to 60 subunits, such as from 15 to 40subunits, for example from 15 to 20 subunits, such as from 15 to 18subunits, for example from 15 to 16 subunits, such as from 16 to 100subunits, such as from 16 to 80 subunits, for example from 16 to 60subunits, such as from 16 to 40 subunits, for example from 16 to 20subunits, such as from 16 to 18 subunits, for example from 17 to 100subunits, such as from 17 to 80 subunits, for example from 17 to 60subunits, such as from 17 to 40 subunits, for example from 17 to 20subunits, such as from 17 to 18 subunits, for example from 18 to 100subunits, such as from 18 to 80 subunits, for example from 18 to 60subunits, such as from 18 to 40 subunits, for example from 18 to 20subunits, such as from 19 to 100 subunits, such as from 19 to 80subunits, for example from 19 to 60 subunits, such as from 19 to 40subunits, for example from 19 to 30 subunits, such as from 19 to 25subunits, for example from 20 to 100 subunits, such as from 20 to 80subunits, for example from 20 to 60 subunits, such as from 20 to 40subunits, for example from 20 to 30 subunits, such as from 20 to 25subunits.

In preferred embodiments, each subunit comprises or essentially consistsof a nucleotide, or a nucleotide analog. The nucleotide can be adeoxyribonucleic acid comprising a base selected from adenine (A),thymine (T), guanine (G), and cytosine (C), or a ribonucleic acidcomprising a base selected from adenine (A), uracil (U), guanine (G),and cytosine (C).

Each of said nucleotides can be linked to a neighbouring nucleotide, ornucleotide analog, by means of a covalent bond, or linked to eachneighbouring nucleotide, or nucleotide analog, by means of a covalentbond. The covalent bond is preferably selected from the group consistingof phosphodiester bonds, phosphorothioate bonds, and peptide bonds.

It is preferred in one embodiment that at least some of said nucleotidesare selected from the group consisting of nucleotide derivatives,including nucleotide derivatives selected from the group consisting ofdeoxyribonucleic acid derivatives and ribonucleic acid derivatives.

Complementing Element Subunits and Corresponding Coding Element Subunits

When the complementing element subunits are selected from the groupconsisting of nucleotides, nucleotide derivatives, and nucleotideanalogs in which one or more of a base moiety and/or a phosphate moietyand/or a ribose moiety and/or a deoxyribose moiety has been substitutedby an alternative molecular entity, the coding element subunits capableof interacting with said complementing element subunits preferablycomprise or essentially consist of nucleotides selected from the groupconsisting of DNA, RNA, PNA, LNA and morpholinos sequence, including anyanalog or derivative thereof.

It is preferred that each nucleotide derivative is linked to aneighbouring nucleotide, or nucleotide analog, by a covalent chemicalbond, or linked to each neighbouring nucleotide, or nucleotide analog,by a covalent chemical bond. The covalent chemical bond can be selectedfrom the group of covalent bonds consisting of phosphodiester bonds,phosphorothioate bonds, and peptide bonds.

Building Blocks, Cleavable Linkers and Selectively Cleavable Linkers

In one aspect there is provided a building block comprising

-   -   i) a complementing element capable of specifically recognising a        coding element having a recognition group, said complementing        element being selected from nucleotides, amino acids,        antibodies, antigens, proteins, peptides, and molecules with        nucleotide recognizing ability,    -   ii) at least one functional entity selected from a precursor of        α-peptides, β-peptides, γ-peptides, β-peptides, mono-, di- and        tri-substituted α-peptides, β-peptides, γ-peptides, ω-peptides,        peptides wherein the amino acid residues are in the L-form or in        the D-form, vinylogous polypeptides, glycopoly-peptides,        polyamides, vinylogous sulfonamide peptide, polysulfonamide,        conjugated peptides comprising e.g. prosthetic groups,        polyesters, polysaccharides, polycarbamates, polycarbonates,        polyureas, polypeptidylphosphonates, polyurethanes, azatides,        oligo N-substituted glycines, polyethers, ethoxyformacetal        oligomers, poly-thioethers, polyethylene glycols (PEG),        polyethylenes, polydisulfides, polyarylene sulfides,        polynucleotides, PNAs, LNAs, morpholinos, oligo pyrrolinone,        polyoximes, polyimines, polyethyleneimines, polyimides,        polyacetals, polyacetates, polystyrenes, polyvinyl, lipids,        phospholipids, glycolipids, polycyclic compounds comprising e.g.        aliphatic or aromatic cycles, including polyheterocyclic        compounds, proteoglycans, and polysiloxanes, and    -   iii) a linker or selectively cleavable linker separating the        functional entity from the complementing element.

The complementing element of the building block is preferably selectedfrom a nucleotide sequence, such as a sequence of from 1 to 8nucleotides, such as from 1 to 6 nucleotides, for example from 1 to 4nucleotides, such as from 1 to 3 nucleotides, such as 2 nucleotides orfor example 3 nucleotides.

The functional entity can be selected from a precursor of an amino acidselected from alfa amino acids, beta amino acids, gamma amino acids,di-substituted amino acids, poly-substituted amino acids, vinylogousamino acids, N-substituted glycin derivatives and other modified aminoacids.

The is also provided a composition of building blocks as defined herein,wherein at least two building blocks of the composition are different.

At least a subset of the plurality of building blocks preferablycomprises one complementing element and one functional entity and onelinker.

In one embodiment, each building block comprises at least one reactivegroup type I and/or at least one reactive group type II, including onereactive group type I, two reactive groups type I, one reactive grouptype II, and two reactive groups type II.

At least one of said reactive groups type II of the functional entity ispreferably selected from the group consisting of N-carboxyanhydride(NCA), N-thiocarboxyanhydride (NTA), amine, carboxylic acid, ketone,aldehyde, hydroxyl, thiol, ester, thioester, any conjugated system ofdouble bonds, hydrazine, N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, and epoxide.

In some embodiments, the reactive group type II is an electrophile, anucleophile, or a radical.

At least a subset of said plurality of building blocks comprises aselectively cleavable linker separating the functional entity from thecomplementing element, wherein said selectively cleavable linker is notcleaved under conditions resulting in cleavage of cleavable linkersseparating the functional entity from the complementing element ofbuilding blocks not belonging to the subset of building blockscomprising a selectively cleavable linker. The cleavable linkers of thebuilding blocks are cleaved without cleaving the at least oneselectively cleavable linker linking the templated molecule to thecomplementing template, or to a complementing element, or linking saidtemplated molecule to a templating element, or to the template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule.

Linkers and selectively cleavable linkers can be cleaved by e.g. acid,base, a chemical agent, light, electromagnetic radiation, an enzyme, ora catalyst, with the proviso that the cleavage of the cleavable linkerdoes result in the cleavage of the selectively cleavable linker unlessthis is desirable.

In one embodiment, the length of the linker or selectively cleavablelinker is in the range of from about 0.8 Å to about 70 Å, such as in therange of from 0.8 Å to about 60 Å, for example in the range of from 0.8Å to about 50 Å, such as in the range of from 0.8 Å to about 40 Å, forexample in the range of from 0.8 Å to about 30 Å, such as in the rangeof from 0.8 Å to about 25 Å, for example in the range of from 0.8 Å toabout 20 Å, such as in the range of from 0.8 Å to about 18 Å, forexample in the range of from 0.8 Å to about 16 Å, such as in the rangeof from 0.8 Å to about 14 Å, for example in the range of from 0.8 Å toabout 12 Å, such as in the range of from 0.8 Å to about 10 Å, forexample in the range of from 0.8 Å to about 8 Å, such as in the range offrom 0.8 Å to about 7 Å, for example in the range of from 0.8 Å to about6 Å, such as in the range of from 0.8 Å to about 5 Å, for example in therange of from 0.8 Å to about 4 Å, such as in the range of from 0.8 Å toabout 3.5 Å, for example in the range of from 0.8 Å to about 3.0 Å, suchas in the range of from 0.8 Å to about 2.5 Å, for example in the rangeof from 0.8 Å to about 2.0 Å, such as in the range of from 0.8 Å toabout 1.5 Å, for example in the range of from 0.8 Å to about 1.0 Å.

In another embodiment, the length of the linker or selectively cleavablelinker is in the range of from about 1 Å to about 60 Å, such as in therange of from 1 Å to about 40 Å, for example in the range of from 1 Å toabout 30 Å, such as in the range of from 1 Å to about 25 Å, for examplein the range of from 1 Å to about 20 Å, such as in the range of from 1 Åto about 18 Å, for example in the range of from 1 Å to about 16 Å, suchas in the range of from 1 Å to about 14 Å, for example in the range offrom 1 Å to about 12 Å, such as in the range of from 1 Å to about 10 Å,for example in the range of from 1 Å to about 8 Å, such as in the rangeof from 1 Å to about 7 Å, for example in the range of from 1 Å to about6 Å, such as in the range of from 1 Å to about 5 Å, for example in therange of from 1 Å to about 4 Å, such as in the range of from 1.0 Å toabout 3.5 Å, for example in the range of from 1.0 Å to about 3.0 Å, suchas in the range of from 1.0 Å to about 2.5 Å, for example in the rangeof from 1.0 Å to about 2.0 Å, such as in the range of from 1.0 Å toabout 1.5 Å, for example in the range of from 1.0 Å to about 1.2 Å.

In yet another embodiment, the length of the linker or selectivelycleavable linker is in the range of from about 2 Å to about 40 Å, suchas in the range of from 2 Å to about 30 Å, such as in the range of from2 Å to about 25 Å, for example in the range of from 2 Å to about 20 Å,such as in the range of from 2 Å to about 18 Å, for example in the rangeof from 2 Å to about 16 Å, such as in the range of from 2 Å to about 14Å, for example in the range of from 2 Å to about 12 Å, such as in therange of from 2 Å to about 10 Å, for example in the range of from 2 Å toabout 8 Å, such as in the range of from 2 Å to about 7 Å, for example inthe range of from 2 Å to about 6 Å, such as in the range of from 2 Å toabout 5 Å, for example in the range of from 2 Å to about 4 Å, such as inthe range of from 2.0 Å to about 3.5 Å, for example in the range of from2.0 Å to about 3.0 Å, such as in the range of from 2.0 Å to about 2.5 Å,for example in the range of from 2.0 Å to about 2.2 Å.

In a further embodiment, the length of the linker or selectivelycleavable linker is in the range of from about 4 Å to about 40 Å, suchas in the range of from 4 Å to about 30 Å, such as in the range of from4 Å to about 25 Å, for example in the range of from 4 Å to about 20 Å,such as in the range of from 4 Å to about 18 Å, for example in the rangeof from 4 Å to about 16 Å, such as in the range of from 4 Å to about 14Å, for example in the range of from 4 Å to about 12 Å, such as in therange of from 4 Å to about 10 Å, for example in the range of from 4 Å toabout 8 Å, such as in the range of from 4 Å to about 7 Å, for example inthe range of from 4 Å to about 6 Å, such as in the range of from 4 Å toabout 5 Å.

In a still further embodiment, the length of the linker or selectivelycleavable linker is in the range of from about 6 Å to about 40 Å, suchas in the range of from 6 Å to about 30 Å, such as in the range of from6 Å to about 25 Å, for example in the range of from 6 Å to about 20 Å,such as in the range of from 6 Å to about 18 Å, for example in the rangeof from 6 Å to about 16 Å, such as in the range of from 6 Å to about 14Å, for example in the range of from 6 Å to about 12 Å, such as in therange of from 6 Å to about 10 Å, for example in the range of from 6 Å toabout 8 Å, such as in the range of from 6 Å to about 7 Å.

In yet another embodiment, the length of the linker or selectivelycleavable linker is in the range of from about 8 Å to about 40 Å, suchas in the range of from 8 Å to about 30 Å, such as in the range of from8 Å to about 25 Å, for example in the range of from 8 Å to about 20 Å,such as in the range of from 8 Å to about 18 Å, for example in the rangeof from 8 Å to about 16 Å, such as in the range of from 8 Å to about 14Å, for example in the range of from 8 Å to about 12 Å, such as in therange of from 8 Å to about 10 Å.

Templated Molecules

The templated molecules can be linked—or not linked—to the templatehaving templated the synthesis of the templated molecule.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to templated moleculescomprising or essentially consisting of amino acids selected from thegroup consisting of α-amino acids, β-amino acids, γ-amino acids, ω-aminoacids.

In various preferred embodiments the templated molecule comprises oressentially consists of one or more of natural amino acid residues, ofα-amino acids, of monosubstituted α-amino acids, disubstituted α-aminoacids, monosubstituted β-amino acids, disubstituted β-amino acids, ortrisubstituted β-amino acids, tetrasubstituted β-amino acids, γ-aminoacids, ω-amino acids, vinylogous amino acids, and N-substitutedglycines.

The above-mentioned templated molecules comprising β-amino acidspreferably have a backbone structure comprising or essentiallyconsisting of a cyclohexane-backbone and/or a cyclopentane-backbone.

In other embodiments, the templated molecule comprises or essentiallyconsists of molecules or molecular entities selected from the group ofα-peptides, β-peptides, γ-peptides, ω-peptides, mono-, di- andtri-substituted α-peptides, β-peptides, γ-peptides, ω-peptides, peptideswherein the amino acid residues are in the L-form or in the D-form,vinylogous polypeptides, glycopoly-peptides, polyamides, vinylogoussulfonamide peptide, polysulfonamide, conjugated peptides comprisinge.g. prosthetic groups, polyesters, polysaccharides, polycarbamates,polycarbonates, polyureas, polypeptidylphosphonates, polyurethanes,azatides, oligo N-substituted glycines, polyethers, ethoxyformacetaloligomers, poly-thioethers, polyethylene glycols (PEG), polyethylenes,polydisulfides, polyarylene sulfides, polynucleotides, PNAs, LNAs,morpholinos, oligo pyrrolinone, polyoximes, polyimines,polyethyleneimines, polyimides, polyacetals, polyacetates, polystyrenes,polyvinyl, lipids, phospholipids, glycolipids, polycyclic compoundscomprising e.g. aliphatic or aromatic cycles, including polyheterocycliccompounds, proteoglycans, and polysiloxanes, including any combinationthereof.

Neighbouring residues of the templated molecules according to theinvention can be linked by a chemical bond selected from the group ofchemical bonds consisting of peptide bonds, sulfonamide bonds, esterbonds, saccharide bonds, carbamate bonds, carbonate bonds, urea bonds,phosphonate bonds, urethane bonds, azatide bonds, peptoid bonds, etherbonds, ethoxy bonds, thioether bonds, single carbon bonds, double carbonbonds, triple carbon bonds, disulfide bonds, sulfide bonds,phosphodiester bonds, oxime bonds, imine bonds, imide bonds, includingany combination thereof.

Also, the backbone structure of the templated molecules according to theinvention can in one aspect comprise or essentially consist of amolecular group selected from —NHN(R)CO—; —NHB(R)CO—; —NHC(RR′)CO—;—NHC(═CHR)CO—; —NHC₆H₄CO—; —NHCH₂CHRCO—; —NHCHRCH₂CO—; —COCH₂—; —COS—;—CONR—; —COO—; —CSNH—; —CH₂ NH—; —CH₂CH₂—; —CH₂ S—; —CH₂ SO—; —CH₂SO₂—;—CH(CH₃)S—; —CH═CH—; —NHCO—; —NHCONH—; —CONHO—; —C(═CH₂)CH₂—; —PO₂ ⁻NH—;—PO₂ ⁻CH₂—; —PO₂ ⁻CH₂N⁺—; —SO₂NH⁻—; and lactams, including anycombination thereof.

In other embodiments of the invention, the templated molecules are notof polymeric nature.

The precursor is in one embodiment preferably selected from the group ofprecursors consisting of α-amino acid precursors, β-amino acidprecursors, γ-amino acid precursors, and ω-amino acid precursors.

In some embodiment, the templated molecule is an oligomer or a polymercomprising at least one repetitive sequence of functional groups, suchas at least three functional groups repeated at least twice in thetemplated molecule. The templated molecules also includes moleculeswherein any sequence of at least three functional groups occurs onlyonce.

Some preferred templated molecules preferably comprise or essentiallyconsist of at least 2 different functional groups, such as at least 3different functional groups, for example at least 4 different functionalgroups, such as at least 5 different functional groups, for example atleast 6 different functional groups, such as at least 7 differentfunctional groups, for example at least 8 different functional groups,such as at least 9 different functional groups, for example at least 10different functional groups, such as more than 10 different functionalgroups. The functional groups can also be identical.

In one preferred aspect of the invention there is provided a templatedmolecule comprising a polymer comprising a plurality of covalentlylinked functional groups each comprising at least one residue, whereinthe plurality of residues is preferably from 2 to 200, for example from2 to 100, such as from 2 to 80, for example from 2 to 60, such as from 2to 40, for example from 2 to 30, such as from 2 to 20, for example from2 to 15, such as from 2 to 10, such as from 2 to 8, for example from 2to 6, such as from 2 to 4, for example 2, such as from 3 to 100, forexample from 3 to 80, such as from 3 to 60, such as from 3 to 40, forexample from 3 to 30, such as from 3 to 20, such as from 3 to 15, forexample from 3 to 15, such as from 3 to 10, such as from 3 to 8, forexample from 3 to 6, such as from 3 to 4, for example 3, such as from 4to 100, for example from 4 to 80, such as from 4 to 60, such as from 4to 40, for example from 4 to 30, such as from 4 to 20, such as from 4 to15, for example from 4 to 10, such as from 4 to 8, such as from 4 to 6,for example 4, for example from 5 to 100, such as from 5 to 80, forexample from 5 to 60, such as from 5 to 40, for example from 5 to 30,such as from 5 to 20, for example from 5 to 15, such as from 5 to 10,such as from 5 to 8, for example from 5 to 6, for example 5, such asfrom 6 to 100, for example from 6 to 80, such as from 6 to 60, such asfrom 6 to 40, for example from 6 to 30, such as from 6 to 20, such asfrom 6 to 15, for example from 6 to 10, such as from 6 to 8, such as 6,for example from 7 to 100, such as from 7 to 80, for example from 7 to60, such as from 7 to 40, for example from 7 to 30, such as from 7 to20, for example from 7 to 15, such as from 7 to 10, such as from 7 to 8,for example 7, for example from 8 to 100, such as from 8 to 80, forexample from 8 to 60, such as from 8 to 40, for example from 8 to 30,such as from 8 to 20, for example from 8 to 15, such as from 8 to 10,such as 8, for example 9, for example from 10 to 100, such as from 10 to80, for example from 10 to 60, such as from 10 to 40, for example from10 to 30, such as from 10 to 20, for example from 10 to 15, such as from10 to 12, such as 10, for example from 12 to 100, such as from 12 to 80,for example from 12 to 60, such as from 12 to 40, for example from 12 to30, such as from 12 to 20, for example from 12 to 15, such as from 14 to100, such as from 14 to 80, for example from 14 to 60, such as from 14to 40, for example from 14 to 30, such as from 14 to 20, for examplefrom 14 to 16, such as from 16 to 100, such as from 16 to 80, forexample from 16 to 60, such as from 16 to 40, for example from 16 to 30,such as from 16 to 20, such as from 18 to 100, such as from 18 to 80,for example from 18 to 60, such as from 18 to 40, for example from 18 to30, such as from 18 to 20, for example from 20 to 100, such as from 20to 80, for example from 20 to 60, such as from 20 to 40, for examplefrom 20 to 30, such as from 20 to 25, for example from 22 to 100, suchas from 22 to 80, for example from 22 to 60, such as from 22 to 40, forexample from 22 to 30, such as from 22 to 25, for example from 25 to100, such as from 25 to 80, for example from 25 to 60, such as from 25to 40, for example from 25 to 30, such as from 30 to 100, for examplefrom 30 to 80, such as from 30 to 60, for example from 30 to 40, such asfrom 30 to 35, for example from 35 to 100, such as from 35 to 80, forexample from 35 to 60, such as from 35 to 40, for example from 40 to100, such as from 40 to 80, for example from 40 to 60, such as from 40to 50, for example from 40 to 45, such as from 45 to 100, for examplefrom 45 to 80, such as from 45 to 60, for example from 45 to 50, such asfrom 50 to 100, for example from 50 to 80, such as from 50 to 60, forexample from 50 to 55, such as from 60 to 100, for example from 60 to80, such as from 60 to 70, for example from 70 to 100, such as from 70to 90, for example from 70 to 80, such as from 80 to 100, for examplefrom 80 to 90, such as from 90 to 100.

In another preferred aspect of the invention there is provided atemplated molecule comprising a polymer comprising a plurality ofcovalently linked functional groups each comprising a residue, whereinthe covalently linked residues are capable of generating a polymercomprising, exclusively or in combination with additional portions, atleast one portion selected from the group of polymer portions consistingof α-peptides, β-peptides, γ-peptides, ω-peptides, mono-, di- andtri-substituted α-peptides, β-peptides, γ-peptides, ω-peptides, peptideswherein the amino acid residues are in the L-form or in the D-form,vinylogous polypeptides, glycopoly-peptides, polyamides, vinylogoussulfonamide peptides, polysulfonamides, conjugated peptides comprisinge.g. prosthetic groups, polyesters, polysaccharides, polycarbamates,polycarbonates, polyureas, polypeptidylphosphonates, polyurethanes,azatides, oligo N-substituted glycines, polyethers, ethoxyformacetaloligomers, poly-thioethers, polyethylene glycols (PEG), polyethylenes,polydisulfides, polyarylene sulfides, polynucleotides, PNAs, LNAs,morpholinos, oligo pyrrolinones, polyoximes, polyimines,polyethyleneimines, polyimides, polyacetals, polyacetates, polystyrenes,polyvinyl, lipids, phospholipids, glycolipids, polycyclic compoundscomprising e.g. aliphatic or aromatic cycles, including polyheterocycliccompounds, proteoglycans, and polysiloxanes, and wherein the pluralityof residues is preferably from 2 to 200, for example from 2 to 100, suchas from 2 to 80, for example from 2 to 60, such as from 2 to 40, forexample from 2 to 30, such as from 2 to 20, for example from 2 to 15,such as from 2 to 10, such as from 2 to 8, for example from 2 to 6, suchas from 2 to 4, for example 2, such as from 3 to 100, for example from 3to 80, such as from 3 to 60, such as from 3 to 40, for example from 3 to30, such as from 3 to 20, such as from 3 to 15, for example from 3 to15, such as from 3 to 10, such as from 3 to 8, for example from 3 to 6,such as from 3 to 4, for example 3, such as from 4 to 100, for examplefrom 4 to 80, such as from 4 to 60, such as from 4 to 40, for examplefrom 4 to 30, such as from 4 to 20, such as from 4 to 15, for examplefrom 4 to 10, such as from 4 to 8, such as from 4 to 6, for example 4,for example from 5 to 100, such as from 5 to 80, for example from 5 to60, such as from 5 to 40, for example from 5 to 30, such as from 5 to20, for example from 5 to 15, such as from 5 to 10, such as from 5 to 8,for example from 5 to 6, for example 5, such as from 6 to 100, forexample from 6 to 80, such as from 6 to 60, such as from 6 to 40, forexample from 6 to 30, such as from 6 to 20, such as from 6 to 15, forexample from 6 to 10, such as from 6 to 8, such as 6, for example from 7to 100, such as from 7 to 80, for example from 7 to 60, such as from 7to 40, for example from 7 to 30, such as from 7 to 20, for example from7 to 15, such as from 7 to 10, such as from 7 to 8, for example 7, forexample from 8 to 100, such as from 8 to 80, for example from 8 to 60,such as from 8 to 40, for example from 8 to 30, such as from 8 to 20,for example from 8 to 15, such as from 8 to 10, such as 8, for example9, for example from 10 to 100, such as from 10 to 80, for example from10 to 60, such as from 10 to 40, for example from 10 to 30, such as from10 to 20, for example from 10 to 15, such as from 10 to 12, such as 10,for example from 12 to 100, such as from 12 to 80, for example from 12to 60, such as from 12 to 40, for example from 12 to 30, such as from 12to 20, for example from 12 to 15, such as from 14 to 100, such as from14 to 80, for example from 14 to 60, such as from 14 to 40, for examplefrom 14 to 30, such as from 14 to 20, for example from 14 to 16, such asfrom 16 to 100, such as from 16 to 80, for example from 16 to 60, suchas from 16 to 40, for example from 16 to 30, such as from 16 to 20, suchas from 18 to 100, such as from 18 to 80, for example from 18 to 60,such as from 18 to 40, for example from 18 to 30, such as from 18 to 20,for example from 20 to 100, such as from 20 to 80, for example from 20to 60, such as from 20 to 40, for example from 20 to 30, such as from 20to 25, for example from 22 to 100, such as from 22 to 80, for examplefrom 22 to 60, such as from 22 to 40, for example from 22 to 30, such asfrom 22 to 25, for example from 25 to 100, such as from 25 to 80, forexample from 25 to 60, such as from 25 to 40, for example from 25 to 30,such as from 30 to 100, for example from 30 to 80, such as from 30 to60, for example from 30 to 40, such as from 30 to 35, for example from35 to 100, such as from 35 to 80, for example from 35 to 60, such asfrom 35 to 40, for example from 40 to 100, such as from 40 to 80, forexample from 40 to 60, such as from 40 to 50, for example from 40 to 45,such as from 45 to 100, for example from 45 to 80, such as from 45 to60, for example from 45 to 50, such as from 50 to 100, for example from50 to 80, such as from 50 to 60, for example from 50 to 55, such as from60 to 100, for example from 60 to 80, such as from 60 to 70, for examplefrom 70 to 100, such as from 70 to 90, for example from 70 to 80, suchas from 80 to 100, for example from 80 to 90, such as from 90 to 100.

The templated molecule in one embodiment is preferably one, wherein thecovalently linked residues are capable of generating a polymercomprising, exclusively or in combination with additional portionsselected from the group, at least one portion selected from the group ofpolymer portions consisting of α-peptides, β-peptides, γ-peptides,ω-peptides, mono-, di- and tri-substituted α-peptides, β-peptides,γ-peptides, ω-peptides, peptides wherein the amino acid residues are inthe L-form or in the D-form, and vinylogous polypeptides.

In one particular embodiment, the templated molecule is one wherein thecovalently linked residues are capable of generating a polysaccharaide.

In another aspect there is provided a templated molecule comprising asequence of functional groups, wherein neighbouring functional groupsare linked by a molecular moiety that is not natively associated withsaid functional groups.

Additional aspect of the present invention relates to i) a templatedmolecule comprising a sequence of covalently linked, functional groups,wherein the templated molecule does not comprise or consist of anα-peptide or a nucleotide, ii) a templated molecule comprising asequence of covalently linked, functional groups, wherein the templatedmolecule does not comprise or consist of a monosubstituted α-peptide ora nucleotide, and iii) a templated molecule comprising a sequence ofcovalently linked, functional groups, wherein the templated moleculedoes not comprise or consist of a peptide or a nucleotide.

Compositions of Templated Molecules

The templated molecules according to the invention, including thosementioned herein immediately above, can be present in a composition oftemplated molecules, wherein said composition comprises a plurality ofmore than or about 10³ different templated molecules, such as more thanor about 10⁴ different templated molecules, for example more than orabout 10⁵ different templated molecules, such as more than or about 10⁶different templated molecules, for example more than or about 10⁷different templated molecules, such as more than or about 10⁸ differenttemplated molecules, for example more than or about 10⁹ differenttemplated molecules, such as more than or about 10¹⁰ different templatedmolecules, for example more than or about 10¹¹ different templatedmolecules, such as more than or about 10¹² different templatedmolecules, for example more than or about 10¹³ different templatedmolecules, such as more than or about 10¹⁴ different templatedmolecules, for example more than or about 10¹⁵ different templatedmolecules, such as more than or about 10¹⁶ different templatedmolecules, for example more than or about 10¹⁷ different templatedmolecules, such as more than or about 10¹⁸ different templatedmolecules.

The composition in some embodiments preferably further comprises thetemplate capable of templating each templated molecule, or a subsetthereof. Accordingly, in one preferred aspect of the present invention,there is provided i) a composition comprising a templated molecule andthe template capable of templating the templated molecule, or ii) acomposition comprising a templated molecule and the template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule.

Various preferred features of the templated molecules either i) linkedto the template capable of templating the synthesis of the templatedmolecule, or ii) present in a composition further comprising thetemplate capable of templating the synthesis of the templated moleculeis listed herein immediately below.

When being present in such compositions, it is preferred that i) thetemplate does not consist exclusively of natural nucleotides, when thetemplated molecule is a peptide comprising exclusively monosubstitutedα-amino acids, ii) the template is not a natural nucleotide, when thetemplated molecule is a natural α-peptide, iii) the template is not anucleotide, when the templated molecule is a natural α-peptide, iv) thetemplate is not a nucleotide, when the templated molecule is amonosubstituted α-peptide, v) the template is not a nucleotide, when thetemplated molecule is an α-peptide, vi) the template is not a naturalnucleotide, when the templated molecule is a peptide, and vii) thetemplate is not a nucleotide, when the templated molecule is a peptide.

Templated Molecules Linked to the Template that Templated the Synthesisof the Templated Molecule

In one preferred aspect of the present invention there is provided atemplated molecule comprising a sequence of covalently linked,functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is linked by means ofa linker to the complementing template or template that templated thesynthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the templated molecule doesnot comprise or consist of an α-peptide

In another preferred aspect of the present invention there is provided atemplated molecule comprising a sequence of covalently linked,functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is linked by means ofa linker to the complementing template or template that templated thesynthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the templated molecule doesnot comprise a monosubstituted α-peptide.

In yet another preferred aspect of the present invention there isprovided a templated molecule comprising a sequence of covalentlylinked, functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is linked bymeans of a linker to the complementing template or template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the templatedmolecule does not comprise or consist of an α-peptide or a nucleotide.

In a still further aspect of the present invention there is provided atemplated molecule comprising a sequence of covalently linked,functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is linked by means ofa linker to the complementing template or template that templated thesynthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the template is not anatural nucleotide, when the templated molecule is an α-peptide.

In a still further preferred aspect of the present invention there isprovided a templated molecule comprising a sequence of covalentlylinked, functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is linked bymeans of a linker to the complementing template or template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the templatedoes not consist exclusively of natural nucleotides, when the templatedmolecule is a peptide comprising exclusively monosubstituted α-aminoacids.

In a still further preferred aspect of the present invention there isprovided a templated molecule comprising a sequence of covalentlylinked, functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is linked bymeans of a linker to the complementing template or template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the templateis not a natural nucleotide, when the templated molecule is a naturalα-peptide.

In an even further preferred aspect of the present invention there isprovided a templated molecule comprising a sequence of covalentlylinked, functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is linked bymeans of a linker to the complementing template or template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the templateis not a nucleotide, when the templated molecule is a natural α-peptide.

In a still further preferred aspect of the present invention there isprovided a templated molecule comprising a sequence of covalentlylinked, functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is linked bymeans of a linker to the complementing template or template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the templateis not a nucleotide, when the templated molecule is a monosubstitutedα-peptide.

In a still further preferred aspect of the present invention there isprovided a templated molecule comprising a sequence of covalentlylinked, functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is linked bymeans of a linker to the complementing template or template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the templateis not a nucleotide, when the templated molecule is an α-peptide.

In a still further preferred aspect of the present invention there isprovided a templated molecule comprising a sequence of covalentlylinked, functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is linked bymeans of a linker to the complementing template or template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the templateis not a natural nucleotide, when the templated molecule is a peptide.

In a still further preferred aspect of the present invention there isprovided a templated molecule comprising a sequence of covalentlylinked, functional groups, wherein the templated molecule is linked bymeans of a linker to the complementing template or template thattemplated the synthesis of the templated molecule, wherein the templateis not a nucleotide, when the templated molecule is a peptide.

The templated molecule can be obtained according to the methodsdescribed herein above.

In even further aspects there is provided

-   i) a templated molecule comprising a sequence of covalently linked    building blocks;-   ii) a templated molecule comprising a sequence of covalently linked    building blocks, wherein the sequence of covalently linked building    blocks comprises a sequence of complementing elements forming a    complementing template capable of complementing the template that    templated the synthesis of the templated molecule, and wherein the    templated molecule is linked to the complementing template or    template that templated its synthesis; and-   iii) a templated molecule according to any of the previous claims,    wherein the templated molecule comprises a sequence of functional    entities comprising at least one functional group, and optionally at    least one reactive group type II, and wherein each functional entity    is linked to a complementing element or a template that templated    the synthesis of the templated molecule.

Uses of Templated Molecules

The templated molecules according to the present invention can be usedfor a variety of commercial purposes.

In one aspect, there is provided a method for screening templatedmolecules potentially having a predetermined activity, said methodcomprising the step of providing a target molecule or a target entity,including a surface, and obtaining templated molecules having anaffinity for—or an effect on—said target molecule or target entity.

Another aspect relates to a method for assaying an activity potentiallyassociated with a templated molecules, said method comprising the stepof providing a target molecule or a target entity, including a surface,and obtaining templated molecules having an affinity for—or an effecton—said target molecule or target entity, and determining the activityof the templated molecule.

Yet another aspect provides a method for selecting complexes ortemplated molecules having a predetermined activity, said methodcomprising the step of performing a selection procedure and selectingtemplated molecules based on predetermined selection criteria.

There is also provided a method for screening a composition of moleculeshaving a predetermined activity comprising:

-   -   i) establishing a first composition of templated molecules as        described herein, or produced as defined herein by any method        for preparing templated molecules,    -   ii) exposing the first composition to conditions enriching said        first composition with templated molecules having the        predetermined activity, and    -   iii) optionally amplifying the templated molecules of the        enriched composition obtaining a second composition,    -   iv) further optionally repeating step ii) to iii), and    -   v) obtaining a further composition having a higher ratio of        templated molecules having the specific predetermined activity.

In one embodiment, the method further comprises a step of mutating thetemplated molecules, wherein said mutagenesis can take place prior tocarrying out step iii), simultaneously with carrying out step iii), orafter carrying out step iii). The mutagenesis can be carried out asrandom or site-directed mutagenesis.

Step iii) of the method preferably comprises a 10¹ to 10¹⁵-foldamplification, and steps ii) and iii) can be repeated, such as at least2 times, 3 times, 5 times, or at least 10 times, such as at least 15times.

The method can comprise a further step of identifying the templatedmolecule having the predetermined activity, and said identification canbe conducted e.g. by analysing the template and/or complementarytemplate physically or by other means associated with the molecule.

The conditions enriching the first composition can comprise the furtherproviding a binding partner to said templated molecule having thepredetermined activity, wherein said binding partner is directly orindirectly immobilised on a support.

The conditions enriching the composition can involve any state of theart method, including any one or more of electrophoretic separation,gelfiltration, immunoprecipitation, isoelectric focusing,centrifugation, and immobilization. The conditions enriching thecomposition can also comprise the further step of providing cellscapable of internalising the templated molecule, or performing anyinteraction with the templated molecule having the predeterminedactivity.

The predetermined activity of the templated molecule is preferably anenzymatic activity or a catalytic activity.

In another aspect there is provided a method for amplifying thecomplementing template or the template that templated the synthesis ofthe templated molecule having, or potentially having a predeterminedactivity, said method comprising the step of contacting the templatewith amplification means, and amplifying the template. The method foramplifying the complementing template or the template that templated thesynthesis of the templated molecule having, or potentially having, apredetermined activity, preferably comprises the steps of i) contactingthe template with amplification means, and amplifying the template, andii) obtaining the templated molecule in an at least two-fold increasedamount.

In another aspect there is provided a method for altering the sequenceof a templated molecule, including generating a templated moleculecomprising a novel or altered sequence of functional groups, whereinsaid method preferably comprises the steps of

-   -   i) providing a first complementing template or a first template        capable of templating the first templated molecule, or a        plurality of such first complementing templates or first        templates capable of templating a plurality of first templated        molecules,    -   ii) mutating or modifying the sequence of the first        complementing template or the first template, or the plurality        of first complementing templates or first templates, and        generating a second template or a second complementing template,        or a plurality of second templates or second complementing        templates,        -   wherein said second template(s) or complementing template(s)            is capable of templating the synthesis of a second templated            molecule, or a plurality of second templated molecules,        -   wherein said second templated molecule(s) comprises a            sequence of covalently linked, functional groups that is not            identical to the sequence of functional groups of the first            templated molecule(s), and optionally    -   iii) templating by means of said second template(s) or        complementing template(s) a second templated molecule, or a        plurality of such second templated molecules.

In yet another aspect there is provided a method for altering thesequence of a templated molecule, including generating a templatedmolecule comprising a novel or altered sequence of functional groups,wherein said method preferably comprises the steps of

-   -   i) providing a plurality of first complementing templates or        first templates capable of templating a plurality of first        templated molecules,    -   ii) recombining the sequences of the plurality of first        complementing templates or first templates, and generating a        second template or a second complementing template, or a        plurality of second templates or second complementing templates,        -   wherein said second template(s) or complementing template(s)            is capable of templating the synthesis of a second templated            molecule, or a plurality of second templated molecules,        -   wherein said second templated molecule(s) comprises a            sequence of covalently linked, functional groups that is not            identical to the sequence of functional groups of the first            templated molecule(s), and optionally    -   iii) templating by means of said second template(s) or        complementing template(s) a second templated molecule, or a        plurality of such second templated molecules.

The methods can preferably comprise the further step of amplifying thecomplementing template or the template that templated the synthesis ofthe templated molecule, wherein said amplification step taking placeprior to, simultaneously with, or after the step of mutagenesis orrecombination.

When mutagenesis is used, it can be used as either site-directedmutagenesis, cassette mutagenesis, chemical mutagenesis, uniquesite-elimination (USE), error-prone PCR, error-prone DNA shuffling.Mutagenesis preferably involves DNA shuffling and/or any form ofrecombination including homologous recombination either in vivo or invitro.

Variants and Functional Equivalents of Templated Molecules

The present invention is also directed to any variant and functionalequivalent of a templated molecule. The variants and functionalequivalents may be obtained by any state-of-the-art-method for modifyingtemplated molecules in the form of polymers, including peptides.

In the context of the templated molecules of the present invention,molecules are said to be homologous if they contain similar backbonestructures and/or similar functional groups. Functional groups, ormolecular entities of functional groups, are divided into three homologygroups: The charged functional groups, the hydrophobic groups, and thehydrophilic groups. When a functional group includes two or threemolecular entities belonging to different homology groups, thefunctional group is said to belong to the two or three differenthomology groups.

Homology is measured in percent (%). As an example, the sequencesAABBCACAAA and BBAACACBBB (where A, B and C denotes a functional groupbelonging to homology group A, B, and C, respectively) are 30 percenthomologous.

EXAMPLES Example 1 to 7 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block(I)

Building block I may be prepared according to the general scheme shownbelow:

Example 1 Preparation of 3-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-propionic acid(N-Boc-β-alanine) (1a)

To a solution of β-alanine (2.25 g, 25 mmol) in aq. NaHCO₃ (25 mL) wereadded di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (4.36 g, 20 mmol) and acetonitrile (25mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h.

EtOAc (100 mL) was added and pH was adjusted to 4-5 by addition ofNaH₂PO₄. The product was extracted into EtOAc (3×50 mL), dried (Na₂SO₄),and evaporated to dryness under vacuum to afford 3.71 g (98%)

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 11 (1H, br s, COOH), 5.07 (1H, br s, NH), 3.40 (2H, m),2.58 (2H, m), 1.44 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu).

Example 2 Preparation of N-Boc-β-alanine propargyl ester (1b)

N-Boc-β-alanine (1.91 g, 10.1 mmol) and propargyl alcohol (0.675 g, 12mmol) were dissolved in EtOAc (25 mL). Dicyclohexyl-carbodiimide (DCC,2.06 g, 10 mmol) was added to the solution and after 16 h of stirring atroom temperature, the reaction mixture was filtered and evaporated todryness under vacuum. Crude product yield

Example 3 Preparation of 5-Iodo-2′-deoxyuridine3′,5′-Di-tert-butyldimethylsilyl Ether (1c)

5-Iodo-2′-deoxyuridine (Aldrich, 2.39 g, 6.7 mmol) and imidazole (2.025g, 29.7 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (10 mL). A solution oftert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (2.24 g, 14.9 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (5mL) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred for 16 h at roomtemperature.

The reaction mixture was poured into EtOAc (400 mL), washed with NH₄Cl(50% sat. aq, 80 mL) followed by water (80 mL). After drying withNa₂SO₄, EtOAc was removed under reduced pressure to leave a colourlessoil that solidified on standing. Recrystallization in n-hexane (14 mL)afforded 2.64 g, 80%.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 8.18 (1H, br s, NH); 8.10 (1H, 5); 6.23 (1H, dd); 4.40(1H, dt); 4.05 (1H, dd); 3.92 (1H, dd); 3.78 (1H, dd); 2.32 (1H, ddd);2.05 (1H, ddd); 0.95 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu); 0.90 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu); 0.15 (3H, s,CH₃); 0.13 (3H, s, CH₃); 0.08 (3H, s, CH₃); 0.07 (3H, s, CH₃).

Example 4 Preparation of Compound (1d)

A solution of iodo silyl ether (1c) (1.62 g, 2.7 mmol), N-Boc-β-alanine(1a) (2.03 g, 8.9 mmol) and triethylamine (0.585 g, 5.8 mmol) in 10 mLdry DMF were stirred at room temperature. N₂ was passed through thesolution for 20 min.

Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (269 mg, 0.2 mmol) andcopper(I) iodide (90 mg, 0.4 mmol) were added and the reaction mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 32 h.

EtOAc (100 mL) was poured into the reaction mixture, followed by washing(aq NaHCO₃ (50 mL); brine (50 mL)), drying (Na₂SO₄), and removal ofsolvent by vacuum evaporation.

The crude product (2.4 g) was purified by silica column chromatographyeluting with EtOAc:Heptane gradient (1:2)-(5:3) (v/v). Product yield1.15 g, 60%.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 8.45 (1H, s), 8.05 (1H, s, 6-H), 7.35 (1H, bs, NH),6.25 (1H, dd, 1′-H), 4.82 (2H, s, CH₂O), 4.39 (1H, m, 3′-H), 3.97 (1H,m, 4′-H), 3.80 (2H, dd, 5′,5″-H), 3.40 (2H, m, CH₂N), 2.58 (2H, t, CH₂),2.2 (1H, m, 2′-H), 2.0 (1H, m, 2″-H), 1.45 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu), 0.93 (9H, s,^(t)Bu), 0.89 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu), 0.15 (3H, s, CH₃), 0.13 (3H, s, CH₃),0.08 (3H, s, CH₃), 0.07 (3H, s, CH₃).

Example 5 Preparation of Compound (1e)

A solution of N-Boc-β-alanine silyl ether (1d) (100 mg, 0.15 mmol),glacial acetic acid (75 mg, 1.25 mmol) and tetrabutylammonium fluoridetrihydrate (TBAF) (189 mg, 0.6 mmol) in 2 mL dry THF was stirred at roomtemperature for 3 d.

The reaction mixture was evaporated and purified by silica columnchromatography eluting with dichloromethane (DCM):methanol (MeOH)gradient (95:5)-(88:12) (v/v). Product yield 26 mg, 38%.

¹H NMR (CD₃OD) δ 8.35 (1H, s, 6-H), 6.15 (1H, t, 1′-H), 4.80 (2H, s,CH₂O), 4.32 (1H, dt, 3′-H), 3.86 (1H, q, 4′-H), 3.70 (2H, dd, 5′,5″-H),3.24 (2H, m, CH₂N), 2.47 (2H, t, CH₂), 2.28-2.10 (1H, m, 2′,2″-H), 1.44(9H, s, ^(t)Bu).

Example 6 Preparation of Compound (1f)

N-Boc-β-alanine nucleoside (1e) (26 mg, 57 μmol) was dissolved in 200 μLdry trimethylphosphate. After cooling to 0° C., a solution of phosphorusoxychloride (POCl₃) in dry trimethylphosphate was added (100 μL stocksolution (104 mg/mL), 68 μmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C. for 2 h.

Subsequently a solution of tributylammonium pyrophosphate (Sigma P-8533)(67.8 mg, 143 μmol in 300 μL dry DMF) and tributylamine (26.9 mg, 145μmol in 150 μL dry DMF) was added at 0° C. The reaction was stirred atroom temperature for 3 min. and then stopped by addition of 1 mL 1.0 Mtriethylammonium hydrogencarbonate.

Example 7 Preparation of Compound I

Removal of N-Boc Protection Group.

Following phosphorylation, 50 μl of the phosphorylation reaction mixtureis adjusted to pH=1 using HCl and incubated at room temperature for 30minutes. The mixture is adjusted to pH 5.5 using equimolar NaOH andNa-acetate (pH 5.5) before purification on TLC.

Purification of Nucleotide Derivatives Using Thin-Layer Chromatography(TLC)

From the crude mixture, 20 samples of 2 μl were spotted on kieselgel 60F₂₅₄ TLC (Merck). Organic solvents and non-phosphorylated nucleosideswere separated from the nucleotides derivatives using 100% methanol asrunning solution. Subsequently, the TLC plate is air-dried and thenucleotide-derivative identified by UV-shadowing. Kiesel containing thenucleotide-derivative was isolated and extracted twice using 10 mMNa-acetate (pH=5.5) as solvent. Kieselgel was removed by centrifugationand the supernatant was dried in vacuo. The nucleotide derivative wasresuspended in 50-100 μl H₂O to a final concentration of 1-3 mM. Theconcentration of each nucleotide derivative was evaluated byUV-absorption prior to use in polymerase extension reactions.

Examples 8 to 13 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block (II)

Building block II may be prepared according to the general scheme shownbelow:

Example 8 Preparation of N-Boc-3-phenyl-β-alanine (2a)

To a solution of 3-amino-3-phenylpropionic acid (3.30 g, 20 mmol) inNaHCO₃ (50% sat. aq, 25 mL) were added di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (4.36g, 20 mmol) and acetonitrile (30 mL). The reaction mixture was stirredat room temperature for 18 h. Di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (4.36 g, 20mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperaturefor 18 h.

EtOAc (100 mL) was added and pH was adjusted to 4-5 by addition ofNaH₂PO₄. The product was extracted into EtOAc (3×100 mL), dried(Na₂SO₄), and evaporated to dryness under vacuum to afford crude product5.6 g (105%)

Example 9 Preparation of 5-(3-Hydroxypropyn-1-yl)-2′-deoxyuridine3′,5′-Di-tert-butyldimethylsilyl Ether (2b)

A solution of iodo silyl ether (3) (1.30 g, 2.2 mmol), propargyl alcohol(0.386 g, 6.9 mmol) and triethylamine (0.438 g, 4.3 mmol) in 7 mL dryDMF was deaeraed with N₂. Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (228mg, 0.2 mmol) and copper(I) iodide (120 mg, 0.4 mmol) were added and thereaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 32 h.

EtOAc (100 mL) was poured into the reaction mixture, followed by washing(aq NaHCO₃ (50 mL); brine (50 mL)), drying (Na₂SO₄), and removal ofsolvent by vacuum evaporation.

The crude product (1.73 g) was purified by silica column chromatographyeluting with EtOAc:Heptane gradient (2:3)-(3:2) (v/v). Product yield0.713 g, 63%.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 8.47 (1H, s), 8.05 (1H, s, 6-H), 6.29 (1H, dd, 1′-H),4.42 (2H, s, CH₂), 4.39 (1H, m, 3′-H), 3.98 (1H, m, 4′-H), 3.83 (2H, dd,5′,5″-H), 2.32 (1H, m, 2′-H), 2.02 (1H, m, 2″-H), 0.93 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu),0.89 (9H, s, tu), 0.15 (3H, s, CH₃), 0.13 (3H, s, CH₃), 0.08 (3H, s,CH₃), 0.07 (3H, s, CH₃).

Example 10 Preparation of Compound (2c)

N-Boc-3-phenyl-β-alanine (8)(265 mg, 1.0 mmol) and compound (2b) (255mg, 0.5 mmol) were dissolved in THF (15 mL). Diisopropyl-carbodiimide(DIC, 126 mg, 1 mmol) and 4-dimethylaminopyridin (DMAP, 10 mg) wereadded to the solution, and after 16 h of stirring at room temperaturethe reaction mixture was poured into EtOAc (100 mL), washed with NaHCO₃(50% sat. aq, 50 mL), dried (Na₂SO₄), filtered and evaporated undervacuum.

The crude product was purified by silica column chromatography elutingwith EtOAc:Heptane gradient (1:2)-(2:3) (v/v). Product yield 335 mg,88%.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 8.49 (1H, s), 8.04 (1H, s, 6-H), 7.29 (5H, m, Ph), 6.27(1H, dd, 1′-H), 5.5 (1H, bd), 5.09 (1H, m), 4.80 (2H, s, CH₂), 4.39 (1H,m, 3′-H), 3.98 (1H, m, 4′-H), 3.82 (2H, dd, 5′,5″-H), 2.87 (2H, d), 2.29(1H, m, 2′-H), 2.01 (1H, m, 2″-H), 1.41 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu), 0.91 (9H, s,^(t)Bu), 0.89 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu), 0.15 (3H, s, CH₃), 0.13 (3H, s, CH₃),0.08 (3H, s, CH₃), 0.07 (3H, s, CH₃).

Example 11 Preparation of Compound 2d

A solution of compound (2c) (334 mg, 440 μmol), glacial acetic acid (190mg, 3.15 mmol) and tetrabutylammonium fluoride trihydrate (TBAF) (500mg, 1.58 mmol) in 6 mL dry THF was stirred at room temperature for 18 h.

The reaction mixture was evaporated and purified by silica columnchromatography eluting with (DCM):(MeOH) gradient (95:5)-(9:1) (v/v).Product yield 122 mg, 52%.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 10.1 (1H, s), 8.24 (1H, s, 6-H), 7.3 (5H, m, Ph), 6.37(1H, dd, 1′-H), 5.6 (1H, bs), 5.09 (1H, m), 4.79 (2H, s, CH₂), 4.52 (1H,m, 3′-H), 4.0 (1H, m, 4′-H), 3.85 (2H, dd, 5′,5″-H), 2.87 (2H, d), 2.4(1H, m, 2′-H), 2.25 (1H, m, 2″-H), 1.4 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu).

Example 12 Preparation of Compound (2e)

Compound (2d) (122 mg, 230 μmol) was dissolved in 400 μL drytrimethylphosphate. After cooling to 0° C., a solution of phosphorusoxychloride (POCl₃) in dry trimethylphosphate was added (400 μL stocksolution (105 mg/mL), 276 μmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C. for 2 h.

Subsequently a solution of tributylammonium pyrophosphate (273 mg, 576μmol in 1.2 mL dry DMF) and tributylamine (109 mg, 587 μmol in 600 μLdry DMF) was added at 0° C. The reaction was stirred at room temperaturefor 10 min. and then stopped by addition of 1.0 M triethylammoniumhydrogencarbonate (1 mL).

Example 13 Preparation of Compound II

Removal of N-Boc Protection Group.

Following phosphorylation, 50 μl of the phosphorylation reaction mixtureis adjusted to pH=1 using HCl and incubated at room temperature for 30minutes. The mixture is adjusted to pH 5.5 using equimolar NaOH andNa-acetate (pH 5.5) before purification on TLC.

Purification of Nucleotide Derivatives Using Thin-Layer Chromatography(TLC)

From the crude mixture, 20 samples of 2 μl were spotted on kieselgel 60F₂₅₄ TLC (Merck). Organic solvents and non-phosphorylated nucleosideswere separated from the nucleotides derivatives using 100% methanol asrunning solution. Subsequently, the TLC plate is air-dried and thenucleotide-derivative identified by UV-shadowing. Kiesel containing thenucleotide-derivative was isolated and extracted twice using 10 mMNa-acetate (pH=5.5) as solvent. Kieselgel was removed by centrifugationand the supernatant was dried in vacuo. The nucleotide derivative wasresuspended in 50-100 μl H₂O to a final concentration of 1-3 mM. Theconcentration of each nucleotide derivative was evaluated byUV-absorption prior to use in polymerase extension reactions.

Examples 14 to 18 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block (III)

Building block III may be prepared according to the general scheme shownbelow:

Example 14 Preparation of N-Boc-β-alanine propargyl amide (3a)

N-Boc-β-alanine (1a) (1.05 g, 5.5 mmol) and propargyl amine (0.90 g,16.5 mmol) were dissolved in THF (10 mL). Diisopropyl-carbodiimide (DIC,695 g, 5.5 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 16 hat room temperature. Water was added (20 mL) and the product wasextracted into EtOAc (3×30 mL). The combined EtOAc was dried (Na₂SO₄)and evaporated. The crude product was purified by silica columnchromatography eluting with EtOAc:Heptane gradient (2:3)(3:2.5) (v/v).Product yield 0.925 g, 74%.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 6.69 (1H, bs, NH), 5.32 (1H, bs, NH), 4.04 (2H, bs),3.41 (2H, dd), 2.45 (2H, t), 2.24 (1H, s), 1.44 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu).

Example 15 Preparation of Compound (3b)

A solution of 5-iodo-2′-deoxycytidine (176 mg, 0.5 mmol),N-Boc-β-alanine propargyl amide (14) and triethylamine (100 mg, 1.0mmol) in dry DMF (5 mL) were stirred at room temperature. N₂ was passedthrough the solution for 20 min.

Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (66.5 mg, 0.057 mmol) andcopper(I) iodide (20.7 mg, 0.108 mmol) were added and the reactionmixture was stirred at room temperature for 5 d

Imidazole (112 mg, 1.6 mmol) was added. A solution oftert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (234 mg, 1.5 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (1mL) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred for 16 h at roomtemperature.

The reaction mixture was evaporated and EtOAc (25 mL) was added. Theresulting mixture was filtrated and the solvent removed by vacuumevaporation.

The crude product was purified by silica column chromatography elutingwith DCM:MeOH (92.5-7.5) (v/v). Product yield 84 mg, 25%.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 8.13 (H, s), 6.21 (1H, dd, 1′-H), 4.66 (1H, m), 4.16(2H, s, CH₂), 4.04-3.85 (4H, m), 3.35-3.31 (2H, m), 2.43-2.36 (2H, m),2.12-1.99 (1H, m), 1.44 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu), 0.95 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu), 0.92 (9H,s, ^(t)Bu), 0.17 (3H, s, CH₃), 0.15 (3H, s, CH₃), 0.13 (3H, s, CH₃),0.12 (3H, s, CH₃).

Example 16 Preparation of Compound (3c)

A solution of compound (3b) (84 mg, 0.12 mmol) and tetrabutylammoniumfluoride trihydrate (TBAF) (155 mg, 0.45 mmol) in 2 mL dry THF wasstirred at room temperature for 4 days.

The reaction mixture was evaporated and purified by silica columnchromatography eluting with DCM:MeOH gradient (9:1)-(8:2) (v/v). Productyield 27 mg, 48%.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 8.32 (1H, s), 6.20 (1H, dd, 1′-H), 4.35 (1H, dt), 4.15(2H, s, CH₂), 3.95 (1H, q), 3.83 (1H, dd), 3.72 (1H, dd), 3.36-3.30 (3H,m), 2.42-2.36 (3H, m), 2.13 (1H, dt), 1.40 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu).

Example 17 Preparation of Compound (3d)

Compound (3c) (27 mg, 60 μmol) was dissolved in 100 μL drytrimethylphosphate. After cooling to 0° C., a solution of phosphorusoxychloride (POCl₃) in dry trimethylphosphate was added (100 μL stocksolution (110 mg/mL), 72 μmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C. for 2 h.

Subsequently a solution of tributylammonium pyrophosphate (71 mg, 150μmol in 300 μL dry DMF) and tributylamine (28.3 mg, 153 μmol in 150 μLdry DMF) was added at 0° C. The reaction was stirred at room temperaturefor 3 min. and then stopped by addition of 1.0 M triethylammoniumhydrogencarbonate (1 mL).

Example 18 Preparation of Compound III

Removal of N-Boc Protection Group.

Following phosphorylation, 50 μl of the phosphorylation reaction mixtureis adjusted to pH=1 using HCl and incubated at room temperature for 30minutes. The mixture is adjusted to pH 5.5 using equimolar NaOH andNa-acetate (pH 5.5) before purification on TLC.

Purification of Nucleotide Derivatives Using Thin-Layer Chromatography(TLC)

From the crude mixture, 20 samples of 2 μl were spotted on kieselgel 60F₂₅₄ TLC (Merck). Organic solvents and non-phosphorylated nucleosideswere separated from the nucleotides derivatives using 100% methanol asrunning solution. Subsequently, the TLC plate is air-dried and thenucleotide-derivative identified by UV-shadowing. Kiesel containing thenucleotide-derivative was isolated and extracted twice using 10 mMNa-acetate (pH=5.5) as solvent. Kieselgel was removed by centrifugationand the supernatant was dried in vacuo. The nucleotide derivative wasresuspended in 50-100 μl H₂O to a final concentration of 1-3 mM. Theconcentration of each nucleotide derivative was evaluated byUV-absorption prior to use in polymerase extension reactions.

Examples 19 to 22 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block (IV)

Building block IV may be prepared according to the general scheme shownbelow:

Example 19 Preparation of N-Acetyl-β-alanine (4a)

To a solution of 3-alanine (2.25 g, 25 mmol) in aq. NaHCO₃ (15 mL) wasadded acetonitrile (15 mL) and acetic anhydride (2.55 g, 25 mmol). Thereaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h. Aceticanhydride (2.55 g, 25 mmol) was added and after 2 h and pH was adjustedto 4-5 by addition of NaH₂PO₄.

The product was extracted into EtOAc (3×50 mL), dried (Na₂SO₄), andevaporated to dryness under vacuum to afford 1.96 g (60%)

Example 20 Preparation of N-Acetyl-β-alanine propargyl ester (4b)

To a solution of N-Acetyl-β-alanine (4a) in THF (20 mL) was addedpropargyl alcohol (840 mg, 15 mmol),1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC) (1.035g, 5.39 mmol), triethylamine (540 mg, 5.4 mmol) and4-dimethylaminopyridin (5 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 2 d.

The reaction mixture was poured into EtOAc (100 mL), washed with NaH₂PO₄(50% sat. aq, 2×50 mL) followed by NaHCO₃ (50% sat. aq, 50 mL). Afterdrying (Na₂SO₄), EtOAc was removed under reduced pressure to leave acolourless oil that solidified on standing. Product yield 536 mg, 59%.

Example 21 Preparation of Compound (4c)

A solution of 5-iodo-2′-deoxycytidin (200 mg, 0.56 mmol), triethylamine(100 mg, 1 mmol) and compound (4b) (190 mg, 1.13 mmol) in anhydrous DMF(7 mL) was stirred at room temperature. N₂ was passed through thesolution for 20 min.

Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (70 mg, 0.06 mmol) and copper(1) iodide (22 mg, 0.12 mmol) were added and the reaction mixture wasstirred at room temperature for 4 d.

The reaction mixture was evaporated and purified by silica columnchromatography eluting with DCM:MeOH gradient (9:1)-(8:2) (v/v). Productyield 141 mg, 63%.

¹H NMR (CD₃OD) δ 8.41 (1H, s), 6.20 (1H, dd, 1′-H), 4.97 (2H, s), 4.38(1H, dt), 3.97 (1H, q), 3.85 (1H, dd), 3.75 (1H, dd), 3.46 (2H, t), 2.61(2H, t), 2.39 (1H, m), 2.18 (1H, m).

Example 22 Preparation of Compound IV

Compound (4c) (140 mg, 355 μmol) was dissolved in 600 μL drytrimethylphosphate. After cooling to 0° C., a solution of phosphorusoxychloride (POCl₃) in dry trimethylphosphate was added (600 μL stocksolution (108 mg/mL), 420 μmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C. for 2 h.

Subsequently a solution of tributylammonium pyrophosphate (422 mg, 890μmol in 1.8 mL dry DMF) and tributylamine (168 mg, 900 μmol in 0.9 mLdry DMF) was added at 0° C. The reaction was stirred at room temperaturefor 3 min. and then stopped by addition of 1.0 M triethylammoniumhydrogencarbonate (1 mL).

From the crude mixture, 20 samples of 2 μl were spotted on kieselgel 60F₂₅₄ TLC (Merck). Organic solvents and non-phosphorylated nucleosideswere separated from the nucleotides derivatives using 100% methanol asrunning solution. Subsequently, the TLC plate is air-dried and thenucleotide-derivative identified by UV-shadowing. Kiesel containing thenucleotide-derivative was isolated and extracted twice using 10 mMNa-acetate (pH=5.5) as solvent. Kieselgel was removed by centrifugationand the supernatant was dried in vacuo. The nucleotide derivative wasresuspended in 50-100 μl H₂O to a final concentration of 1-3 mM. Theconcentration of each nucleotide derivative was evaluated byUV-absorption prior to use in polymerase extension reactions.

Examples 23 to 27 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block (V)

Building block V may be prepared according to the general scheme shownbelow:

Example 23 Preparation of 2-Aminoxy-acetic acid Ethyl ester (5a)

Acetyl chloride (5 mL) was added to abs. ethanole (50 mL) and thesolution was cooled to room temperature. 2-Aminoxy-acetic acid,hydrochloride (2:1) (1.10 g, 10 mmol) was added and the reaction mixturewas stirred for 16 h at room temperature. The reaction mixture wasevaporated, K₂CO₃ aq. (2M) (10 mL) was added and the product wasextracted into diethyl ether (5×20 mL), dried (Na₂SO₄), and evaporatedcold to afford 1.007 g, 84%.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 4.24 (2H, s), 4.22 (2H, q), 1.30 (3H, t).

Example 24 Preparation of Pent-4-ynoylaminooxy-acetic acid Ethyl ester(5b)

To a solution of 2-Aminoxy-acetic acid ethyl ester (573 mg, 4.8 mmol)and 4-Pentynoic acid (441 mg, 4.5 mmol) in 15 mL EtOAc were addeddicyclohexylcarbodiimide (928 mg, 4.5 mmol) and the resulting mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 16 h.

The reaction mixture was filtered, and the filtrate was washed withEtOAc (2×5 mL). The combined EtOAc was washed with aq NaH₂PO₄ and aqNaHCO₃, dried (Na₂SO₄), and evaporated to afford 950 mg of crudeproduct.

The crude product was purified by silica column chromatography elutingwith EtOAc:Heptane gradient (1:3)-(1:1) (v/v). Product yield 700 mg, 78%

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 4.41 (2H, s), 4.18 (2H, q), 2.77 (1H, t), 2.34 (2H,dt), 2.17 (2H, bt), 1.40 (3H, t).

Example 25 Preparation of Compound 5c

A solution of 7-Deaza-7-iodo-2′-deoxyadenosine (125 mg, 0.33 mmol),(prepared as described by Seela, F.; Synthesis 1996, 726-730),triethylamine (67 mg, 0.66 mmol) and compound (5b) (305 mg, 1.53 mmol)in anhydrous DMF (7 mL) was stirred at room temperature. N₂ was passedthrough the solution for 20 min.

Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (75 mg, 0.065 mmol) andcopper(I) iodide (24 mg, 0.33 mmol) were added and the reaction mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 16 h.

The reaction mixture was evaporated and purified by silica columnchromatography eluting with DCM:MeOH (9:1) (v/v). Product yield 129 mg,86%.

¹H NMR (d⁶ DMSO) δ 11.6 (1H, s), 8.09 (1H, s), 7.63 (1H, s), 6.47 (1H,dd), 5.26 (1H, d), 5.08 (1H, t), 4.42 (2H, s), 4.32 (1H, m), 4.08 (2H,q), 3.81 (1H, m), 3.54 (2H, m), 2.66 (1H, t), 2.46 (1H, m), 2.30 (2H,t), 2.15 (2H, ddd), 1.15 (3H, t).

Example 26 Preparation of Compound 5d

Compound (5c) (117 mg, 260 μmol) was dissolved in 500 μL drytrimethylphosphate. After cooling to 0° C., a solution of phosphorusoxychloride (POCl₃) in dry trimethylphosphate was added (400 μL stocksolution (120 mg/mL), 310 μmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C. for 2 h.

Subsequently a solution of tributylammoniumpyrophosphate (200 mg, 420μmol in 1.00 mL dry DMF) and tributylamine (123.6 mg, 670 μmol in 500 μLdry DMF) was added at 0° C. The reaction was stirred at room temperaturefor 3 min. and then stopped by addition of 1 mL 1.0 Mtriethylammoniumhydrogencarbonate.

Example 27 Preparation of Compound V

The reaction mixture of compound (5d) (2.0 mL) was diluted with water(6.0 mL) and adjusted to pH 13 using NaOH (2M, aq). After incubation at5° C. for 64 h, the reaction mixture was extracted with EtOAc (5×5 mL),adjusted to pH 7.0 using HCl (2M, aq), evaporated and diluted withtriethylammonium acetate buffer (500 μL, 0.1 M aq).

The crude product of triphosphate was purified by HPLC on a WatersXterra MS C₁₈ Column, using the following buffer system: (A) aqueoustriethylammonium acetate (0.1 M, pH 7) and (B) acetonitrile:water(80:20) containing triethylammonium acetate (0.1 M). The gradient timetable contains 8 entries which are:

Time A % B % 0.00 98 2 1.00 98 2 10.00 90 10 16.00 85 15 18.00 65 3520.00 0 100 25.00 0 100 25.10 100 0

Retention times of compound V and compound 5d were 4.82 min and 7.29 minrespectively, measured by monitoring UV absorbance at 260 nm. Thefractions containing pure product were pooled and lyophilized two timesfrom water (3 mL).

Examples 28 to 30 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block (VI)Example 28 Preparation of Pent-4-ynoic acid4-oxo-4H-benzo[d][1,2,3]triazin-3-yl ester (6a)

Pentynoic acid (200 mg, 2.04 mmol) was dissolved in THF (4 mL). Thesolution was cooled in a brine-icewater bath. A solution ofdicyclohexylcarbodiimide (421 mg, 2.04 mmol) in THF (2 mL) was added.3-Hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazin-4(3H)-one (333 mg, 2.04 mmol) was addedafter 5 minutes. The reaction mixture was stirred 1 h at −10° C. andthen 2 h at room temperature. TLC indicated full conversion of3-hydroxy-1,2,3-benzotriazin-4(3H)-one (eluent: ethyl acetate).Precipitated salts were filtered off. The filtrate was concentrated invacuo and crystallized from hexane (4 mL). The crystals were filteredoff and dried. Yield: 450 mg, 93%. R_(E)=0.8 (ethyl acetate).

Example 29 Preparation of 2-Pent-4-ynoylamino-succinic acid 1-tert-butylester 4-isopropyl ester (6b)

L-Aspartic acid α,β-di-tert-butyl ester hydrochloride (Novabiochem04-12-5066, 200 mg, 0.71 mmol) was dissolved in THF (5 mL). Theactivated ester 6a (173 mg, 0.71 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (0.15mL, 0.86 mmol) were added. The mixture was stirred overnight.Dichloromethane (10 mL) was added. The organic phase was washed withcitric acid (2×10 mL), saturated NaHCO₃ (aq, 10 mL), brine (10 mL),dried (Na₂SO₄) and concentrated to a syrup. An NMR spectrum indicatedthe syrup was pure enough for further synthesis. ¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): δ 6.6(1H, NH), 4.6 (1H, CH), 2.8 (2H, CH₂), 2.4 (4H, 2×CH₂), 1.9 (1H, CH),1.2 (18H, 6×CH₃).

Example 30 Preparation of2-{5-[1-(4-Hydroxy-5-(O-triphosphate-hydroxymethyl)-tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-pyrimidin-5-yl]-pent-4-ynoylamino}-succinicacid di-tert-butyl ester (VI)

The nucleotide (20 mg, 0.022 mmol) was dissolved in water-ethanol (1:1,2 mL). The solution was degassed and kept under an atmosphere of argon.The catalyst Pd(PPh₂(m-C₆H₅SO₃Na⁺))₄ (20 mg, 0.016 mmol) prepared inaccordance with A. L. Casalnuovo et al. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1990, 112,4324-4330, triethylamine (0.02 mL, 0.1 mmol) and the alkyne (Compound6b) (20 mg, 0.061 mmol) were added. Few crystals of CuI were added. Thereaction mixture was stirred for 6 h. The triethylammonium salt ofLH8037 was achieved after purification by RP-HPLC (eluent: 100 mMtriethylammonium acetate→20% acetonitrile in 100 mM triethylammoniumacetate). ¹H-NMR (D₂O): δ 8.1 (1H, CH), 6.2 (1H, CH), 4.8 (1H, CH), 4.6(1H, CH), 4.1 (3H, CH, CH₂), 2.8 (2H, CH₂), 2.7 (2H, CH₂), 2.5 (2H,CH₂), 2.3 (2H, CH₂), 1.4 (18H, 6×CH₃).

Immediately prior to incorporation or after incorporation, theprotective di-tert-butyl ester groups may be cleaved to obtain thecorresponding free carboxylic acid.

Examples 31 to 32 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block (VII)Example 31 Preparation of2-{5-[4-Amino-1-(4-hydroxy-5-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-pyrimidin-5-yl]-pent-4-ynoylamino}-succinicacid di-tert-butyl ester (7a)

Compound (7a) (30 mg, 19%) was obtained from compound (6b) (140 mg, 0.43mmol) and 5-iodo-2-deoxycytidine (100 mg, 0.28 mmol) using the proceduredescribed for the synthesis of compound VI. ¹H-NMR (MeOD-D₃): δ 8.3 (1H,CH), 6.2 (1H, CH), 4.8 (1H, CH), 4.6 (1H, CH), 4.4 (1H, CH), 4.0 (1H,CH), 3.8 (2H, CH₂), 2.8 (4H, 2×CH₂), 2.7 (2H, CH₂), 2.4 (1H, CH₂), 2.2(1H, CH₂), 1.4 (18H, 6×CH₃).

Example 32 Preparation of2-{5-[4-Amino-1-(4-hydroxy-5-(O-triphosphate-hydroxymethyl)-tetrahydro-furan-2-yl)-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro-pyrimidin-5-yl]-pent-4-ynoylamino}-succinicacid di-tert-butyl ester (Compound VII)

Phosphoroxy chloride (6.0 μl, 0.059 mmol) was added to a cooled solution(0° C.) of 7a (30 mg, 0.054 mmol) in trimethyl phosphate (1 mL). Themixture was stirred for 1 h. A solution of bis-n-tributylammoniumpyrophosphate (77 mg, 0.16 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) and tributylamine (40 μl,0.16 mmol) were added. Water (2 mL) was added. pH of the solution wasmeasured to be neutral. The solution was stirred at room temperature for3 h and at 5° C. overnight. A small amount of compound VII (few mg) wasobtained after purification by RP-HPLC (eluent: 100 mM triethylammoniumacetate→20% acetonitrile in 100 mM triethylammonium acetate). 7a (18 mg)was regained.

Immediately prior to or subsequent to incorporation the protectivedi-tert-butyl ester groups may be cleaved to obtain the correspondingfree carboxylic acid.

Examples 33 and 34 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block(VIII) Example 33 Preparation of2-Pent-4-ynoylamino-6-(2,2,2-trifluoro-acetylamino)-hexanoic acid, (8a)

Compound 6a (250 mg, 1.0 mmol) was added to a solution ofN-ε-trifloroacetyl-L-lysine (Novabiochem, 04-12-5245) (250 mg, 1.0 mmol)in DMF (3 mL). Ethyldiisopropylamine (0.2 mL, 1.2 mmol) was added. Thesolution was stirred at room temperature overnight and worked-up byRP-HPLC (eluent: water→methanol). Yield: 50 mg, 15%. ¹H-NMR (D₂O): δ 4.4(1H, CH), 3.4 (2H, CH₂), 2.5 (4H, 2×CH₂), 2.3 (1H, CH), 1.9 (1H, CH₂),1.8 (1H, CH₂) 1.6 (2H, CH₂), 1.5 (2H, CH₂).

Example 34 Preparation of2-{5-[1-(4-Hydroxy-5-(O-triphosphate-hydroxymethyl)-tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-pyrimidin-5-yl]-pent-4-ynoylamino}-6-(2,2,2-trifluoro-acetylamino)-hexanoicacid (Compound VIII)

The triethylammonium salt of compound VIII (11 mg) was obtained fromcompound 8a (50 mg, 0.15 mmol) and 5-iodo-2-deoxyuracil (50 mg, 0.06mmol) using the procedure described for the synthesis of compound VI.

Examples 35 to 39 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block (IX)Example 35 Preparation of di-Boc-Lysin-propargyl amide (compound 9a)C₁₉H₃₃N₃O₅ Mw 383.48

Boc-Lys-(Boc)-OSu (Novabiochem 04-12-0017, 0.887 g, 2 mmol) wasdissolved in THF (10 ml). Propargylamine (0.412 ml, 6 mmol) was addedand the solution stirred for 2 h. TLC (ethylacetate:heptan 1:1) showedonly one product. Dichloromethane (20 ml) was added and the mixture waswashed successively with citric acid (1 M, 10 ml) and saturated sodiumhydrogen carbonate (10 ml). The organic phase was dried with magnesiumsulphate filtered and evaporated to give compound 9a (0.730 g) as acolourless syrup.

¹H-NMR: δ 6.55 (1H, NH), 5.15 (1H, NH), 4.6 (1H, CH—NH), 4.05 (2H,CH—C—CH₂ —N), 3.75 (1H, NH), 3.1 (2H, CH₂ —NH) 2.25 (1H, CH—C—CH₂),1.9-1.3 (6H, 3×CH₂), 1.4 (18H, 6×CH₃).

Example 36 Preparation of 5-Iodo-3′-O-acetyl-5′-O-TBDMS-2′-deoxyuridine(compound 9b) C₁₇H₂₇IN₂O₆Si Mw 510.40

5-Iodo-2′-deoxyuridine (Sigma I-7125, 2.50 g, 7.06 mmol) and imidazol(0.961 g, 14.12 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (10 ml). Cooled to 0° C. anda solution of TBDMSCl (t-butyl-dimethyl-chloride, 1.12 g, 7.41 mmol) indichloromethane (5.0 ml) was run in over 20 minutes. Stirring wascontinued at room temperature for 18 h, and the mixture was evaporated.The crude mono silylated nucleoside was dissolved in pyridine (40 ml)and cooled to 0° C. Acetic anhydride (4.0 ml, 42.3 mmol) was added over30 minutes and stirring was continued for 18 h at room temperature. Thereaction mixture was evaporated and dissolved in dichloromethane (20 ml)and citric acid (2M, 20 ml) was added. The aqueous phase was backextracted with dichloromethane (2×20 ml). The combined organic phaseswere washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate (20 ml), dried with sodiumsulphate and evaporated (5.85 g). Recrystallisation formethylacetate/EtOH gave 9b (2.54, g) pure for synthesis TLC (Ethylacetate). Further recrystallisation furnished an analytical pure samplemp. 172.4-173.1° C.

Example 37 Preparation of 5-Iodo-3′-O-acetyl-2′-deoxyuridine (compound9c) C₁₁H₁₃IN₂O₆ Mw 396.14

5-Iodo-3′-O-acetyl-5′-O-TBDMS-2′-deoxyuridine (compound 9b) (2.54 g,4.98 mmol) as dissolved in THF (25 ml), tetra butyl ammonium fluoridetrihydrat (TBAF, 3.2 g, 10.1 mmol) was added and stirred for 18 h atroom temperature. The reaction mixture was added water (25 ml) stirredfor 1 h. Ion exchange resin IR-120 H⁺ (26 ml) was then added andstirring was continued for 1 h. The solution was filtered and reduced toapproximately 10 ml in vaccuo. Crystals were collected and dried invaccuo (1.296 g)

Example 38 Preparation of 5-Iodo-5′-triphosphate-2′-deoxyuridine,triethylammonium salt (compound 9d) C₉H₁₄IN₂O₁₄P₃+n.N(CH₂CH₃)₃ Mw 897.61for n=3

5-Iodo-3′-O-acetyl-2′-deoxyuridine (compound 9c) (2.54 g, 4.98 mmol) asdissolved in pyridine (3.2 ml) and dioxane (10 ml). A solution of2-chloro-4H-1,3,2-benzodioxaphosphorin-4-one in dioxane (3.60 ml, 1 M,3.60 mmol) was added under stirring. The reaction mixture was stirredfor 10 minutes at room temperature followed by simultaneous addition ofbis(tri-n-butylammonium) pyrophosphate in DMF (9.81 ml, 0.5 M, 4.91mmol) and tri-n-butylamine (3.12 ml, 13.1 mmol). Stirring was continuedfor 10 minutes and the intermediate was oxidized by adding an iodinesolution (90 ml, 1% w/v in pyridine/water (98/2, v/v)) until permanentiodine colour. The reaction mixture was left for 15 minutes and thendecolourized with sodium thiosulfate (5% aqueous solution, w/v). Thereaction mixture was evaporated to yellow oil. The oil was stirred inwater (20 ml) for 30 minutes and concentrated aqueous ammonia (100 ml,25%) was added. This mixture was stirred for 1.5 hour at roomtemperature and then evaporated to an oil of the crude triphosphateproduct. The crude material was purified using a DEAE Sephadex A25column (approximately 100 ml) eluted with a linear gradient oftriethyl-ammonium hydrogencarbonate [TEAB] from 0.05 M to 1.0 M (pHapproximately 7.0-7.5); flow 8 ml/fraction/15 minutes. The positivefractions were identified by RP18 HPLC eluting with a gradient from 10mM TEAA (triethylammonium acetate) in water to 10 mM TEAA 20% water inacetonitrile. The appropriate fractions were pooled and evaporated.Yield approximately 1042 mg.

Example 39 Preparation of 5-(Lysin-propargylamide)-5′-triphosphate-2′-deoxycytidine, triethylammonium salt (compoundIX) C₁₈H₃₀N₅O₁₅P₃+n.N(CH₂CH₃)₃ Mw 952.95 for n=3

5-Iodo-3′-O-acetyl-5′-triphosphate-2′-deoxyuridine, triethylammoniumsalt (compound 9d) (0.0087 g, 9.7 μmol) was dissolved in water (100 μl).Air was replaced carefully with argon. Di-Boc-Lysin-propargyl amide(compound 9a) (18.6 mg, 48.5 μmol) dissolved in dioxane (100 μl),triethylamine (2.7 μl, 19.4 μl), Pd((PPh₂)(m-C₆H₄SO₃Na⁺).(H₂O))₄(compound 9d) (5 mg, 4.4 μmol) and copper (I) iodide (0.4 μl, 2.1 μmol)were added in the given order. The reaction mixture was stirred for 18 hat room temperature in an inert atmosphere then evaporated. The crudematerial was treated with aqueous hydrochloric acid (0.2 M, 1 ml) for 15minutes at 30° C. (compound IX) was obtained by HPLC C₁₈ 10 mM TEAA(triethylammonium acetate) in water to 10 mM TEAA 20% water inacetonitrile. Appropriate fractions were desalted using gelfiltration(pharmacia G-10, 0.7 ml).

Examples 40 to 45 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block (X)Example 40 Preparation of Boc-Lys-(Boc)-OH (compound 10a) C₆H₃₀N₂O₆ Mw346.42

Lysine (Novabiochem 04-10-0024; 3.65 g, 20 mmol) was dissolved in sodiumhydroxide (2 M, 40 ml), added dioxane (60 ml) and di-tert-butyldicarbonate (8.73 g, 40 mmol) in the given order. The mixture wasstirred for 1.75 h at 60° C. Water (50 ml) was added and the solutionwas washed with dichloromethane (4×25 ml). The aqueous phase was cooledto 0° C. with ice then acidified with 2 M HCl (pH=3) and extracted withdichloromethane (4×25 ml). The organic phase was dried with magnesiumsulphate. Evaporation furnished (compound 10a) 6.8 g as a colour lessoil.

¹H-NMR: δ 9.5 (1H, COOH), 5.3 (1H, CH), 4.7 (1H, NH), 4.3 (1H, NH), 3.1(2H, CH₂—NH), 1.8 (2H, CH₂—CH), 1.5 (6H, 3×CH₂), 1.45 (18H, 6×CH₃).

Example 41 Preparation of di-Boc-Lysin-propargyl ester (compound 10b)C₁₉H₃₂N₂O₆ Mw 384.47

Boc-Lys-(Boc)-OH (compound 10a) (3.46 g, 10 mmol) was dissolved in THF(25 ml). At 0° C. a solution of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (2.02 g, 10mmol) in THF (25 ml) and triethylamine (1.39 ml) were added in the givenorder. The mixture was allowed to warm up to room temperature andstirred for 18 h. The resulting suspension was filtered and evaporated.The oil 5.45 g was pre-purified by column chromatography Heptan:Ethylacetate 3:1.

Pure 10b was achieved by HPLC-C₁₈ 10% MeOH: 90% H₂O→100% MeOH

¹H-NMR: δ 5.1 (1H, NH), 4.75 (2H, CH—C—CH₂ —O), 4.6 (1H, NH), 4.35 (1H,CH—NH), 3.1 (2H, CH₂ —NH) 2.5 (1H, CH—C—CH₂), 1.9-1.4 (6H, 3×CH₂), 1.5(18H, 6×CH₃).

Example 42 Preparation of 5-Iodo-3′,5′-di-O-TBDMS-2′deoxycytidine(compound 10c) C₂₁H₄₀IN₃O₄Si₂ Mw 581.64

5-Iodo-2-deoxy-Cytidine (Sigma I-7000, 0.353 g, 1 mmol) was dissolved inDMF (4 ml), added t-Butyl-dimethyl silyl chloride (TBDMS-Cl, 0.332 g,2.2 mmol) and Imidazol (0.204 g, 3 mmol). The solution was stirred for15 h at 50° C. followed by evaporation. Dichloromethane (25 ml) andcitric acid (2M, 10 ml) was added to the dry mixture. The aqueous phasewas back extracted with dichloromethane (2×10 ml). The combined organicphases were washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate (15 ml), dried withsodium sulphate and evaporated. Compound 10 c (0.405 g) was obtained byrecrystallisation from EtOH/Ethylacetate.

¹H-NMR: δ 8.1 (1H, H-6), 6.25 (1H, H-1′), 4.35 (1H, H-4′), 4.0 (1H,H-4′), 3.9 (1H, H-5′), 3.75 (1H, H-5′), 2.5 (1H, H-2′), 1.95 (1H, H-2′),1.85 (2H, NH), 0.95 (9H, 3×CH₃), 0.9 (9H, 3×CH₃), 0.15 (6H, 2×CH₃), 0.1(6H, 2×CH₃).

Preparation of 5-(di-Boc-Lysin-propargylester)-3′,5′-di-O-TBDMS-2′-deoxycytidine (compound 10d) C₄₀H₇₁IN₅O₁₀Si₂Mw 838.19

Compound 10c (0.116 g, 0.2 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (10ml). Air was replaced carefully with argon. Di-Boc-Lysin-propargyl ester(compound 10b) (0.232, 0.6 mmol), triethylamine (0.083 ml, 0.6 mmol),di-chloro-bistriphenylphosphine-palladium II (0.0074 g, 0.01 mmol) andcopper (I) iodide (0.0038 g, 0.02 mmol) were added in the given order.The reaction mixture was stirred for 15 h at room temperature in aninert atmosphere. The reaction mixture was evaporated re-dissolved inMeOH/H₂O 1:1 1 ml and purified using HPLC-C₁₈ 45% H₂O:55% MeCN→100%MeCN.

¹H-NMR: a ¹H-NMR: δ 8.2 (1H, H-6), 6.25 (1H, H-1′), 5.15 (1H, NH), 4.9(2H, C—CH₂ —O), 4.6 (1H, NH), 4.4 (1H, H-4′), 4.3 (1H, CH—NH), 4.0 (1H,H-4′), 3.9 (1H, H-5′), 3.75 (1H, H-5′), 2.5 (1H, H-2′), 3.1 (2H, CH₂—NH), 1.95 (1H, H-2′), 1.9-1.4 (6H, 3×CH₂), 1.85 (2H, NH), 1.5 (18H,6×CH₃), 0.95 (9H, 3×CH₃), 0.9 (9H, 3×CH₃), 0.15 (6H, 2×CH₃), 0.1 (6H,2×CH₃).

Example 44 Preparation of 5-(di-Boc-Lysin-propargylester)-2′-deoxycytidine (compound 10e) C₂₈H₄₃IN₅O₁₀ Mw 609.67

Compound 10d (0.0246 g, 0.029 mmol) was dissolved in THF (1 ml) andsuccessively added acetic acid (0.0165 ml, 0.288 mmol) and tetra n-butylammonium fluoride tri-hydrate (0.0454 g, 0.144 mmol). The reactionmixture was stirred for 18 h at room temperature and afterwardsevaporated. Re-dissolved in dichloromethane and purified on silica (1×18cm). Dichloromethane/MeOH 8:2. Fractions which gave UV absorbance on TLCwere pooled and evaporated giving (0.0128 g) as a colourless oil.

Example 45 Preparation of 5-(Lysin-propargylester)-5′-triphosphate-2′-deoxycytidine C₁₈H₃₀N₅O₁₅P₃ Mw 649.38

Compound 10e (0.0128 g, 0.021 mmol) was dissolved in trimethylphosphate(0.150 ml) and cooled to 0° C. Phosphoroxychloride in trimethylphosphate(1M, 0.0246 ml) was added slowly in order not to raise the temperature.Stirring was continued for 2 h at 0° C. and the temperature was allowedto rise to ambient. Pyrophosphate in DMF (0.5 M, 0.1025 ml, 0.051 mmol)and tri-n-butyl amine in DMF (1M, 0.0122 ml, 0.051 mmol) were addedsimultaneous. Stirring was continued for 15 minutes at room temperatureand TEAB (triethyl ammonium bicarbonate, 1M, pH=7.3, 0.50 ml) was added.Stirring was continued for 3 h then evaporated.

Example 46 Preparation of Compound X

The crude material was treated with aqueous hydrochloric acid (0.2 M, 1ml) for 15 minutes at 30° C. Compound X was obtained by HPLC C₁₈ 10 mMTEAA (triethylammonium acetate) in water to 10 mM TEAA 20% water inacetonitrile. Appropriate fractions were desalted using gelfiltration(pharmacia G-10, 0.7 ml)

Examples 47 to 51 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block (XI)Example 47 Preparation of3′-O-acetyl-5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-5-iodo-2′-deoxyuridine (compound 11a).C₃₂H₃₁ IN₂0₈. Mw 698.51 g/mol. (Analogous to “OligonucleotideSynthesis—a practical approach” (1984) Gait, M. J. (Ed.), IRL Press,Oxford.)

5-Iodo-2′-deoxyuridine (3.54 g, 10 mmol) was dried by coevaporation withpyridine (25 ml, 3 times). Pyridine (100 ml) was added and shortlyevaporated to a reduced volume (80 ml). 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl chloride(DMT-Cl, 3.38 g, 10 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was stirredat room temperature. After 20 hours, additional DMT-Cl (0.68 g, 2 mmol)was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for another 4 hour.Excess of DHT-Cl was quenched with methanol (5 ml, stirred 10 minutes)and the reaction mixture evaporated to dryness. The oil was dissolved indichloromethane (100 ml) and extracted with saturated aqueous NaHCO₃(100 ml). The aqueous phase was back-extracted with dichloromethane andthe combined fractions of dichloromethane were dried with anhydrousMgSO₄, filtered and evaporated. The crude oil was dissolved indichloromethane (75 ml) and triturated with pentane (250 ml).Re-trituration of the crude oil by dissolving in ethyl acetate (75 ml)and adding pentane (250 ml) gave reddish foam after evaporation. Yieldof crude 5′-0-dimethoxytrityl-5-iodo-2′-deoxyuridine was. 5.84 g. PureS′-O-dimethoxytrityl-Siodo-2′-deoxyuridine was obtained via columnchromatography in dichloromethane on silica (Merck Kieselgel 60, 230-400mesh ASTM, art. 9385) eluting with a gradient of methanol (0-5% methanolin dichloromethane). Yield of purified5′-0-dimethoxytrityl-5-iodo-2′-deoxyuridine was 4.26 g (6.5 mmol, 65%).5′-0-Dimethoxytrityl-5-iodo-2′-deoxyuridine (6.0 g, 9.1 mmol) was driedby coevaporation with pyridine (10 ml, twice). Pyridine (50 ml) wasadded and acetic anhydride (5 ml) and dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP,catalytic amount) were added. The reaction mixture was stirred overnightat room temperature. Excess of acetic anhydride was quenched withmethanol (10 ml, stirred 15 min.) and the reaction mixture evaporated todryness The oil was dissolved in dichloromethane (150 ml) and extractedwith aqueous saturated NaHCO₃ (50 ml). The aqueous phase wasback-extracted with dichloromethane and the combined fractions ofdichloromethane were dried with anhydrous MgSO₄, filtered andevaporated. Purified3′-O-acetyl-5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-5-iodo-2′-deoxyuridine was. obtainedvia column chromatography in dichloromethane/methanol (98/2, v/v) onsilica (Merck Kieselgel 60, 230-400 mesh ASTM, art.9385) eluting with agradient of methanol (2-6% methanol in dichloromethane). The yield was5.75 g (8.2 mmol). Rechromatoqraphy in dichloromethane/pentane (80/20,v/v) eluting with a gradient of methanol (2-6′) gave the. desiredpurified 3′-O-acetyl-5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-5-iodo-2′-deoxyuridine (4.18g, 6.0 mmol, 60%).

Example 48 Preparation of N-trifluoroacetyl-3-amidopropyne (compound 11b). C₅H₄F₃NO. Mw. 151.09 g/mol. Reference: Cruickshank et al. 1988Tetrahedron Lett. 29, 5221-5224)

Propargylamine (7.0 ml, 5.88 g, 0.11 mol) was dissolved in 100 mlice-cold methanol and ethyl trifluoroacetate (18 ml, 19.2 g, 0.135 mol)was added slowly under stirring on ice. The ice bath was removed and thereaction mixture was allowed to warm up to room temperature and stirringv as continued over night. After 24 h, TLC analysis (Silica,dichloromethane/methanol, 9/1, v/v) shoved complete conversion ofpropargylamine (as observed by disappearance of the positivecolour-reaction in the ninhydrin test, 110° C.). The reaction mixturewas evaporated, re-dissolved in dichloromethane (100 ml) and extractedwith aqueous sodium hydrogen carbonate. The aqueous phase wasback-extracted with dichloromethane (25 ml) and the combineddichloromethane phases were extracted with water (100 ml). The aqueousphase was back-extracted with dichloromethane (25 ml) and the combineddichloromethane phases were dried with magnesium sulfate, filtered andevaporated to yellow oil. The oil was purified by distillationcollecting the purified product at 38-39° C.I mmHg. Yield 11.0 g (73mmol, 66%).

Example 49 Preparation of3′-O-acetyl-5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-5-(N-trifluoroacetyl-3-amido-propynyl-2′-deoxyuridine(compound 11c). C₃₅H₃₅N₃0₈, Mw 625.67 g/mol

3′-O-Acetyl-5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-5-iodo-2′-deoxyuridine (4.15 g, 6.0mmol) was dissolved in ethyl acetate (240 ml) andN-trifluoroacetyl-3-aminopropyne (1.81 g, 12 mmol), triethylamine (3.09g, 4.23 ml, 30.5 mmol), bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) chloride(0.091 g, 0.13 mmol) and copper(I) iodide (0.091 g, 0.48 mmol) wereadded in the given order. The reaction mixture was flushed withnitrogen, Stoppered and stirred at ambient temperature. The reaction wasfollowed by TLC analysis (Silica, CH₂Cl₂/MEOH, 95/5, v/v) and stoppedafter 24 hours when all starting material was consumed. The reactionmixture was extracted twice with aqueous EDTA (5% v/v, 300 ml) and oncewith aqueous sodium thiosulfate (5% v/v, 300 ml). The aqueous phaseswere back-extracted with ethyl acetate and the combined fraotions ofethyl acetat. were dried (anhydrous MgSO₄), filtered and evaporated.Column chromatography in dichloromethane/pentane (80/20, v/v) elutingwith a gradient of methanol (0-5%) gave the crude3′-O-acetyl-5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-5-(N-trifluoroacetyl-3-amido-propynyl)-2′-deoxyuridine(4.2 g) as brownish oil. Rechromatography in ethylacetate/pentane (50/50to 60/40, v/v) gave the desired purified product (1.99 g, 3.2 mmol).

Example 50 Preparation of3′-O-acetyl-5-(N-trifluoroacetyl-3-amidopropynyl)-2′-deoxyuridin.C₁₆H₁₆F₃N₃0₇, Mw 419.31 g/mol

3′-O-Acetyl-5′-O-dimethoxytrityl-5-(N-trifluoroacetyl-3-amidopropynyl)-2′-deoxyuridine(1.99 g, 2.8 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (133 ml) and cooledto O° C. A solution of trichloroacetic acid in dichloromethane (3% w/v)was added slowly and the reaction mixture was stirred for 15 min at O°C. TLC analysis (Silica, CH₂Cl₂/MeOH, 95/5 v/v) confirmed totaldetritylation and the reaction was quenched by the addition of2-propanol (10 ml), quenching of DMT⁺ was observed by colour-change fromorange to colourless. Stirring vas continued for 2 minutes and thereaction mixture was poured into saturated aqueous NaHCO₃ (100 ml) andextracted twice with dichloromethane. The aqueous phase wasback-extracted with dichloromethane and the combined fractions ofdichloromethane were dried (anhydrous MgSO₄), filtered and evaporated.The foam was dissolved in dichloromethane (50 ml) and triturated withpentane (200 ml). The trituration was. repeated and the precipitate wasredissolved and evaporated, first from methanol and then from chloroformto give yellow foam. Purified3′-O-acetyl-5-(N-trifluoroaoctyl-3-amidopropynyl)-2′-deoxyuridine wasobtained by silica gel column chromatography in dichloromethane/methanol(gradient: 95/5 to 89/11, v/v), The yield was. 0.37 g afterrechromatography, eluting with a gradient in dichloromethane/methanol(98/2 to 95/5, v/v).

Example 51 Preparation of5-(3-aminopropyl)-5′-triphosphate-2′-deoxyuridine, triethylammonium salt(compound XI). C₁₂H₁₈N₃O₁₄P₃+n.N(CH₂CH₃)₃. Mw 824.78 g/mol for n=3.(Ludwig, J. and Eckstein, F. (1989) J. Org. Chem. 54, 631-635)

3′-O-Acetyl-5-(N-trifluoroacetyl-3-amidopropynyl)-2′-deoxyuridine (42.5mg, 0.10 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (2 ml) andevaporated. The oil was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (100 μl) andanhydrous dioxane (300 μl). A solution of2-chloro-4H-1,3,2-benzodioxaphosphorin-4-one in dioxane (110 μl, 1 M,0.11 mmol) was added under stirring and after 30 seconds precipitationof pyridinium hydrochloride was observed. The reaction mixture wasstirred for 10 minutes at room temperature followed by simultaneousaddition of bis(tri-n-butylammonium) pyrophosphate in DMF (300 μl, 0.5M) and tri-n-butylamine (100 μl). Stirring was continued for 10 minutesand the intermediate was oxidized by adding an iodine solution (3 ml, 1%w/v in pyridine/water (98/2, v/v)) until permanent iodine colour. Thereaction mixture was left for 15 minutes and then decolourized withsodium thiosulfate (4 drops, 5% aqueous solution, w/v). The reactionmixture was transferred to a roundbottom flask (50 ml) with water andevaporated to yellow oil. The oil was stirred in water (10 ml) for 30minutes and concentrated aqueous ammonia (20 ml, 32%) was added. Thismixture was stirred for 1 hour at room temperature and then evaporatedto an oil of the crude triphosphate product. The crude material waspurified using a DEAE Sephadex A25 column (approximately 100 ml) elutedwith a linear gradient of triethylammonium hydrogencarbonate [TEAB] from0.05 M to 1.0 M (pH approximately 7.5-8.0); flow 8 ml/fraction/15minutes. The positive fractions were identified by RP18 HPLC elutingwith a gradient from 10 mM TEAA (triethylammonium acetate) in water to10 mM TEAA 20% water in acetonitrile. The appropriate fractions werepooled and evaporated. Yield approximately 90 mg.

Examples 52 to 54 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block (XII)Example 52 Succinic acid mono-(3-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-propyl) ester(Compound 12a)

Triethylamine (5.0 mL, 36 mmol) and di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (7.0 g, 32mmol) were added to a solution of 3-aminopropanol (1.0 g, 26.6 mmol) inmethanol (10 mL). The solution was stirred for 2 h. at room temperature.Methanol was evaporated off and the residue was dissolved in water (50mL) and extracted with dichloromethane (50 mL). The organic phase wasdried (Na₂SO₄) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material wasdissolved in dichloromethane (20 mL) and DMF (4 mL). Triethylamine (5.0mL, 36 mmol) and succinic anhydride (3.0 g, 30 mmol) were added portionwise to the solution (exothermic reaction). The reaction mixture wasstirred for 2 h, then concentrated and worked-up by RP-HPLC (eluent:water→methanol). Yield 6.0 g, 82%. ¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): δ 4.2 (2H, CH₂), 3.2(2H, CH₂), 2.7 (4H, 2×CH₂), 1.8 (2H, CH₂), 1.4 (9H, 3×CH₃).

9-[4-(Isopropyl-dimethyl-silanyloxy)-5-(isopropyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)tetrahydro-furan-2-yl]-9H-purin-6-ylamine(compound 12b)

Imidazole (2.0 g, 29.4 mmol) and tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (3.0g, 19.9 mmol) were added to a solution of deoxyadenosine monohydrate(1.33, 4.94 mmol) in DMF (10 mL). The solution was stirred at 60° C.overnight. The mixture was concentrated to a solid in vacuo. Work-up byflash chromatography afforded crystalline compound 12b in a yield of 2.1g, 94%. ¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): δ 8.3 (1H, HC═), 8.1 (1H, HC═), 6.4 (1H, CH),6.0 (2H, 2×OH), 4.6 (1H, CH), 4.1 (1H, CH), 3.9 (1H, CH), 3.8 (1H, CH),2.6 (1H, CH₂), 2.4 (1H, CH₂), 0.9 (18H, 6×CH₃), 0.0 (12H, 4×CH₃).

Example 53N-[9-(4-Hydroxy-5-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)-9H-purin-6-yl]-succinamicacid 3-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-propyl ester (compound 12d)

A solution of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (366 mg, 1.78 mmol) in ethylacetate (15 mL) was added to an ice-water cooled solution of 12a (488mg, 1.78 mmol) in THF (10 mL). Few crystals of 4-dimethylaminopyridineand 12b (850 mg, 1.78 mmol) were added. The reaction temperature wasslowly raised to room temperature and the mixture was stirred overnight.Precipitated salts were filtered off. The organic phase was washed withsaturated NaHCO₃ (20 mL), dried (Na₂SO₄) and concentrated to a solid.Approximately 20 mg of 12c was isolated after flash chromatography and510 mg of starting material 12b was regained. 12c (20 mg) was dissolvedin THF (2 mL). Tetrabutylammonium fluoride, trihydrate (100 mg) andacetic acid (0.2 mL) were added. The mixture was stirred for 1 day, thenconcentrated in vacuo and worked-up by column chromatography. Yield 10mg. Compound 12c 1H-NMR (CDCl3): δ 8.4 (1H, HC═), 8.2 (1H, HC═), 6.4(1H, CH), 5.8 (2H, 2×OH), 4.6 (1H, CH), 4.2 (2H, CH₂), 4.1 (1H, CH), 3.8(1H, CH), 3.7 (2H, CH₂), 3.0 (4H, 2×CH₂), 2.7 (3H, 2×CH₂), 2.4 (1H,CH₂), 1.8 (2H, CH₂), 1.4 (9H, 3×CH₃), 0.9 (18H, 6×CH₃), 0.0 (12H,4×CH₃). Selected NMR data for 12d: ¹H-NMR (MeOD-D₃): δ 4.6 (1H, CH), 4.1(2H, CH₂), 3.8 (1H, CH), 3.7 (1H, CH), 3.6 (2H, CH₂), 3.2 (2H, CH₂), 3.0(2H, CH₂), 2.8 (3H, 2×CH₂), 2.5 (1H, CH₂), 1.8 (2H, CH₂), 1.4 (9H,3×CH₃).

Example 54N-[9-(4-Hydroxy-5-hydroxymethyl-tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)-9H-purin-6-yl]-succinamicacid 3-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-propyl ester (compound XII)

LH8075b (10 mg) was converted to the corresponding triphosphate LH8075cusing the procedure described for the synthesis of compound VII. TLCindicated full conversion of compound 12d.

Immediately prior to incorporation, the tert-butoxy group may behydrolysed to release the free carboxylic acid. Alternatively, thetert-butoxy group may be cleaved after the formation of the templatedmolecule.

Example 55N-[9-(4-Hydroxy-5-(O-triphosphate-hydroxymethyl)-tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)-9H-purin-6-yl]-succinamicacid (Compound XIII)

dATP (5 μmol) was suspended in DMF (4×1 mL) and concentrated to a solidin vacuo four times. The solid was suspended in DMF (1 mL). Succinicanhydride (5 mg, 0.05 mmol) was added at −20° C. The mixture was stirredfor 3 h, and then concentrated to solid and purified by RP-HPLC (eluent:0.1% HCOOH in water→10% methanol, 0.1% HCOOH in water). The purifiedmaterial was dissolved in aqueous ammonia (25%, 1 mL) and stirred for 3h. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo and worked-up by RP-HPLC(eluent: 0.1% HCOOH in water→10% methanol, 0.1% HCOOH in water).Comparison with starting material indicated that the product eluted 40 slater off the column than the starting material.

Examples 56 and 57 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block(XIV) Example 56 Benzyloxy-ethynyl-diisopropyl-silane (Compound 14a)

A solution of benzyl alcohol (0.1 mL, 1.0 mmol) in THF (0.5 mL) wasadded dropwise to a cooled (−78° C.) solution of diisopropylethylamine(1 mL), dichlorodiisopropylsilane (0.3 mL, 1.62 mmol) in THF (4 mL). Thesolution was stirred for 3 h (−78→−20° C.). The mixture was cooled downto −78° C. and lithiumacetylid-ethylendiamin-complex (250 mg, 2.71 mmol)was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 h (78→20° C.). Water(4 mL) was added. The mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (20mL). The organic phase was dried (Na₂SO₄) and concentrated. Compound 14a(100 mg, 41%) was obtained after flash chromatography. 1H-NMR (CDCl3): δ7.4 (5H, 5×HC═), 5.0 (2H, CH₂), 2.6 (1H, CH), 1.0 (14H, 2×CH, 2×CH₃).

Example 575-{[Diisopropyl-(2-methylene-pent-3-enyloxy)-silanyl]-ethynyl}-1-(4-hydroxy-5-(O-triphosphatehydroxymethyl)-tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)-1H-pyrimidine-2,4-dione(compound XIV)

5-Iodo-dUTP (200 mg, 0.56 mmol), diisopropylethylamine (0.1 mL) and 14a(100 mg, 0.41 mmol) were dissolved in DMF (2 mL). Argon was bubbledthrough the solution for 5 min. Tetrakispalladium (57 mg, 0.49 mmol) andCuI (19 mg, 0.1 mmol) were added and the mixture was stirred at 50° C.for 5 h. Solvent was evaporated off and 14b was purified byflash-chromatography. A NMR spectrum revealed the syrup consisted of66%. The syrup was (40 mg) was converted to the correspondingtriphosphate (Compound XIV) using the procedure described for thesynthesis of compound VII. TLC indicated full conversion of 14b.Selected NMR data for LH8061a: ¹H-NMR (MeOD-D₃): δ: 8.3 (1H, HC═), 7.3(5 h, HC═), 6.2 (1H, CH), 5.0 (2H, CH₂), 4.3 (1H, CH), 3.8-3.2 (3H, CH₂,CH), 2.3 (1H, CH₂), 2.2 (1H, CH₂), 1.0 (14H, 2×CH, 4×CH₃).

Examples 58 to 63 Preparation of the Mononucleotide Building Block (XV)

Building block XV may be prepared according to the general scheme shownbelow:

Example 58 Preparation of Compound 15a

To a solution of 3-amino-butyric acid (2.06 g, 20 mmol) in NaHCO₃ (50%sat. aq, 25 mL) were added di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (4.36 g, 20 mmol)and acetonitrile (30 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 18 h. Di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (4.36 g, 20 mmol) wasadded and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h.

EtOAc (100 mL) was added and pH was adjusted to 4-5 by addition ofNaH₂PO₄. The product was extracted into EtOAc (3×100 mL), dried(Na₂SO₄), and evaporated to dryness under vacuum to afford crude product4.6 g (113%).

Example 59 Preparation of Compound 15b

Compound 28 (1,023 g, 5.0 mmol), 3-Ethynyl-phenole (Lancaster, 0.675 g,12 mmol) and 4-dimethylamino-pyridin (DMAP, 300 mg, 2.5 mmol) weredissolved in EtOAc (10 mL). Dicyclohexyl-carbodiimide (DCC, 2.06 g, 10mmol) was added to the solution and after 16 h of stirring at roomtemperature, the reaction mixture was filtered and evaporated to drynessunder vacuum. The crude product was purified by silica columnchromatography eluting with EtOAc:Heptane gradient (1:3)(1:2)(v/v).Product yield 720 mg, 73%.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 7.36-7.09 (4H, m, Ph), 4.89 (1H, bs, NH), 4.22 (1H, bm,CH), 3.10 (1H, s), 2.77 (2H, d), 1.40 (3H, t), 1.32 (3H, d).

Example 60 Preparation of Compound 15c

A solution of 5-Iodo-2′-deoxyuridine 3′,5′-Di-tert-butyldimethylsilylether (730 mg, 1.25 mmol), triethylamine (250 mg, 2.5 mmol) and compound(15b) (456 mg, 1.5 mmol) in anhydrous DMF (3 mL) was stirred at roomtemperature. N₂ was passed through the solution for 20 min.

Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (109 mg, 0.094 mmol) andcopper(I) iodide (36 mg, 0.188 mmol) were added and the reaction mixturewas stirred at room temperature for 3 d.

The reaction mixture was evaporated and purified by silica columnchromatography eluting with EtOAc:Heptane gradient (1:3)-(1:2)(v/v).Product yield 807 mg, 85%.

¹H NMR (CDCl₃) δ 8.38 (1H, s), 8.08 (1H, s, 6-H), 7.39-7.1 (4H, m, Ph),6.33 (1H, dd, 1′-H), 4.9 (1H, bs), 4.45 (1H, dt), 4.80 (2H, s, CH₂), 4.2(1H, m), 4.02 (1H, m, 4′-H), 3.95 (1H, dd, 5′-H), 3.79 (1H, dd, 5″-H),2.78 (2H, d), 2.36 (1H, m, 2′-H), 2.07 (1H, m, 2″-H), 1.46 (9H, s,^(t)Bu), 0.93 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu), 0.91 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu), 0.15 (3H, s, CH₃),0.13 (3H, s, CH₃), 0.11 (3H, s, CH₃), 0.09 (3H, s, CH₃).

Example 61 Preparation of Compound 15d

A solution of compound (15c) (807 mg, 1.06 mmol), glacial acetic acid(1.0 g, 16 mmol) and tetrabutylammonium fluoride trihydrate (TBAF) (2.36g, 7.5 mmol) in 20 mL dry THF was stirred at room temperature for 3 d.

The reaction mixture was evaporated and purified by silica columnchromatography eluting with (DCM):(MeOH) (9:1) (v/v). Product yield 408mg, 72%.

¹H NMR (CD₃OD) δ 8.46 (1H, s, 6-H), 7.39 (2H, m, Ph), 7.28 (1H, m, Ph),7.12 (1H, m, Ph), 6.75 (1H, bd), 6.27 (1H, dd, 1′-H), 4.44 (1H, dt,4′-H), 3.96 (1H, t, 3′-H), 3.86 (1H, dd, 5′-H), 3.77 (1H, dd, 5″-H),2.72 (2H, d), 2.35-2.27 (2H, m, 2′,2″-H), 1.46 (9H, s, ^(t)Bu), 1.27(3H, d).

Example 62 Preparation of Compound 15e

Compound (15d) (138.5 mg, 260 μmol) was dissolved in 500 μL drytrimethylphosphate. After cooling to 0° C., a solution of phosphorusoxychloride (POCl₃) in dry trimethylphosphate was added (400 μL stocksolution (120 mg/mL), 310 μmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0°C. for 2 h.

Subsequently a solution of tributylammoniumpyrophosphate (200 mg, 420μmol in 1.00 mL dry DMF) and tributylamine (123 mg, 670 μmol in 500 μLdry DMF) was added at 0° C. The reaction was stirred at room temperaturefor 3 min. and then stopped by addition of 1 mL 1.0 Mtriethylammoniumhydrogencarbonate.

Example 63 Preparation of Compound XV

Removal of N-Boc Protection Group.

Following phosphorylation, 50 μl of the phosphorylation reaction mixtureis adjusted to pH=1 using HCl and incubated at room temperature for 30minutes. The mixture is adjusted to pH 5.5 using equimolar NaOH andNa-acetate (pH 5.5) before purification on TLC.

Purification of Nucleotide Derivatives Using Thin-Layer Chromatography(TLC)

From the crude mixture, 20 samples of 2 μl were spotted on kieselgel 60F₂₅₄ TLC (Merck). Organic solvents and non-phosphorylated nucleosideswere separated from the nucleotides derivatives using 100% methanol asrunning solution. Subsequently, the TLC plate is air-dried and thenucleotide-derivative identified by UV-shadowing. Kiesel containing thenucleotide-derivative was isolated and extracted twice using 10 mMNa-acetate (pH=5.5) as solvent. Kieselgel was removed by centrifugationand the supernatant was dried in vacuo. The nucleotide derivative wasresuspended in 50-100 μl H₂O to a final concentration of 1-3 mM. Theconcentration of each nucleotide derivative was evaluated byUV-absorption prior to use in polymerase extension reactions.

Example 64 Polymerase Incorporation of Different Nucleotide Derivatives

Different extension primers were 5′-labeled with ³²P using T4polynucleotide kinase using standard protocol (Promega, cat#4103). Theseextension primers was annealed to a template primer using 0.1 and 3 pmolrespectively in an extension buffer (20 mM Hepes, 40 mM KCl, 8 mM MgCl₂,pH 7.4, 10 mM DTT) by heating to 80° C. for 2 min. and then slowlycooling to about 20° C. The wild type nucleotide or nucleotidederivatives was then added (about 100 μM) and incorporated using 5 unitsAMV Reverse Transcriptase (Promega, part#9PIM510) at 30° C. for 1 hour.The samples were mixed with formamide dye and run on a 10% ureapolyacrylamide gel electrophoresis. The gel was developed usingautoradiography (Kodak, BioMax film). The incorporation can beidentified by the different mobility shift for the nucleotidederivatives compared to the wild type nucleotide. FIG. 49 showsincorporation of various nucleotide derivates. In lane 1-5 the extensionprimer 5′-GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:1) was used together withthe template primer 5′-GCT GTC TGC AAG TGA TAA CCG ATG CCA GTA GC-3′(SEQ ID NO:2), in lane 6-11 extension primer 5′-GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′(SEQ ID NO:3) was used together with the template primer 5′-GCT GTC TGCAAG TGA TGA CCG ATG CCA GTA GC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:4), and in lane 12-15 theextension primer 5′-GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:5) was usedtogether with the template primer 5′-GCT GTC TGC AAG TGA CGT AAC CGA TGCCAG TAG C-3′ (SEQ ID NO:6). Lane 1, dATP; lane 2, Compound XI; lane 3,Compound IX; lane 4, Compound I; lane 5, Compound II; lane 6, nonucleotide; lane 7, dCTP; lane 8, Compound VII; lane 9, Compound X; lane10, Compound IV; lane 11, Compound III; lane 12, no nucleotide; lane 13,dTTP; lane 14, dTTP and dATP; lane 15, dTTP and Compound X. Theseresults illustrate the possibility to incorporate a variety ofnucleotide derivatives of dATP, dTTP and dCTP using different linkersand functional entities. Other polymerases such as Taq, M-MLV and HIVhave also been tested with positive results.

Example 65 Polymerase Incorporation and Hydrolysis of NucleotideDerivatives Containing Cleavable Ester Linkers

An extension primer (5′-GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:1)) was5′-labeled with ³²P using T4 polynucleotide kinase using standardprotocol (Promega, cat#4103) This extension primer was annealed with atemplate primer (5′-TAA GAC CGA TGC CAG TAG C-3′ (SEQ ID NO:7)) using0.1 and 3 pmol respectively in an extension buffer (20 mM Hepes, 40 mMKCl, 8 mM MgCl₂, pH 7.4, 10 mM DTT) by heating to 80° C. for 2 min. andthen slowly cooling to about 20° C. The wild type nucleotide ornucleotide derivatives was then added (about 100 μM) and incorporatedusing 5 units AMV Reverse Transcriptase (Promega, part#9PIM510) at 30°C. for 1 hour. Hydrolysed samples was treated with 0.1 M NaOH at 50° C.for about 15 min. and then titrated with equimolar HCl and NaoAc (pH6.5) and purified by micro-spin gel filtration (BioRad). The sampleswere mixed with formamide dye and run on a 10% urea polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis. The gel was developed using autoradiography (Kodak,BioMax film). The incorporation can be identified by the differentmobility shift for the nucleotide derivatives compared to the wild typenucleotide. FIG. 50 shows the incorporation of various nucleotidederivatives. Lane 1, compound III and Compound II; lane 2, compound IIIand two compound II; lane 3, hydrolysis of compound III and compound II;lane 4, hydrolysis of compound III and two compound II. The results showthat these nucleotide derivatives can be incorporated by the polymerasein this specific order. It also shows that one or both the incorporatedcompound II nucleotide derivatives with an ester linker can specificallybe hydrolysed on the DNA template and the incorporated compound IIInucleotide derivative with no ester linker is intact. This illustratesthe possibility to incorporate different nucleotide derivatives whereone nucleotide derivative can function as the attachment point(non-cleavable linker) and at the same time liberate (cleavable linker)other incorporated nucleotide derivatives form the DNA template tocreate a displaying molecule. In addition, this experimental data showsthat nucleotide derivatives with linkers containing cleavable ester canbe inserted by the polymerase without reaction with amines in the activesite of the polymerase or become hydrolysed during the incorporationprocess.

Example 66 Polymerase Incorporation and Cross-Linking of NucleotideDerivatives

An extension primer (5′-GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:1)) was5′-labeled with ³²P using T4 polynucleotide kinase using standardprotocol (Promega, cat#4103). This extension primer was annealed with atemplate primer (5′-TAG ACC GAT GCC AGT AGC (SEQ ID NO:8)) using 0.1 and3 pmol respectively in the extension buffer (20 mM Hepes, 40 mM KCl, 8mM MgCl₂, pH 7.4, 10 mM DTT) by heating to 80° C. for 2 min. and thenslowly cooled to about 20° C. The nucleotide derivatives was then added(about 100 μM) and incorporated using 5 units AMV Reverse Transcriptase(Promega, part#9PIM510) at 30° C. for 1 hour. The oligonucleotides werethen purified using micro-spin gel filtration (BioRad). Cross-linkingwas performed using 10 mM BS₃[Bis(sulfonylsuccinimide)suberate] (Pierce,cat#21580) for about 1 hour at 30° C. The samples were mixed withformamide dye and run on a 10% urea polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis.The gel was developed using autoradiography (Kodak, BioMax film). FIGS.51A and 51B shows the incorporation and cross-linking (CL) of variousnucleotide derivatives. FIG. 51A: Lane 1, compound III and compound II;lane 2, cross-linked compound III and compound II. FIG. 51B: Lane 1,compound III and compound I; lane 2, cross-linked compound III andcompound I. The results show that these nucleotide derivatives can beincorporated by the polymerase in this specific order. It also showsthat compound III, compound II and compound I is modified by thecross-linking reagent BS₃ (mobility shift) and thereby permitcross-linking (CL) between reactive groups on the nucleotide derivativescompound III-compound II and compound III-compound I mediated by the DNAtemplate. Importantly, the amide groups of the nucleotide derivatives inthe major groove are selectively accessible for modifications whichpromote cross-linking between different incorporated nucleotidederivatives on the DNA template.

Example 67 Polymerase Incorporation of Various Nucleotide Derivatives

An extension primer (5′-TCC GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:9)) was5′-labeled with ³²P using T4 polynucleotide kinase using standardprotocol (Promega, cat#4103). This extension primer was annealed with atemplate primer (5′-TGA ACC GAT GCC AGT AGC-5′ (SEQ ID NO:10)) using 0.1and 3 pmol respectively in the extension buffer (20 mM Hepes, 40 mM KCl,8 mM MgCl₂, pH 7.4, 10 mM DTT) by heating to 80° C. for 2 min. and thenslowly cooled to about 20° C. This template primer was3′Biotin-C6-labeled to prevent extension. The nucleotide derivatives wasthen added (about 100 μM) and incorporated using 5 units AMV ReverseTranscriptase (Promega, part#9PIM510) at 30° C. for 1 hour. The sampleswere mixed with formamide dye and run on a 10% urea polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis. The gel was developed using autoradiography (Kodak,BioMax film). FIG. 52 shows the incorporation of various nucleotidederivatives. Lane 1, wild-type dTTP, dCTP and dATP; lane 2, COMPOUND XI;lane 3; COMPOUND XI and compound III; lane 4, COMPOUND XI, compound IIIand dATP; lane 5, COMPOUND XI, compound III and compound XIII. Theresults show that it is possible to incorporate at least three differentnucleotide derivatives after each other using a polymerase.Consequently, the polymerase allows various nucleotide derivativessimultaneously in the active site without a significant reduction of thecatalytic activity.

Example 68 Polymerase Incorporation of Various Nucleotide Derivatives

An extension primer (5′-TCC GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:9)) was5′-labeled with ³²P using T4 polynucleotide kinase using standardprotocol (Promega, cat#4103). This extension primer was annealed with atemplate primer (5′-TGA ACC GAT GCC AGT AGC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:10)) using 0.1and 3 pmol respectively in the extension buffer (20 mM Hepes, 40 mM KCl,8 mM MgCl₂, pH 7.4, 10 mM DTT) by heating to 80° C. for 2 min. and thenslowly cooled to about 20° C. This template primer was3′Biotin-C6-labeled to prevent extension. The nucleotide derivatives wasthen added (about 100 μM) and incorporated using 5 units AMV ReverseTranscriptase (Promega, part#9PIM510) at 30° C. for 1 hour. The sampleswere mixed with formamide dye and run on a 10% urea polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis. The gel was developed using autoradiography (Kodak,BioMax film). FIG. 53 show the incorporation of various nucleotidederivatives compared to wild type nucleotides. Lane 1, wild-type dCTP,dTTP and dATP; lane 2, compound II, compound III and compound XIII. Theresults show that it is possible to incorporate at least three differentnucleotide derivatives after each other using a polymerase.Consequently, the polymerase allows various nucleotide derivativessimultaneously in the active site without a significant reduction of thecatalytic activity.

Examples 69 to 74 Preparation of Polymerase Mediated Templated MoleculesExample 69 Crosslinking of Encoded Amino Groups by Urea-Bond Formation

A primer (5′-TCC GCT ACT GGT ATC GGX-3′ (SEQ ID NO:11)) where X denotesdeoxy-thymidine-C6-NH₂, (Glen research, cat #10-1039-90) was 5′-labeledwith ³²P using T4 polynucleotide kinase using standard protocol(Promega, cat#4103) and purified by microspin gelfiltration. This primer(0.1 pmol) and 2 pmol of a second primer (5′XCA CTT GCA GAC AGC-3″(SEQID NO:12)) were co-annealed with 1 pmol template primer (5′-GCT GTC TGCAAG TGA CCG ATG CCA GTA GC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:13)) in a hybridisation-buffer(20 mM Hepes, 200 mM NaCl, pH 7.5) by heating to 80° C. for 2 min. andthen slowly cooled to about 20° C. Subsequently, 10 mM ofN′,N′-CarbonylDiimidazole (Sigma-Aldrich) was added and the samplesincubated at 30° C. for 2 hours. The samples were mixed with formamidedye and run on a 10% urea polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis. The gelwas developed using autoradiography (Kodak, BioMax film). A schematicdescription of this experiment is shown below:

Cross-Linking by Urea-Bond Formation

The results shows that adjacent NH2-groups can form a covalent urea-bondby the reaction with Ca No reaction is observed in the absence of atemplate sequence which shows that the reaction is dependent on theclose proximity of NH2-groups guided by the template sequence. Urea bondformation was also observed when 0.5% formaldehyde was used ascross-linking reagent (data not shown).

Example 70 Formation of Amide Bonds by a “Fill-in” Reaction Using aDi-Amino Linker

In this experiment DNA-encoded Carboxylic acids are cross-linked by a1,4 diaminobutane. A primer (5′-TCC GCT ACT GGT ATC GGY-3′ (SEQ IDNO:14)) where Y denotes deoxy-thymidine-C2-COOH (Glen research, cat#10-1035-90), was 5′-labeled with ³²P using T4 polynucleotide kinaseusing standard protocol (Promega, cat#4103) and purified by microspingelfiltration. This primer (0.1 pmol) and 2 pmol of a second primer(5′YCA CTT GCA GAC AGC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:15)) were co-annealed with 1 pmoltemplate primer (5′-GCT GTC TGC AAG TGA CCG ATG CCA GTA GC-3′ (SEQ IDNO:13)) in a hybridisation-buffer (20 mM Hepes, 200 mM NaCl, pH 7.5) byheating to 80° C. for 2 min. and then slowly cooled to about 20° C.Subsequently, 100 mM EDC (Sigma-Aldrich), 10 mM N-hydroxysuccinimide(NHS, Sigma-Aldrich) and 10 mM 1,4 diaminobutane (Merck) was added andthe samples incubated at 30° C. for 2 hours. The samples were mixed withformamide dye and run on a 10% urea polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis.The gel was developed using autoradiography (Kodak, BioMax film). Aschematic description of this experiment is below:

Cross-Linking by “Fill-in” Reaction

The results show that encoded COOH-groups can be covalently coupled by abifunctional linker upon formation of amide bonds. No reaction isobserved in the absence of a template sequence which shows that thereaction is governed by the proximity of COOH-groups provided by thetemplate sequence. Similar results were obtained using otherdiamino-linkers such as 1.6 diaminohexane, spermine and spermidine (datanot shown).

Example 71 Polymerase Incorporation of Nucleotide Derivatives andCross-Linking to Templated Anchor-Points

An extension primer (5′-GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:1)) was5′-labeled with ³²P using T4 polynucleotide kinase using standardprotocol (Promega, cat#4103). This extension primer was annealed with atemplate primer (5′-GCT GTC TGC AAG TGA TAA CCG ATG CCA GTA GC-3′ (SEQID NO:3)) using 0.1 and 3 pmol respectively in the extension buffer (20mM Hepes, 40 mM KCl, 8 mM MgCl₂, pH 7.4, 10 mM DTT) by heating to 80° C.for 2 min. and then slowly cooled to about 20° C. The nucleotidederivatives was then added (about 100 μM) and incorporated using 5 unitsAMV Reverse Transcriptase (Promega, part#9PIM510) at 30° C. for 1 hour.The oligonucleotide complexes were then purified using micro-spin gelfiltration (BioRad). A second primer (5-YCA CTT GCA GAC AGC-3′ (SEQ IDNO:15)) where Y denotes the anchor-point reactive groupdeoxythymidine-C2-COOH, was annealed to the extension complex. Thebuffer composition was adjusted to 20 mM HEPES-KOH, 200 mM NaCl, pH=7.5.Cross-linking was performed using 100 mM EDC and 10 mMN-hydroxysuccinimid for about 2 hours at 30° C. Relevant samples weresubjected to alkaline hydrolysis (0.1 M NaOH, 50° C. for 15 minutes).The samples were mixed with formamide dye and run on a denaturing 10%urea polyacrylamide gel. The gel was developed using autoradiography(Kodak, BioMax film). A schematic outline of this experiment is shownbelow:

Linking by Direct Coupling and Translocation of a β-Amino Acid

The results show that a reactive group from a nucleotide derivativeincorporated by a polymerase can be cross-linked to an anchor pointreactive group by a “fill-in” reaction forming amide bonds. Furthermore,the ester linker of the nucleotide derivative is specifically cleavedwhich allows for the transfer of a templated functional entity to atemplated second entity (anchor point).

Example 72 Polymerase Incorporation of Nucleotide Derivatives andCross-Linking to a Templated Anchor-Point by a “Fill-in” Reaction

An extension primer (5′-GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:1)) was5′-labeled with ³²P using T4 polynucleotide kinase using standardprotocol (Promega, cat#4103). This extension primer was annealed with atemplate primer (5′-GCT GTC TGC AAG TGA TAA CCG ATG CCA GTA GC-3′ (SEQID NO:3)) using 0.1 and 3 pmol respectively in the extension buffer (20mM Hepes, 40 mM KCl, 8 mM MgCl₂, pH 7.4, 10 mM DTT) by heating to 80° C.for 2 min. and then slowly cooled to about 20° C. The compound II(nucleotide derivative) was then added (about 100 μM) and incorporatedusing 5 units AMV Reverse Transcriptase (Promega, part#9PIM510) at 30°C. for 1 hour. The oligonucleotide complexes were then purified usingmicro-spin gel filtration (BioRad). A second primer (5-XCA CTT GCA GACAGC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:12)) where X denotes the anchor-point reactive groupdeoxythymidine-C6-NH₂, was annealed to the extension complex.Cross-linking was performed using 10 mM BS₃[Bis(sulfonylsuccinimide)suberate] (Pierce, cat#21580) for about 2 hoursat 30° C. Relevant samples were subjected to alkaline hydrolysis (0.1 MNaOH, 50° C. for 15 minutes). The samples were mixed with formamide dyeand run on a denaturing 10% urea polyacrylamide gel. The gel wasdeveloped using autoradiography (Kodak, BioMax film). A schematicoutline of this experiment is shown below:

Linking by “Fill-in” and β-Amino Acid Translocation

A copy of the gel is shown in FIG. 54. Lane 1: no nucleotides, lane 2:dTTP, lane 3: compound I, lane 4: dTTP followed by alkaline hydrolysis,lane 5: compound I followed by alkaline hydrolysis, lane 6: dTTPfollowed by BS₃ cross-linking, lane 7: compound I followed by BS₃cross-linking, lane 8: dTTP followed by BS₃ cross-linking and alkalinehydrolysis, and lane 9: compound I followed by BS₃ cross-linking andalkaline hydrolysis. The results show that a reactive group from anucleotide derivative incorporated by a polymerase can be cross-linkedto an anchor point reactive group by a “fill-in” reaction forming amidebonds. Furthermore, the ester linker of the nucleotide derivative isspecifically cleaved which allows for the transfer of a templatedfunctional entity to a templated second entity (anchor point).

Example 73 Polymerase Incorporation of Two Nucleotide Derivatives andthe Cross-Linking Between 3 Encoded Entities

An extension primer (5′-GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:16)) was5′-labeled with ³²P using T4 polynucleotide kinase using standardprotocol (Promega, cat#4103). This extension primer was annealed with atemplate primer (5′-GCT GTC TGC AAG TGA GTA CCG ATG CCA GTA GC-3′ (SEQID NO:17)) using 0.1 and 3 pmol respectively in the extension buffer (20mM Hepes, 40 mM KCl, 8 mM MgCl₂, pH 7.4, 10 mM DTT) by heating to 80° C.for 2 min. and then slowly cooled to about 20° C. The nucleotidederivative V and X was then added (about 100 μM) and incorporated using5 units AMV Reverse Transcriptase (Promega, part#9PIM510) at 30° C. for1 hour. The oligonucleotide complexes were then purified usingmicro-spin gel filtration (BioRad). A second primer (5-YCA CTT GCA GACAGC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:15)) where Y denotes the anchor-point reactive groupdeoxythymidine-C2-COOH, was annealed to the extension complex. Thebuffer composition was adjusted to 20 mM HEPES-KOH, 200 mM NaCl, pH=7.5before addition of 100 mM EDC and 10 mM N-hydroxysuccinimid. Thisresults in the cross-linking of NH₂-groups of MG91 and the COOH group ofV and the COOH of the second primer. Suitable samples were subjected toalkaline hydrolysis (0.1 M NaOH 50° C., 15 minutes). Formamide dye wasadded to the samples before loading on a 10% Urea polyacrylamide gel.The gel was developed using autoradiography (Kodak, BioMax film). Aschematic representation of this experiment is shown below:

Linking of 3 Encoded Functional Entities

This result shows that three encoded functional entities can becross-linked. Furthermore, a specific linker can be selectively cleaved.

Example 74 Polymerase Incorporation and β-Amino Acid Translocation(“Zipping”)

An extension primer (5′-GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:16)) was5′-labeled with ³²P using T4 polynucleotide kinase using standardprotocol (Promega, cat#4103). This extension primer was annealed with atemplate primer (5′-TAG ACC GAT GCC AGT AGC (SEQ ID NO:8)) using 0.1 and3 pmol respectively in the extension buffer (20 mM Hepes, 40 mM KCl, 8mM MgCl₂, pH 7.4, 10 mM DTT) by heating to 80° C. for 2 min. and thenslowly cooled to about 20° C. The nucleotide derivatives II and III wasthen added (about 100 μM) and incorporated using 5 units AMV ReverseTranscriptase (Promega, part#9PIM510) at 30° C. for 1 hour. Theoligonucleotides were then purified using micro-spin gel filtration(BioRad) followed by lyophilization. The oligonucleotide complex wasdissolved in pyridine and Scandiumtriflourmethanesulphonate (catalyst)in pyridine was added to a final concentration of 10 mM and the reactionmixture incubated at 50° C. for 1 hour. Relevant samples were subjectedto alkaline hydrolysis using 0.1 M NaOH at 50° C. for 15 min. Formamidedye was added to the samples before loading on a 10% Urea polyacrylamidegel. The gel was developed using autoradiography (Kodak, BioMax film).

A schematic representation is shown below:

Zipping and Translocation of a β-Amino Acid

The results show that a reactive group of a functional entity can reactwith a reactive group of an other functional entity forming an amidebond. The reaction results in a translocation of a functional entityonto a second functional entity with simultaneous cleavage of the linkerconnecting the first functional entity and the nucleotide derivativethat encode said functional entity. In this experimental set-up adi-peptide comprising two β-amino acids is produced. Thus, incorporationon a DNA template of several (3 or more) nucleotide derivativescomprising β-amino-acids as functional entities would allow multipletranslocation events producing β-peptides acids comprising 3 or moreβ-amino acids. In this example the reaction between functional entityreactive groups occurs in non-aqueous environment. In a preferred aspectthe reaction between functional entity reactive groups occurs directlyupon incorporation of a nucleotide derivative comprising said functionentity by a “zipping” reaction. This can be accomplished by increasingthe reactivity of the ester linkage by introducing various chemicalentities such as thioesters, phenolic esters, thiophenolic esters, di,tri- or tetra-fluoro-activated phenolic- or thiophenolic esters orN-hydroxysuccimide esters.

Example 75 In Silico Experiment a Structural Description of aTemplate-Displayed Molecule Created Using Polymerase Incorporation ofNucleotide Derivatives

One aspect of the present invention utilizes a suitable polymerase forspecific incorporation of nucleotide derivatives on a DNA template. Thisincorporation is accomplished using a template containing codingelements. The template is utilized by the polymerase to incorporate thenucleotide derivatives in a specific order based on these codingelements (FIG. 55). This process is specific due to the recognitiongroups in the nucleotide derivatives.

The different nucleotides are modified at specific positions (e.g. FIG.9) to permit incorporation by the polymerase and at the same time exposethe linked functional entities in or outside the major groove of the DNAstrand exposed to the solvent as shown in FIG. 55A. The consecutiveincorporation of the nucleotide derivatives by the polymerase will allowvarious reactions to occur between the linked functional entities. Thereactions are determined by the type of reactive groups integrated ineach functional entity (examples shown in FIG. 11-21). In addition, theDNA template will arrange the functional entities in specific geometrydependent on the helical structure of the DNA template. This geometrycan for example be controlled by different types of linkers that jointhe functional entity and complementing element. Thus, the linker isdesigned to favour the reaction between the reactive groups on thenucleotide derivatives. The linker design will differ dependent on whichtype and how the reactive groups are arranged in the functionalentities. The linker can also be designed to guide the reaction betweenthe reactive groups in a specific direction. Various reactive groups canalso be used to direct the reaction between the reactive groups. Theclose proximity and the optimized geometry of the nucleotide derivativeswill drastically enhance the reaction rate between the reactive groupsin the different functional entities. The reaction rate between thereactive groups is fast due the high local concentration of theincorporated nucleotide derivatives on the DNA template moleculecompared to if they were allowed to diffuse freely in solution.

FIG. 55A shows one example where nucleotide derivatives Compound II,compound X and compound V are incorporated by a polymerase after eachother on the same DNA template. The synthesis of these nucleotidederivatives are described in detail above. The experimental data showingAMV Reverse transcriptase incorporation of these nucleotide derivativescan be seen in example 64. These incorporated nucleotide derivatives arestructurally arranged, by the linker connecting the complementingelement and the functional entity, to promote reaction between thereactive groups on each nucleotide derivatives. The distance between theamine in compound II and the COMPOUND X amine in the long side chain iscalculated to be between 3.1 Å and 17.5 Å and the distance between theamine in compound II and the COMPOUND X amine in the short side chain tobe between 3.0 Å and 14.6 Å dependent on the precise orientation of thelinker and the functional entity on the DNA template. The distancebetween the carbonyl carbon in nucleotide derivative compound V and thelong side chain amine in nucleotide derivative COMPOUND X is between 4.2Å and 19.8 Å and the distance to the short side chain COMPOUND X amineis calculated to be between 3.7 Å and 16.5 Å also dependent of theprecise orientation. The close proximity of the nucleotide derivativescompound II, COMPOUND X and 1973 on the DNA template will promote achemical linkage of the reactive groups in these nucleotide derivatives.

These three nucleotide derivatives can be linked together through theirreactive groups using various chemical reagents. One possible reagent touse is BS₃ [Bis(sulfonylsuccinimide)suberate] (Pierce, cat#21580).Typically a concentration of about 0.25-10 mM is used of this analog.This reagent will cross-link two amines between nucleotide derivativescompound II and COMPOUND X. This particular reagent will insert a spacerof eight carbons between the reactive groups and is capable of bridginga distance of 11.2 Å in the extended conformation. Thus, the BS₃ linkeris capable of linking the amines of compound II and either of the aminesof compound X. There are other reagents that could be used (longer orshorter) to obtain almost any type of spacers between the reactive aminegroups. The carboxylic acid on nucleotide derivative compound V and oneof the amines on nucleotide derivative COMPOUND X can be linked togetherusing for example 1-Ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide (EDC)and N-Hydroxysuccinimide (NHS). This reaction will make a directconnection between the reactive groups on nucleotide derivativesCOMPOUND X and compound V. These two reactions result in a new moleculecomposed of these nucleotide derivatives covalently attached to eachother through the coupling reagents (FIG. 55B). This particular DNAtemplate-mediated molecule is produced using both fill-in (BS₃) anddirect coupling (EDC/NHS) chemistry. Examples of cross-linking betweenincorporated nucleotide derivatives are shown above. Other types ofcoupling approaches that could be used are zipping by translocation orring opening. These coupling strategies need other types of linkerdesign as described in this invention.

At this stage, all the functional entities are still attached to the DNAtemplate through the linker joining the functional entity and thecomplementing element. The ester element integrated in the linker ofnucleotide derivatives compound II and COMPOUND X can specifically behydrolysed (see example 65 for experimental details) to liberate thefunctional entities of these two nucleotide derivatives from the DNAtemplate. This hydrolysis reaction results in a new molecule that isonly attached to the DNA template through the linker in the compound Vnucleotide derivative (FIG. 55C). This molecule can then extend out fromthe DNA template into the solution and become accessible (displayed) forinteraction with other molecules in the solution.

This templated molecule, as part of a library of many differenttemplated molecules, can finally be used in a selection procedure toidentify molecules that bind to various targets. A detailed descriptionof the selection procedure can be found elsewhere herein.

Example (Model) 76 PNA Synthesis—Base Linked

PNA monomers are linked to complementing elements via cleavable benzyl-or benzyloxycarbonyl moieties bound to the base part of each PNAmonomer. A carboxylic acid is used as anchor point to theoligonucleotide complex. Each building block is annealed to aoligonucleotide template (not shown).

Step A: Polymerization

To an aqueous buffered solution (10 uL, 1M NaCl, 100-500 mM buffer pH6-10, preferably 7-9) of oligonucleotide complexes (0.1-100 uM,preferably 0.5-10 uM) is added a peptide coupling reagent (0.1 mM-100mM, preferably 1-10 mM) exemplified by but not limited to EDC, DCC, DIC,HATU, HBTU, PyBoP, PyBroP or N-methyl-2-chloropyridiniumtetrafluoroborate and a peptide coupling modifier (0.1 mM-1 uM,preferably 1-10 mM) exemplified by but not limited to NHS, sulpho-NHS,HOBt, HOAt, or DhbtOH in a suitable solvent (1 uL) e.g. water, methanol,ethanol, dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, ethylene glycol,acetonitrile or a mixture of these. Reactions run at temperaturesbetween −20° C. and 60° C. Reaction times are between 1 h and 1 week,preferably 1 h-24 h.

The above procedure exemplifies the polymerisation on an 11 uL scale,but any other reaction volume between 1.1 uL and 1.1 L may be employed.

Step B: Linker Cleavage and Deprotection

Cbz- and Benzyl protective groups may be removed by a variety ofmethods, [Greene; 1999;] Due to its mildness, catalytic reduction isoften the method of choice. Combining an insoluble hydrogenationcatalyst e.g. Pd/Al₂O₃, Pd/CaCO₃, Pd/C, PtO₂, or a soluble one e.g.Wilkinsons catalyst and a hydrogen source exemplified but not limited toH₂, ammonium formiate, formic acid, 1,4-cyclohexadien, and cyclohexenein a suitable solvent like water, methanol, ethanol, dimethylformamide,dimethylsulfoxide, ethylene glycol, acetonitrile, acetic acid or amixture of these with the oligo nucleotide complexes removes the Cbz-and benzyl protective groups.

Designates a sequence of 10-20 nucleotides. Link is an oligonuclotide(e.g. a 40′mer) modified at one terminal enabling the attachment of abase from a PNA unit.

Scheme for Building Block Synthesis:

Step A, B:

To a DCM solution (20 mL) of 4-nitrophenolchloroformiate (5 mmol) cooledon an ice/water bath is added (4-Ethynylphenyl)methanol (5 mmol)dissolved in DCM (20 mL) dropwise. After 1 h the ice bath is removed.The reaction is monitored by TLC. Upon completion,(6-Aminopurin-9-yl)-acetic acid ethyl ester (5 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL)is added and left to react 16 h at rt. Volatiles are removed in vacuoand the residue purified by chromatography.

Step C, D:

Steps C[Hyrup; 1996; Bioorganic & medicinal chemistry; 5-23] andD[Schmidt; 1997; Nucleic Acids Research; 4792-4796, Böhler; 1995;Nature; ] are known from the literature.

Step E

A DMF solution (2 mL) of the protected iodo substituted nucleoside (0.34mmol), the alkyne (0.69 mmol, 2 eq), DIEA (0.25 mL) is purged with Arfor 5 min. Tetrakis triphenylphosphine palladium (0.03 mmol, 0.1 eq) andCuI (0.07 mmol, 0.2 eq) is added and the mixture is heated to 50° C. andkept there for 20 h. Evaporation of volatiles followed by chromatographyaffords the desired modified nucleoside that is converted into itscorresponding phosphor amidite and incorporated into an oligonucleotide.

Example (Model) 77 PNA Synthesis—Nitrogen Linked

PNA monomers are linked to complementing elements via cleavable benzylmoieties bound to the base part of each PNA monomer. An amine is used asanchor point to the oligonucleotide complex. Each building block isannealed to a oligonucleotide template (not shown).

Designates a Valence Bond Between Modified Nucleotides. Step A:Polymerization

To an aqueous buffered solution (10 uL, 1M NaCl, 100-500 mM buffer pH6-10, preferably 7-9) of oligonucleotide complexes (0.1-100 uM,preferably 0.5-10 uM) is added a peptide coupling reagent (0.1 mM-100mM, preferably 1-10 mM) exemplified by but not limited to EDC, DCC, DIC,HATU, HBTU, PyBoP, PyBroP or N-methyl-2-chloropyridiniumtetrafluoroborate and a peptide coupling modifier (0.1 mM-1 uM,preferably 1-10 mM) exemplified by but not limited to NHS, sulpho-NHS,HOBt, HOAt, or DhbtOH in a suitable solvent (1 uL) e.g. water, methanol,ethanol, dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, ethylene glycol,acetonitrile or a mixture of these. Reactions run at temperaturesbetween −20° C. and 60° C. Reaction times are between 1 h and 1 week,preferably 1 h-24 h.

The above procedure exemplifies the polymerisation on a 11 uL scale, butany other reaction volume between 1.1 uL and 1.1 L may be employed.

Step B:

Cbz- and Benzyl protective groups may be removed by a variety ofmethods, [Greene and Wuts; 1999;] Due to its mildness, catalyticreduction is often the method of choice. Combining an insolublehydrogenation catalyst e.g. Pd/Al₂O₃, Pd/CaCO₃, Pd/C, PtO₂, or a solubleone e.g. Wilkinsons catalyst and a hydrogen source exemplified but notlimited to H₂, ammonium formiate, formic acid, 1,4-cyclohexadien, andcyclohexene in a suitable solvent like water, methanol, ethanol,dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, ethylen glycol, acetonitril,acetic acid or a mixture of these with the oligo nucleotide complexesremoves the Cbz- and benzyl protective groups.

Example 78 (Model) Polysaccharides General Scheme for PolysaccharideSynthesis

Step A

A primer sequence modified with a carboxylic acid (e.g. Glen ResearchCarboxy-dT cat. No. 10-1035-) that has been attached to a 2-amino-sugaris annealed to a template (not shown) and extended with modifiednucleotides carrying hexose units. Pg is a protection group [Seeberger;2000; Chem. Rev.; 4349-4393, Seeberger; 2001;] exemplified by but notlimited to Ac, Bz, Lev, Piv, Silanes (SiR₃ wherein R is lower alkyl), Lgis a leaving group typical for carbohydrate chemistry exemplified by butnot limited to halogen, trichloroacetamidato, mercaptan, phenol,phosphate esters and sugar nucleoside phosphates or sugar phosphates forenzymatic [Wong; 1994; Tetrahedron Organic Chemistry Series;]carbohydrate synthesis. Polysaccharides may also be synthesised usingglycals.

Step B: Linker Activation

The ester linkages are cleaved with aqueous hydroxide at pH 9-12 at roomtemperature, 16 h in a suitable solvent like water, methanol, ethanol,dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, ethylene glycol, acetonitrile or amixture of these. If Pg is Ac or other base labile protective group,these are removed as well.

Carbohydrates have several OH-functionalities allowing attachment to thecomplementing element. This example shows a 1-6 coupled trimer but anycombination of building blocks may be used.

Attaching carbohydrate units to a template may lessen the tendency ofthese units to fold into secondary structures hence facilitating thesynthesis of polysaccharides.

Example (Model) 79 Acrylamide General Scheme for a PolyacrylamidSynthesis:

A terminally modified primer sequence carrying an iodine atom isannealed to an oligo nucleotide template (not shown) and extended withmodified nucleotides carrying N-substituted acrylamide units.

Step A: Polymerisation

Acrylamides are polymerized in a cascade radical reaction starting byabstraction of the iodine atom by a radical initiator forming a carbonatom based radical. To an aqueous buffered solution (10 uL, 1M NaCl,100-500 mM buffer pH 6-10, preferably 7-9) of oligonucleotide complexes(0.1-100 uM, preferably 0.5-10 uM) carrying N-substituted acrylamidunits is added a radical initiator (0.1 mM-100 mM, preferably 1-10 mM)exemplified by but not limited to peroxymonosulfate, AIBN, di-tertbutylperoxide, tert butylperoxide, hydrogen peroxide or lead acetate ina suitable solvent (1 uL) e.g. water, methanol, ethanol,dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, ethylene glycol, acetonitrile or amixture of these, optionally applying UV-light, ultrasound ormicrowaves. Reactions run at temperatures between −20° C. and 100° C.,preferably between 0° C. and 60° C. Reaction times are between 1 h and 1week, preferably 1 h-24 h.

The above procedure exemplifies the polymerisation on a 11 uL scale, butany other reaction volume between 1.1 uL and 1.1 L may be employed.

Step B: Activation

The N—O bond is susceptible to cleavage by reduction using hydrogenationcatalysts and a suitable hydrogen source or in the presence of certainmetal salts.

To an aqueous buffered solution (10 uL, 1M NaCl, 100-500 mM buffer pH4-10, preferably 4-7) of oligonucleotide complexes (0.1-100 uM,preferably 0.5-10 uM) is added reductants (0.1 mM-100 mM, preferably1-10 mM) exemplified by but not limited to samarium(II) iodide, tin(II)chloride or manganese(III) chloride in a suitable solvent (1 uL) e.g.water, methanol, ethanol, dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, ethyleneglycol, acetonitrile or a mixture of these. Reactions run attemperatures between −20° C. and 100° C., preferably between 0° C. and60° C. Reaction times are between 1 h and 1 week, preferably 1 h-24 h.

The above procedure exemplifies the polymerisation on a 11 uL scale, butany other reaction volume between 1.1 uL and 1.1 L may be employed.

Building Block Synthesis:

Step A:

A DMF solution (20 mL) of the protected iodo substituted nucleoside (3.4mmol), the alkyne (6.9 mmol, 2 eq, Aldrich P51338), DIEA (2.5 mL) ispurged with Ar for 5 min. Tetrakis triphenylphosphine palladium (0.3mmol, 0.1 eq) and CuI (0.7 mmol, 0.2 eq) is added and the mixture isheated to 50° C. and kept there for 20 h. Upon cooling, the mixture isadded 700 mL diethylether. The organic phase is washed with ammoniumchloride (sat, aq, 250 mL) and water (250 mL). Evaporation of volatilesfollowed by stripping with toluene (400 mL) affords the desired modifiednucleoside that is purified by column chromatography (silica gel,Heptane/Ethyl acetate eluent).

Step B:

To the modified nucleoside obtained in Step A (2 mmol) in ethanol (30mL) is added hydrazine hydrate (400 mg, 8 mmol, 4 eq.) and the mixtureis stirred at 20° C. The reaction is monitored by TLC. Upon completionvolatiles are removed in vacuo and the residue purified bychromatography.

Step C:

The amine obtained in Step B (0.5 mmol) is added DMF (10 mL),benzaldehyde (0.6 mmol, 1.2 eq), acetic acid (100 uL, 1%) and sodiumcyanoborohydride (0.6 mmol). Reacts at 20° C., 16 h and is quenched withNaHCO₃ (aq, 10 mL, 5%) and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×100 mL). Thecombined organic phase is washed with NH₄Cl (sat, aq, 50 mL) and water(50) mL and dried over Na₂SO₄. Upon evaporation of ethyl acetate, theresidue may be purified by chromatography.

Step D:

The product obtained in Step C (0.1 mmoL) is dissolved indichloromethane in the presence of 2,6-di tertbutylpyridine (0.4 mmol)and cooled to 0° C. where acrylchloride (0.15 mmol) in dichloromethane(2 mL) is added dropwise. Upon 1 h reaction at 0° C. the temperature isallowed to raise to 20° C. and the reaction is quenched after 1 h withNaHCO₃ (aq, 3 mL, 5%). The phases are separated and the organic phasereduced under vacuum. The residue is taken up in ethyl acetate and iswashed with HCl (aq) (0.1 M, 3 mL), NaHCO₃ (aq, 3 mL, 5%) and water (3mL). Upon evaporation of ethyl acetate, the product is stripped withtoluene (2×20 mL), purified by chromatography and converted into thedesired building block type, e.g. a 5′-triphosphate.

Example (Model) 80 Synthesis of β-Peptides General Scheme for β-PeptideSynthesis:

Step A

The amine precursor may be an amine carrying a protective group [Greeneand Wuts; 1999;] exemplified by but not limited to benzyl carbamate,paramethoxybenzyl carbamate, 2-Trimethylsilylethyl carbamate,2,2,2-Trichloroethyl Carbamate. These protective groups are removed byhydrogenolysis, mild acid treatment, fluoride treatment and treatmentwith Zn dust respectively. Alternatively, the amine precursor may be anitro group or an azide. Both are converted into amines by reduction.The latter is also reduced under mild conditions using phosphines.

Step B

The free amine generated in step A attacks the neighbouring NTA unit tostart the cascade.

Step C

Linker cleavage is carried out using UV radiation (250-500 nm) on abuffered solution of oligonucleotide complexes (pH 5-10) to partiallyrelease a beta peptide.

Example (Model) 81 β-Peptoid Synthesis General Scheme for β-PeptoidSynthesis

Step A

The amine precursor may be an amine carrying a protective group [Greeneand Wuts; 1999;] exemplified by but not limited to benzyl carbamate,paramethoxybenzyl carbamate, 2-Trimethylsilylethyl carbamate,2,2,2-Trichloroethyl Carbamate. These protective groups are removed byhydrogenolysis, mild acid treatment, fluoride treatment and treatmentwith Zn dust respectively. Alternatively, the amine precursor may be anitro group or an azide. Both are converted into amines by reduction.The latter is also reduced under mild conditions using phosphines.

Step B

The free amine generated in step A attacks the neighbouring[1,3]Oxazinan-6-one unit initially forming an unstable aminal due to thering opening. This collapses to an aldehyde releasing a secondary aminewhich is now able to continue the cascade resulting in this case in abeta peptoid.

Building Block Synthesis

Example (Model) 82 Polyamide Synthesis

Alternating monomer building blocks of type X—X and Y—Y are incorporated(principle depicted in FIG. 16) followed by a polymerization stepresulting in bond formation between X and Y on neighbouring monomers.

Building Block Synthesis

Step A: 2+2 Cycloaddition

2-Allyl-malonic acid dimethyl ester (1 mmol) and Chlorosulfonylisocyanate (1 mmol) are mixed in THF at 20° C. and left to react 7 days.The crude product is used without purification.

Step B: Di-Amine Protection

1,3-Diamino-propan-2-ol (1 mmol) and trifluoroacetic anhydride (2 mmol)is mixed in diethylether at 0° C. and left to react at this temperature4 h. The reaction mixture is extracted with 1M HCl, NaHCO₃ (aq) andwater. The product is obtained by evaporation of the organic phase

Step C: Carbamate Formation

2,2,2-Trifluoro-N-[2-hydroxy-3-(2,2,2-trifluoro-acetylamino)-propyl]-acetamide(1.5 mmol) obtained in step B is dissolved in THF along withchlorosulfonyl isocyanate (1.5 mmol) and left to react at 20° C., 16 h.The crude product is used without purification.

Step D: Reductive Amination

The aldehyde (5 mmol) is dissolved in a minimum MeOH and added an amine(6 mmol), sodium cyanoborohydride (6 mmol) and acetic acid. Uponstirring overnight volatiles are removed and the product is purified bycrystallisation or chromatography.

Step E: Sulfonamide Formation

The crude product from step A or step C in THF is added to the amineobtained in step D in a water/THF mixture in the presence of base andleft to react at 20° C., 4 h. Then the mixture is refluxed over night.Upon cooling, the solvent is removed and the residue purified bychromatography.

Oligo Building Block Preparation

The protected diamines and diacids are attached to modifiedoligonucleotides carrying a primary amino functionality using EDC andNHS in an aqueous buffer (pH 5-8, preferably 6-7). The protective groups(both methyl esters and trifluoro acetamides) are removed in aqueousbuffer (pH 10-12). Alternatively, the protection groups remain on thebuilding blocks and are removed after annealing to the oligonucleotidetemplate.

Library Preparation

Polymerisation:

To an aqueous buffered solution (10 uL, 1M NaCl, 100-500 mM buffer pH6-10, preferably 7-9) of oligonucleotide complexes (0.1-100 uM,preferably 0.5-10 uM) carrying di-amines and di-carboxylic acids isadded a peptide coupling reagent (0.1 mM-100 mM, preferably 1-10 mM)exemplified by but not limited to EDC, DCC, DIC, HATU, HBTU, PyBoP,PyBroP or N-methyl-2-chloropyridinium tetrafluoroborate and a peptidecoupling modifier (0.1 mM-100 mM, preferably 1-10 mM) exemplified by butnot limited to NHS, sulpho-NHS, HOBt, HOAt, DhbtOH in a suitable solvent(1 uL) e.g. water, methanol, ethanol, dimethylformamide,dimethylsulfoxide, ethylene glycol, acetonitrile or a mixture of these.Reactions run at temperatures between −20° C. and 60° C. Reaction timesare between 1 h and 1 week, preferably 1 h-24 h. The above procedureexemplifies the polymerisation on a 11 uL scale, but any other reactionvolume between 1.1 uL and 1.1 L may be employed.

Activation (Linker Cleavage):

Linkers are cleaved by treatment with acid pH 0-5, at 0-40° C. for 10min-10 h.

REFERENCES

-   (1) Greene, T. W.; Wuts, P. G. M. Protective Groups in Organic    Synthesis; 3rd ed.; John Wiley & Sons: New York, 1999.-   (2) Hyrup, B.; Nielsen, P. E. Bioorganic & medicinal chemistry 1996,    4, 5-23.-   (3) Schmidt, J. G.; Christensen, L.; Nielsen, P. E.; Orgel, L. E.    Nucleic Acids Research 1997, 25, 4792-4796.-   (4) Böhler, C.; Nielsen, P. E.; Orgel, L. E. Nature 1995, 376.-   (5) Seeberger, P. H.; Haase, W. C. Chem. Rev. 2000, 100, 4349-4393.-   (6) Solid Support Oligosaccharide Synthesis and Combinatorial    Carbohydrate Libraries; Seeberger, P. H., Ed.; Wiley-Interscience:    New York,-   (7) Wong, C.-H.; Whitesides, G. M. Enzymes in Synthetic Organic    Chemistry; Pergamon: Oxford, 1994.

Example (Model) 83 Isolation of α-Peptide Liquid to GlutathioneS-Transferase (GST) from a Library of Templated α-Peptides A) NucleotideDerivative Synthesis

The synthetic strategy for three nucleotide derivatives is shown in thescheme below with a detailed description of the synthesis. Examples ofother synthesized α-amino acid nucleotide derivatives can be found inthe literature (e.g. Ito et al. (1980) J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 102:7535-7541; Norris et al. (1996) J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 118: 5769-5803;Celewicz et al (1998) Pol. J. Chem. 72: 725-734).

Synthesis of LH1, LH7:

EDC (3.2 mmol) is added to an ice-water cooled solution of eitherN-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-tert-butoxy glutamate (3.0 mmol) orN-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-glycine (3.0 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL). Asolution of 4-dimethylamino pyridine (0.3 mmol) and 5-hexynol (4.6 mmol)in dichloromethane (1 mL) is added. The reaction mixture is stirred for1 h. at 0° C., then at room temperature overnight. Solvent wasevaporated off and the residue is taken up in diethyl ether. The slurryis washed with HCl (0.1 M, 25 mL), saturated NaHCO₃ (25 mL) and brine(25 mL), then concentrated to oil. The product is purified byflash-chromatography.

Synthesis of LH4:

6-Iodohexyne (6 mmol) and K₂CO₃ (6 mmol) is added to a solution ofN-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-cysteine (3 mmol) in methanol (5 mL) and DMF (5mL). The reaction mixture is stirred for 1 day at 40° C., thenconcentrated and worked-up by column chromatography.

Synthesis of LH2, LH5 and LH8:

Tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0.6 mmol) and CuI (0.2 mmol) isadded to a degassed solution of the iodo nucleoside (1 mmol), the alkyne(2 mmol) and ethyldiisopropyl amine (2 mmol) in DMF or ethanol (4 mL).The reaction mixture is stirred under an atmosphere of argon. Thereaction was followed by TLC. The reaction is stirred at 50° C. if noreaction occurred at room temperature. The reaction mixture isconcentrated to syrup and worked-up by RP-HPLC (eluent: water→methanol).The corresponding tert-butyldimethyl silyl protected iodo nucleoside isused instead of the unprotected nucleoside when the primary hydroxylgroup is acylated in the course of the reaction. The silyl ether iscleaved after the Sonogashira coupling by treating the compound withtetrabutyl ammonium fluoride (4 eq.) in a solution of ethanol and aceticacid (8 eq.) for 1 day followed by concentration and work-up by RP-HPLC(eluent: water→methanol).

Synthesis of LH3, LH6 and LH9:

Phosphooxychloride (0.11 mmol) is added to an ice-water cooled solutionof the nucleoside (0.1 mmol) in trimethyl phosphate (1 mL). The reactionmixture is stirred under an atmosphere of argon at 0° C. for 1 h. Asolution of bis-n-tributylammonium pyrophosphate (0.2 mmol) in DMF (1mL) and n-tributylamine (0.3 mmol) is then added. The reaction mixtureis stirred for 10 minutes then water (1 mL) was added. The mixture isneutralized with triethylamine and stirred at room temperature for 6 h,then concentrated in vacuo and worked-up by ion pair exchange RP HPLC(eluent 100 mM triethylammonium acetate→100 mM triethylammonium acetatein 80% acetonitrile). Removal of buffer salts from the nucleotide iscarried out by adding water (100 μl) to the mixture and thenconcentrating the slurry at 0.1 mmHg several times finally followed by agel filtration (eluent: water).

B) Library Design and Nucleotide Derivative Incorporation

A templated library can be produced by extension of a primer annealed toa template primer. The template primer encodes the library and can beprepared using standard procedures, e.g. by organ synthesis withphosphoramidite. To generate various types of oligonucleotide librariesone can for example use redundancies, mixed phosphoramidite or doping insynthesizing the oligonucleotides. These oligonucleotide libraries canbe purchased from a supplier making customer defined oligonucleotides(e.g. DNA Technology NS, Denmark or TAG Copenhagen NS, Denmark).

Here, An extension primer (5′-GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:16)) isused together with a template primer (5′-GTA ATT GGA GTG AGC CDD DAC CGATGC CAG TAG C-3′ (SEQ ID NO:18)) where D (underlined, using theambiguity definition from International Union of Biochemistry) is eitherA, G or T. The extension primer is complementary to the template primeras shown below. During extension the primer is extended past theDDD-sequence, leading to insertion of T-, C-, or A-nucleotidederivatives at there position, according to the sequence of theindividual templates. Upon polymerization of the α-amino and precursorsattached to the nucleotides, and cleavage of the linker that connect theamino and the nucleotide, a library with a theoretical diversity of atleast 3³=27 different peptides is created.

Library Design

The extension primer is annealed with the template primer, using about 3pmol of each primer in an extension buffer (20 mM Hepes, 40 mM KCl, 8 mMMgCl₂, pH 7.4, 10 mM DTT), by heating to 80° C. for 2 min and thenslowly cooling to about 20° C. The nucleotide derivatives are then addedto a concentration of about 200 μM each, and incorporated using 5 unitsAMV Reverse Transcriptase (Promega, part#9PIM510) at 30° C. for 1 hour.Unincorporated nucleotide derivatives are removed using a spin-column(BioRad). Further extension may be performed by adding wild type dNTPusing the same conditions described for the nucleotide derivatives.Alternatively, an oligonucleotide that anneal to the sequence downstreamof the DDD sequence is added prior to the extension. The double strandedproduct is purified and transferred to another buffer (100 mMNa-phosphate buffer, pH 8.0) using a spin-column (BioRad).

C) Polymerization and Linker Cleavage

The reactive groups of the incorporated nucleotide derivatives arelinked together using 1-Ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl) carbodiimide(EDC) and N-Hydroxysuccinimide (NHS). This is a routine procedure forcovalent coupling amines and carboxyl groups. Examples of couplingconditions are described in the literature (e.g. NHS coupling kit,IAsys, code # NHS-2005).

EDC and NHS are added to the purified double stranded extension productat appropriate final concentrations of about 100 mM and 10 mM,respectively. This reaction is incubated at 30° C. for 2-16 hours.Excess linking reagents is removed using a spin column. Hydrolysis ofhydrolysable linkers is achieved by incubating the sample at pH 11 (e.g.0.2 M NaOH) for 15 min at 50° C.

D) Selection

One of the possible templated molecules in this particular library, whenusing nucleotide derivatives LH3, LH6 and LH9, is glutathione(Glu-Cys-Gly). The incorporation, reaction between the reactive groupsand cleavage of the linkers to generate glutathione on the DNA templateis shown in the scheme below. It is known that glutathione bindsspecifically and with high affinity to Glutathione S-transferase (GST)and is commonly used for purification of GST-fusion proteins (AmershamPharmacia Biotech). It is also known that glutathione can be immobilizedthrough the sulfur atom without interfering with the binding to GST.Consequently, it is possible to enrich template-displayed glutathioneamong other displayed molecules in a library by performing selectionagainst GST as the target molecule. GST can be produced in a recombinantform as described in the literature (e.g. Jemth et al. (1997) Arch.Biochem. Biophys. 348: 247-54) or be obtained from various suppliers(e.g. Sigma, product #, G5524). Alternatively, an antibody againstglutathione (e.g. Abcam, product name ab64447 or Virogen, product#101-A) can be used as the target molecule.

Template-Mediated Formation of Glutathione

A microtiter plate is coated with about 1 μg streptavidin in a TBSbuffer (50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 150 mM NaCl) overnight at 4° C. Removethe streptavidin solution and wash the wells at least six times with TBSbuffer. Block the wells with 2% BSA in TBS buffer (other examples ofblocking agent that could be used is casein, gelatine,polyvinylpyrrolidone or dried skim milk) for about 30 min. at 37° C.Wash the plate with TBS buffer at least three times. Add 0.1 μgbiotinylated GST to the wells and incubate about 30 min at 20° C. Removenon-bound biotinylated GST by washing with TBS buffer at least sixtimes. Biotinylation of GST is performed using sulfo-NHS-LC-biotin asdescribed in the literature (e.g. Ellis et al. (1998) Biochem. J. 335;277-284). Free streptavidin molecules are blocked with 1 mM biotin for 5min. and excess biotin is removed by wash with TBS buffer at least sixtimes. Add then the templated molecule library to the wells and allowbinding to immobilized GST by incubating at 20° C. for about 1 hour. Toremove the templated molecules not coordinated to the immobilized GST,wash the wells with TBS buffer at least six times. Elute the templatedmolecules bound to GST by incubating with 20 mM reduced glutathione forabout 10-60 min and then transfer the samples from the wells to newtubes.

The eluted (selected) templates are amplified using two amplifyingprimers (forward, 5′Biotin-GCT ACT GGC ATC GGT-3′ (SEQ ID NO:16);reverse, 5′-GTA ATT GGA GTG AGC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:19)) with a standard PCRprotocol (e.g. 5 pmol of each primer, 0.2 mM of dNTP, 2 mM of MgCl₂, and2.5 U of thermal stable Taq polymerase). The PCR is performed with aninitial denaturation at 94° C. for 5 min, 35 cycles of denaturation at94° C. for 30 seconds, annealing at 50° C. for 30 seconds, extension at72° C. for 30 seconds, and then a final extension at 72° C. for 10 min.The 5′biotin in the forward primer is used to remove the sense strand.This is done by incubating the PCR product with streptavidin-coatedmagnetic beads (Dynabeads; Dynal Biotech, Norway) and the singlestranded template is purified as described by the manufacturer. Thepurified antisense strand is finally used as the template primertogether with the extension primer as describe above to generate anenriched library of templated molecules for another round of selection.

The selection and amplification procedure is repeated until appropriateenrichment is obtained. Enrichment can be followed by characterization(sequencing) of recovered template sequences. The nucleotide sequence ofthe templates is obtained using standard sequencing protocols and a DNAsequencer (e.g. MegaBase, Amersham Pharmacia Biotech). Enrichment isobtained when the number of sequences coding for glutathione (C-A-T orT-A-C in the D-D-D region of the template primer) has increased relativeto other sequences in the library after the selection procedure.

This protocol describes incorporation of three different mono-nucleotidederivatives. However, all the mono-nucleotides (including dGTP) could beused in building libraries of templated molecules as described above.Still, this will limit the number of different nucleotide derivatives tofour and thus put a boundary on the library size to 4″ (where N is thenumber of subunits in the templated molecule). However, one may use forexample di-nucleotide derivatives as building blocks in order toincrease the library size to 16″. Incorporation of di-nucleotides bypolymerase has earlier been described (WO 01/16366 A2). Librarydiversity may be further increased using tri-nucleotides ortetra-nucleotide incorporation.

Examples 84 to 99 Preparation of Intermediate Compounds forOligonucleotide Building Block Synthesis General Experimental Methods.

Method 1. General Procedure for N-Trifluoroacetyl Protection of AminoAcids.

A stirred solution of the amino acid (20 mmol) in CF₃COOH (10 mL) at 0°C. was slowly added (CF₃CO)₂O (24 mmol). The reaction mixture wasallowed to slowly warm up to RT and left with stirring over night. Thereaction mixture was evaporated to dryness. Crude products of solidnature was recrystallized from EtOAc/heptane. Crude products of liquidnature was purified by flash column chromatography (CH₂Cl₂/MeOH=10:1 orEtOAc/heptane=2:1). The yield was in general higher than 85%.

Method 2. General Procedure for N-Benzyloxycarbonyl andN-Vinyloxycarbonyl Protection of Amino Acids.

A stirred solution or slight suspension of the amino acid (7.6 mmol) insat. NaHCO₃ (10 mL) was added 2 M NaOH (aq., 3 mL) and then a solutionof either benzylchloroformate or vinyloxychloroformate (8.4 mmol) inCH₃CN (10 mL). The reaction mixture was left with stirring at RT overnight. When TLC indicated complete transformation, the reaction mixturewas added H₂O (90 mL) and pH was adjusted to 10 using 2 M NaOH (aq.).The reaction mixture was washed with Et₂O (3×50 mL) and pH adjusted to2-3 using 1 M HCl (aq.) and then extracted using Et₂O or CH₂Cl₂ (3×100mL). The combined extractions were dried (MgSO₄), filtered andevaporated to dryness to yield a solid product, which was used withoutfurther purification. The yield was in general higher than 70%.

Method 3. General Procedure for N-Tert-Butyloxycarbonyl Protection ofAmino Acids.

A slight suspension of the amino acid (15 mmol) in H₂O (5 mL) and dioxan(5 mL) was added 2M NaOH (aq, 6 mL). The mixture was cooled and stirredat 0° C. (ice bath), and di-tert-butyl dicarbonate was added. Further 2M aqueous NaOH (4 mL) was added. The mixture was slowly heated to RT(over 5 hours), and left with stirring at RT over night. The reactionmixture was added diethyl ether (20 mL) and pH was adjusted (from ˜10 to˜3), using 2 M HCl (aq.). The aqueous phase was extracted, using diethylether (3×20 mL). The combined extracts were dried (MgSO₄), filtered andevaporated to dryness to yield a white solid product, which was usedwithout further purification. The yield was typically 60-75%.

Method 4. General Procedure for Formation of NHM Esters of N-ProtectedAmino Acids.

A stirred solution of the N-protected amino acid (0.5 mmol) andN-hydroxymaleimide (0.62 mmol) in anhydrous THF (5 mL) at 0° C. under N₂was added diisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC) (0.64 mmol) and the solutionallowed to slowly warm up to RT and left with stirring over night. Thereaction mixture was filtered and the precipitate washed with a smallvolume of EtOAc/heptane=2/1. The filtrate was evaporated to almostdryness, diluted with a minimum of CH₂Cl₂ and subjected to flash columnchromatography (EtOAc/heptane=2/1), yielding the product as a whitesolid in typically 60-70%.

Method 5. General Procedure for Formation of NHM Esters from CarboxylicAcid Chlorides.

A stirred solution of N-hydroxymaleimide (4 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (16 mL) at0° C. was slowly added the carboxylic acid chloride (4 mmol). Thereaction mixture was allowed to slowly warm up to RT and left withstirring over night. The reaction mixture was diluted with CH₂Cl₂ (16mL) and washed with 10% citric acid (aq., 3×25 mL), sat. NaHCO₃ (aq.,2×25 mL) and sat. NaCl (aq., 1×25 mL). The organic phase was dried(MgSO₄), filtered, and evaporated to dryness to yield the product as awax or liquid in 40-60% yield. The product was used without furtherneeded purification.

Method 6. General Procedure for S-Tritylation of Mercaptanes.

A solution of the mercaptane (20 mmol) and pyridine (40 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂(75 mL) at RT was added tritylchloride (22 mmol) and the reaction leftwith stirring over night. The volume of the reaction mixture was reducedto a minimum and then subjected to flash chromatography (SiO₂ pretreatedwith pyridine prior to column packing) (eluent: CH₂Cl₂/MeOH=10/0.5). Theproduct was isolated as an oil or a sticky wax in some instances.

Method 7. General Procedure for O-Acylation of 4-Hydroxybenzaldehydes.

To a stirred solution of the hydroxybenzaldehyde (20 mmol) in dry DMF(10 mL) at 0° C. was slowly added an acid chloride (25 mmol) in diethylether (20 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 15 minutesand at rt for 1 hr. Water (20 ml) was added and the reaction mixture wasextracted with ether (3×10 mL). The combined organic phases was washedwith water (2×10 mL), dried over MgSO₄ and the solvent removed in vacuo.The crude was redissolved in dichloromethane (5 mL) and filtered througha pad of silica. The solvent was removed in vacuo. The yield was ingeneral higher than 75%.

Method 8. General Procedure for Formation of Diaminopolyethyleneglocols.

The corresponding polyethyleneglycol-diol (0.8 mmol), obtained asdescribed by Baker et al. J. Org. Chem. (1999), 64, 6870-6873, wasdissolved in dry THF (10 mL). Tosyl chloride (2.44 mmol) was added andthe reaction mixture was cooled on ice. NaOH (5.5 mmol) dissolved inwater (2 mL) was added dropwise and the reaction mixture was stirred atrt o/n. The reaction mixture was extracted with diethyl ether (3×5 mL)and the combined organic phases washed with NaCl (sat., 3×3 mL) anddried over MgSO₄. The crude was redissolved in dry acetonitrile (3 mL)and treated with NaN₃ (2.8 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated to 75°C. o/n. The white solid was filtered off and extracted with acetonitrile(2×2 mL). Triphenylphosphine (2.8 mmol) and water (2 mL) was added tothe combined organic phases and the reaction mixture was stirred o/n.IRA-120 H⁺ (1 g) was added and the reaction mixtured was agitated for 1hour. The beads were filtered off, washed with dichloromethane (10×3 mL)and the final compound eluted with 6M HCl (aq., 10×3 mL). The solutionwas evaporated in vacuo affording the diamino polyethylene glycol in40-50% yield.

Example 84 Preparation of 3-phenyl-3-tertbutoxycarbonylamino-propionicacid 2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester (XVI)

The compound was prepared in two steps from the commercially availableDL-3-amino-3-phenylpropionic acid by use of method 3 followed by method4.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 7.28-7.42 (m, 5H (ar)); 6.74 (s, 2H); 5.1-5.3 (m, 2H(NH+CH)); 3.24 (dd, 1H); 3.13 (dd, 1H); 1.46 (s, 9H).

Example 85 Preparation of 3-tertbutoxycarbonylamino-butanoic acid2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester

The compound was prepared in two steps from the commercially availableDL-3-aminobutyric acid by use of method 3 followed by method 4.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 6.80 (s, 2H); 4.83 (br s, 1H(NH)), 4.05-4.15 (m, 1H);2.8-2.95 (m, 2H); 1.46 (s, 9H); 2.56 (d, 3H).

Example 86 Preparation of 3-tertbutoxycarbonylamino-propionic acid2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester

The compound was prepared in two steps from the commercially availablebeta-alanine by use of method 3 followed by method 4.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 6.80 (s, 2H); 5.09 (br s, 1H(NH)); 3.48-3.54 (m, 2H);2.84 (t, 2H); 1.45 (s, 9H).

Example 87 Preparation of 3-Benzyloxycarbonylamino-3-phenyl-propionicacid 2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester3-Benzyloxycarbonylamino-3-phenyl-propionic acid2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester

The compound was prepared in two steps from the commercially availableDL-3-amino-3-phenylpropionic acid by use of method 2 followed by method4.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 7.55-7.20 (m, 10H); 6.75 (s, 2H); 5.55 (br., 1H);5.35-5.25 (m, 1H); 5.15 (s, 2H); 3.35-3.10 (m, 2H).

Example 88 3-Phenyl-3-vinyloxycarbonylamino-propionic acid2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester

The compound was prepared in two steps from the commercially availableDL-3-amino-3-phenylpropionic acid by use of method 2 followed by method4.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 7.45-7.30 (m, 5H); 7.20 (dd, 1H); 6.75 (s, 2H);5.75-5.60 (br., 1H); 5.30 (q, 1H); 4.70 (d, 1H); 4.50 (d, 1H); 3.30-3.15(m, 2H)

Example 89 Preparation of Tritylsulfanyl-acetic acid2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester

The compound was prepared in two steps from commercially available2-mercaptoacetic acid by use of method 6 followed by method 4.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 7.45-7.20 (m, 15H); 6.75 (s, 2H); 3.20 (s, 2H).

Example 90(R)-2-(2,2,2-Trifluoro-acetylamino)-3-tritylsulfanyl-propionic acid2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester (XXII)

The compound was prepared in three steps from commercially availableL-cysteine by use of method 1 followed by method 6 and method 4.

Example 91 Preparation of Acetic acid 2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-ylester

The compound was prepared in one step from commercially availableacetylchloride and N-hydroxymaleimide by use of method 5.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 6.75 (s, 2H); 2.35 (s, 3H).

Example 92 Preparation of Propionic acid2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester

The compound was prepared in one step from commercially availablepropanoylchloride and N-hydroxymaleimide by use of method 5.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 6.75 (s, 2H); 2.65 (q, 2H); 1.80 (t, 3H).

Example 93 Preparation of Butyric acid 2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-ylester

The compound was prepared in one step from commercially availablebutanoylchloride and N-hydroxymaleimide by use of method 5.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 6.75 (s, 2H); 2.60 (t, 2H); 1.80 (sxt, 2H); 1.05 (t,3H).

Example 94 Preparation of S-Trityl-4-mercaptobenzoic acid2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester

The compound was prepared in two steps from the commercially available4-mercaptobenzoic acid, by S-tritylation according to method 6 followedby esterification according to method 4.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 8.75 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.45-7.20 (m, 15H), 7.05 (d,J=8.8 Hz, 2H), 6.80 (s, 2H).

Example 95 Preparation of Tetrakis(aminometyl)methane tetrahydrochlorid

Tetrakis(aminomethyl)methane tetrahydrochloride was prepared by aslightly modified method compared to Fleischer et al. J. Org. Chem.(1971), 36, 3042-44. Pentaerythritol (2.01 g; 14.76 mmol) was mixed withtosyl chloride (14.07 g; 73.81 mol) in dry pyridine (50 mL). The mixturewas stirred o/n. The crude reaction mixture was transferred to water(100 mL). MeOH (200 mL) and HCl conc. (80 mL) was added and the whiteprecipitate was filtered off and washed with water (100 mL) and MeOH(200 mL). LC-MS show pentaerythritol tetratosylate. Pentaerythritoltetratosylate (4.0 g, 5.31 mmol) was dissolved in dry DMF (50 mL) andNaN₃ (3.45 g; 53.1 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was heated to100° C. o/n. Water (100 mL) was added and the reaction mixture wasextracted with diethyl ether (3×100 mL). THF (300 mL) was added and thediethyl ether was removed in vacuo. Triphenylphosphine (6.95 g, 26.5mmol) and NH₃ conc. (25 mL) were added to the THF solution and thereaction mixture was stirred at rt o/n. The solvents were removed invacuo, redissolved in dichloromethane (500 mL) and extracted with 2M HCL(2×150 mL). The aqueous phase was washed with dichloromethane (3×100 mL)and evaporated in vacuo. MeOH (20 mL) was added and the white solid wasfiltered off and washed with MeOH (2×10 mL). Yield 1.12 g (76%).

¹H-NMR (D₂O): 3.28 (s).

Example 96 Preparation of Propionic acid 4-formyl-phenyl ester

The compound was prepared according to method 7 from commerciallyavailable 4-hydroxybenzaldehyde.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 10.00 (s, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 2H), 7.31 (d, J=6.7Hz, 2H), 2.65 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.32 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 3H).

Example 97 Preparation of Butanoic acid 4-formyl-phenyl ester

The compound was prepared according to method 7 from commerciallyavailable 4-hydroxybenzaldehyde.

¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 9.95 (s, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 2H), 7.28 (d, J=6.7 Hz,2H), 2.55 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.80 (q, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.00 (d, J=7.5 Hz,3H).

Example 98 Preparation of3,6,9,12,15,18,21,24,27,30,33-undecanoxapentatriacontane-1,35-diamine

Prepared according to method 8 in 48% yield. MS-H⁺=545.2 (expectedMS-H⁺=544.6)

Example 99 Preparation of3,6,9,12,15,18,21,24,27,30,33,36,39-Tridecanoxahentetracontane-1,41-diamine

(05028) Prepared according to method 8 in 40% yield. MS-H^(P)=633.3(expected MS-H^(P)=632.8).

Example 100 Design and Testing of Oligonucleotide Linkers CarryingZipper Boxes

Experiments 100-1 to 100-4 were performed in order to test theefficiency of different designs of zipper boxes. The data obtainedfollow immediately below, then follows a discussion of the data.

Materials. Buffers.

Buffer A (100 mM Hepes pH=7.5, 1 M NaCl)Buffer B: (100 mM NaPO₄ pH=6, 1 M NaCl)Buffer C: (100 mM NaBorate pH=9, 1 M NaCl)Buffer D: (100 mM NaBorate pH=10, 1 M NaCl)Buffer E: (500 mM NaPO₄ pH=7, 1 M NaCl)Buffer F: (500 mM NaPO₄ pH=8, 1 M NaCl)

Annealing of DNA Oligonucleotides.

Mix oligos in relevant buffer and heat at 80° C. then cool to 28° C.(−2° C./30 sek).

5′-Labeling with ³²P.

Mix 200 pmol oligonucleotide, 2 μl 10×phosphorylation buffer (Promegacat#4103), 1 μl T4 Polynucleotid Kinase (Promega cat#4103), 1 μl γ-³²PATP, H₂O ad 20 μl. Incubate at 37° C., 10-30 minutes.

PAGE (Polyacrylamide Gel Electrophoresis).

The samples are mixed with formamide dye 1:1 (98% formamide, 10 mM EDTA,pH 8,

0.025% Xylene Cyanol, 0.025% Bromphenol Blue), incubate at 80° C. for 2minutes, and run on a denaturing 10% polyacrylamide gel. Develop gelusing autoradiography (Kodak, BioMax film).

Oligonucleotide Building Blocks

AH36: (SEQ ID NO: 20) 5′-CGACCTCTGGATTGCATCGGTCATGGCTGACTGTCCGTCGAATGTGTCCAGTTAC X AH37: (SEQ ID NO: 21) 5′-ZGTAACTGGACTGTAAGCTGCCTGTCAGTCGGTACTGACCTG TCGAGCATCCAGCT AH51:(SEQ ID NO: 22) 5′-Z GTAACACCTGTGTAAGCTGCCTGTCAGTCGGTACTGACCTGTCGAGCATCCAGCT AH38: (SEQ ID NO: 23)5′-AGCTGGATGCTCGACAGGTCCCGATGCAATCCAGAGGTCG AH67: (SEQ ID NO: 24)5′-ZCATTGACCTGTGTAAGCTGCCTGTCAGTCGGTACTGACCTG TCGAG-CATCCAGCT AH69:(SEQ ID NO: 25) 5′-AGZAACACCTGTGTAAGCTGCCTGTCAGTCGGTACTGACCTGTCGAG-CATCCAGCT AH66: (SEQ ID NO: 26)5′-ZTTGTAACTGGACTGTAAGCTGCCTGTCAGTCGGTACTGACC TGTCGAGCATCCAGCT AH65:(SEQ ID NO: 27) 5′-CGACCTCTGGATTGCATCGGTCATGGCTGACTGTCCGTCGAATGTGTCCAGTTACTTXZipper box sequences are underlined.

Experiment 100-1 (FIG. 56):

Mix 2 μl buffer B, 5 μl Ah36 (0.4 pmol/ul), 1 μl Ah37 (2 pmol/ul), 1 μlAh38 (2 pmol/ul), 1 μl H₂O.Mix 2 μl buffer B, 5 μl Ah36 (0.4 pmol/ul), 1 μl Ah37 (2 pmol/ul), 2 μlH₂O.Anneal by heating to 80° C., then cool to 44° C. (−2° C./30 sek).Add 1 μl 100 mM NHS and 1 μl 1 M EDC. Incubate at indicated temperatures(see below) for 45 minutes, then add 2 μl Buffer D. Incubate for about 2h, and then analyze by 10% urea polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis.

Incubation Temperatures:

45° C., 48.2° C., 53.0° C., 58.5° C., 63.1° C., 65.6° C.

Experiment 100-2 (FIGS. 57, A and B):

Mix 2 μl buffer B, 1 μl Ah36 (2 pmol/ul), 1 μl Ah51 (2 pmol/ul), 1 μlAh38 (2 pmol/ul), 5 μl H₂O.

Mix 2 μl buffer B, 1 μl Ah36 (2 pmol/ul), 1 μl Ah51 (2 pmol/ul), 6 μlH₂O

Anneal by heating to 80° C., then cool to 35° C. (−2° C./30 sek)(Fortemperatures 1 to 6), or heat to 80° C., then cool to 15° C. (−2° C./30sek)(For temperatures 7 to 12).

Add 1 μl 100 mM NHS and 1 μl 1 M EDC. Incubate at indicated temperatures(see below) for 1 h, then add 2 μl Buffer D. Incubate for 1 h, and thenanalyze by 10% urea polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, as describedabove.

Incubation Temperatures:

1) 34.9° C., 2) 36.3° C., 3) 40.3° C., 4) 45.7° C., 5) 51.0° C., 6)55.77, 7) 14.9° C., 8) 17.8° C., 9) 22.7° C., 10) 28.3° C., 11) 31.0°C., 12) 36° C.

Mix 2 μl buffer B, 0.5 μl Ah36 (2 pmol/ul), 1 μl Ah51 (2 pmol/ul), 1 μlAh38 (2 pmol/ul), 5.5 μl H₂O

Mix 2 μl buffer B, 0.5 μl Ah36 (2 pmol/ul), 1 μl Ah51 (2 pmol/ul), 6.5μl H₂O

Anneal by heat at 80° C. then cool to 5° C. (−2° C./30 sek).

Add 1 μl 100 mM NHS and 1 μl 1 M EDC. Incubate at different temperatures(see below) for 1 h, then add 2 μl Buffer D. Incubate for 1 h, and thenanalyze by 10% urea polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis.

Incubation Temperatures:

1) 5.9° C., 2) 9.9° C., 3) 12.6° C., 4) 18.3° C., 5) 23.3° C., 6) 27.9°C. 7) 35.6° C., 8) 45.9° C.

Experiment 100-3 (FIGS. 58, A and B).

Mix 2 μl buffer A, 1 μl relevant oligo 1 (2 pmol/ul), 1 μl relevantoligo 2 (10 pmol/ul), 1 μl relevant oligo 3 (10 pmol/ul), 5 μl H₂O. (Seetable below). Anneal as described above.

Add 1 μl 100 mM NHS and 1 μl 1 M EDC. Incubate at differenttemperatures 1) 7.7° C., 2) 15.4° C., 3) 21.0° C. 4) 26.2° C. for about2 h, and 5) 10° C. for 1 sec., then 35° C. for 1 sec.—repeat 99 times.Analyze by 10% urea polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis.

Experiment Oligo 1 (³²P) Oligo 2 Oligo 3 100-3-1 Ah36 None Ah38 100-3-2Ah36 None None 100-3-3 Ah36 Ah51 Ah38 100-3-4 Ah36 Ah51 None 100-3-5Ah36 Ah67 Ah38 100-3-6 Ah36 Ah67 None 100-3-7 Ah36 Ah69 Ah38 100-3-8Ah36 Ah69 None

Experiment 100-4 (FIG. 59).

Mix 2.5 μl buffer A, 1 μl relevant oligo 1 (2 pmol/ul), 1 μl relevantoligo 2 (10 pmol/ul), 1 μl relevant oligo 3 (10 pmol/ul), 4.5 μl H₂O.(See table below). Anneal by heating to 80° C. and then cool to 30° C.or 55° C. Add 1 μl 100 mM NHS and 1 μl 1 M EDC. Incubate at 30° C. or55° C. Then analyze by 10% urea polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis.

Oligo 1 Experiment (³²P-labelled) Oligo 2 Oligo 3 100-4-1 Ah36 Ah37 Ah38100-4-2 Ah36 Ah37 None 100-4-3 Ah65 Ah66 Ah38 100-4-4 Ah65 Ah66 None100-4-5 Ah36 Ah66 Ah38 100-4-6 Ah36 Ah66 None 100-4-7 Ah65 Ah37 Ah38100-4-8 Ah65 Ah37 None

Discussion of the Results

The cross-linking efficiency using oligos carrying reactive groups(amine or carboxylic acid) where the linker connecting the reactivegroup and the annealing region was approximately 25 nucleotides, wasexamined.

In an experiment oligonucleotides Ah36 (carrying a carboxylic acid) andAh67 (carrying an amine) were used. The template used (Ah38) anneals thetwo oligonucleotides immediately adjacent, i.e. with a spacing of zerobase pairs. Under the conditions of the experiment, less than 5%cross-linking efficiency is observed, and only at the highest testedtemperature (FIGS. 58, A and B, lanes 5).

In order to improve the cross-linking efficiency, we introduced aso-called zipper box sequence at the 5′- and 3′ end of oligos Ah67 andAh36, respectively, the same termini that carries the reactive groups.The zipper-boxes are complementary sequences, and thus may bring thereactive groups of the two oligos into closer proximity. Two differentlengths of zipper boxes were tested, namely a 10′mer zipper box(Ah37/Ah36 forming a DNA duplex of 10 base pairs) and a 5′mer zipper box(Ah36/51 forming a DNA duplex of 5 base pairs). See figure below.

Moreover, different designs of zipper boxes were tested, e.g. oligos inwhich the reactive group is attached immediately adjacent to the zipperbox (Ah36, Ah37 and Ah36/Ah51), or placed two nucleotides upstream fromthe zipper box (Ah65/Ah66), or placed in the middle of the zipper box(Ah67).

We first tested the effect of the 5′mer zipper box on cross-linkingefficiency. As can be seen, the 5′mer zipper box improves thecross-linking efficiency dramatically (FIGS. 58, A and B, compare lanes3 and lanes 5). Note that the template is absolutely required forcross-linking at all temperatures tested. The highest cross-linkingefficiency is obtained when the temperature is cycled 99 times up anddown between 10° C. and 35° C. (FIG. 58B). A high efficiency is alsoobtained when the temperature is kept constant at 21° C. or 26° C.(FIGS. 58A and B, lanes 3). The cross-linking efficiency does notimprove further at temperatures above 26° C. (FIGS. 57, A and B).

We next tested the efficiency of cross-linking in the 10′mer zipper boxformat. Oligos Ah36 and Ah37 were annealed to template Ah38, and thecross-linking efficiency examined at various temperatures. Asurprisingly high degree of cross-linking in the absence of template wasobserved (FIG. 55, 45° C. and 48.2° C.). However, at temperatures above58.5° C., no cross-linking is observed in the absence of template.

Next, the different locations of the reactive groups relative to thezipper box was tested. As shown in FIGS. 58, A and B, lanes 7, thecross-linking efficiency decreases dramatically when one of the tworeactive groups is located in the middle of the zipper box (i.e., thereactive group is attached to a nucleotide involved in DNA double helixformation; Ah67).

The location of the reactive groups relative to the zipper box was alsotested in the context of the 10′mer zipper box. In this context, whenboth reactive groups are separated from the zipper box by twonucleotides (Ah65, Ah66), the efficiency of cross-linking is slightlydecreased (FIG. 59, compare lanes 1 and 3). The cross-linking efficiencyis not changed dramatically when different combinations of Ah65, Ah66,Ah36 and Ah37 are tested (i.e., when the reactive groups are placedimmediately next to the zipper box, or two nucleotides upstream). Notethat the template is not absolutely required at all temperatures in thecontext of the 10′mer zipper box. This template-independency isparticularly pronounced at lower temperature (e.g., FIG. 59, 30° C.).

Examples 101 to 104 General Methods for Preparation of OligonucleotideBuilding Blocks Example 101 Procedure for Transforming OligonucleotideComprising a Carboxylic Acid to an Amino or Aminomethyl TerminatedLinker

The following oligos containing a modified nucleobase, with a carboxylicacid moiety, were synthesised using the conventional phosphoramiditeapproach:

A: (SEQ ID NO: 28) 5′-GCT ACT GGC XTC GGT B: (SEQ ID NO: 29)5′-TCA CTX GCA GAC AGC C: (SEQ ID NO: 20)5′-CGA CCT CTG GAT TGC ATC GGT CAT GGC TGA CTGTCC GTC GAA TGT GTC CAG TTA C X D: (SEQ ID NO: 30)5′-CTG GTA ACG CGG ATC GAC CTT CAT GGC TGA CTGTCC GTC GAA TGT GTC CAG TTA C X E: (SEQ ID NO: 31)5′-ACG ACT ACG TTC AGG CAA GAT CAT GGC TGA CTGTCC GTC GAA TGT GTC CAG TTA C X

X was incorporated using the commercially available carboxy-dTphosphoramidite (10-1035-90 from Glen research). The underlinednucleobases represent the zipper region.

Schematic Representation of the Transformation

An oligo (20 pmol) was mixed with a diamino compound (20 uL of a 0.1 Msolution), sodiumphosphate buffer (15 uL of a 100 mM solution, pH=6),NHS (5 uL of a 100 mM solution) and EDC (5 uL of a freshly prepared 1 Msolution). The mixture was left at 30° C. for 45 minutes and treatedwith sodium borate (20 uL of a 100 mM solution, pH=10) and left at 30°C. for additional 45 minutes. The oligo was purified by conventionalEtOH precipitation. The products were end-labelled with ³²P and thepurity analysed by PAGE. In all cases no starting oligo were detectedand a new band, which migrated slower on the gel, appeared.

Examples of used diamino compounds: XXX, XXXI and the commerciallyavailable N,N′-dimethylethylenediamine (D15, 780-5 from Sigma-Aldrich).

Example 102 Method for Transforming a Carboxylic Acid ContainingOligonucleotide to a Trisamine Scaffold Building Block

The following oligos containing a modified nucleobase, with a carboxylicacid moiety, were synthesised using the conventional phosphoramiditeapproach:

F: (SEQ ID NO: 32) 5′-GAC CTG TCG AGC ATC CAG CTG TCC ACA ATG X G:(SEQ ID NO: 33) 5′-GAC CTG TCG AGC ATC CAG CTT CAT GGG AAT TCCTCG TCC ACA ATG X H: (SEQ ID NO: 34)5′-GAC CTG TCG AGC ATC CAG CTT CAT GGG AAT TCC TCG TCC ACA ATG XT I:(SEQ ID NO: 35) 5′-XGT AAC TGG AGG GTA AGC TCA TCC GAA TTC GGTACT GAC CTG TCG AGC ATC CAG CT

X was incorporated using the commercially available carboxy-dTphosphoramidite (10-1035-90 from Glen research). The underlinednucleobases represent the zipper region.

Schematic Representation of the Reaction:

An oligo containing one modified nucleobase with a carboxylic acidmoiety (1 nmol) was mixed with water (100 uL), hepes buffer (40 uL of a200 mM, pH=7.5), NHS (20 uL of a 100 mM solution), EDC (20 uL of afreshly prepared 1 M solution) and the tetraamine (XXVII) (20 uL of a100 mM solution). The reaction mixture was left o/n at room temperature.The volume was reduced to 60 uL by evaporation in vacuo. The pure oligowas obtained by addition of NH₃ conc. (20 uL) followed by HPLCpurification. It was possible to isolate a peak after approximately 6min using the following gradient: 0-3 minutes 100% A then 15% A and 85%B from 3-10 minutes then 100% B from 10-15 minutes then 100% A from15-20 minutes. A=2% acetonitrile in 10 mM TEAA and B=80% acetonitrile in10 mM TEAA.

After HPLC purification 2-3 pmol was end-labelled with ³²P and thepurity analysed by PAGE gel (see FIG. 60). The PAGE gel show theattachment of the tetraamine (XXVI) to an oligo containing a modifiednucleobase with a carboxylic acid moiety.

Lane 1: Reference oligo F.Lane 2: HPLC purified trisamine product of oligo F.Lane 3: Reference oligo G.Lane 4: HPLC purified trisamine product of oligo G.Lane 5: Reference oligo H.Lane 6: HPLC purified trisamine product of oligo H

Example 103 General Procedure for Attachment of a Functional Entity to aThio Oligo

The following oligo containing a modified nucleobase, with aS-triphenylmethyl protected thio moiety, was synthesised using theconventional phosphoramidite approach:

J: (SEQ ID NO: 36) 5′-W CA TTG ACC TGT GTA AGC BTG CCT GTC AGT CGGTAC TCG ACC TCT GGA TTG CAT CGG K: (SEQ ID NO: 37)5′-WCA TTG ACC TGT CTG CCB TGT CAG TCG GTA CTG TGG TAA CGC GGA TCG ACC TL: (SEQ ID NO: 38) 5′-W CA TTG ACC TGA ACC ATG BTA AGC TGC CTG TCAGTC GGT ACT ACG ACT ACG TTC AGG CAA GA M: (SEQ ID NO: 39) 5′-WCA TTG ACC TGA ACC ATG TBA AGC TGC CTG TCAGTC GGT ACT TCA AGG ATC CAC GTG ACC AG

W was incorporated using the commercially available thiol modifierphosphoramidite (10-1926-90 from Glen research). B is an internal biotinincorporated using the commercially available phosphoramidite(10-1953-95 from Glen research). The nucleobases which are underlinedand italic indicates the zipper region.

The S-triphenylmethyl protected thio oligo (10 nmol) was evaporated invacuo and resuspended in TEAA buffer (200 uL of a 0.1M solution,pH=6.4). AgNO₃ (30 uL of a 1 M solution) was added and the mixture wasleft at room temperature for 1-2 hours. DTT (46 uL of a 1M solution) wasadded and left for 5-10 minutes. The reaction mixture was spun down(20.000 G for 20 minutes) and the supernatant was collected. The solidwas extracted with additional TEAA buffer (100 ul of a 0.1 M solution,pH=6.4). The pure thio oligo was obtained by conventionalEtOH-precipitation.

Schematic Representation of the Reaction:

The thio oligo (1 nmol) was dried in vacuo and treated with a buildingblock comprising the functional entity (05087) in dimethylformamide (50ul of a 0.1 M solution) and left o/n at rt. The thio oligo was spun down(20.000 G for 10 minutes) and the supernatant removed. Dimethylformamide(1 mL) was added and the loaded thio oligo was spun down (20.000 G for10 minutes). The dimethylformamide was removed and the loaded thio oligowas resuspended in TEAA buffer (25 uL of a 0.1M solution, pH=6.4) andanalysed by HPLC.

Examples of building blocks used: XXVI, XVI, XVII, XVIII, XXIII, XXIV,XXV)

Example 104 General Procedure for Attachment of a Functional Entity toan Amino or Aminomethyl Terminated Oligo

The following oligo containing a modified nucleobase, with an aminogroup was synthesised, using the conventional phosphoramidite approach:

N: (SEQ ID NO: 40) 5′-ZGT AAC ACC TGT GTA AGC TGC CTG TCA GTCGGT ACT GAC CTG TCG AGC ATC CAG CT

Z contain the modified nucleobase with an aminogroup, incorporated usingthe commercially available amino modifier C6 dT phosphoramidite(10-1039-90 from Glen research)

Furthermore, oligo C-E were transformed into the correspondingaminomethyl terminated oligo, as described earlier.

The oligos were used in the following experiment representedschematically below:

An amino or aminomethyl oligo (3 pmol) was mixed with a phosphate buffer(3 uL of a 0.1 M solution, pH=6) and NaBH₃CN (3 uL of a 1 M solution inMeOH). A building block comprising the functional entity (3 uL of a 1 Msolution in MeOH) was added and the mixture was left o/n at roomtemperature. The product formation was analysed by PAGE gel (see FIG.61).

Examples of building blocks used: XXVIII, XXIX, and the commerciallyavailable 4-acetoxybenzaldehyde (24, 260-8 from Sigma-Aldrich).

FIG. 60 shows a PAGE analysis of the loading of an oligo, containing amodified nucleobase with an amino group (comp. XXIV).

Lane 1 show the reference amino oligo (N).

Lane 2 show the amino oligo (N) after loading with a building blockcomprising the functional entity.

Lane 3 show removal of the functional entity, attached in lane 2, bytreatment with pH=11 for 1 hour.

Example 105 General Procedure for the Templated Synthesis of an OrganicCompound, where the Scaffold and the Substituent are Encoded by theTemplate

The template oligo (1 nmol) was mixed with an thio oligo (L or M) loadedwith a functional entity (XXIII or XVII, respectively, 1 nmol) and aminooligo 0 in hepes-buffer (20 uL of a 100 mM HEPES and 1 M NaCl solution,pH=7.5) and water (added to a final volume of 100 uL). The oligos wereannealed to the template by heating to 50° C. and cooled (−2° C./30second) to 30° C. The mixture was then left o/n at a fluctuatingtemperature (10° C. for 1 second then 35° C. for 1 second). The oligocomplex was attached to streptavidine by addition of streptavidine beads(100 uL, prewashed with 2×1 mL 100 mM hepes buffer and 1M NaCl, pH=7.5).The beads were washed with hepes buffer (1 mL). The amino oligo wasseparated from the streptavidine bound complex by addition of water (200uL) followed by heating to 70° C. for 1 minute. The water wastransferred and evaporated in vacuo, resuspended in TEAA buffer (45 uLof a 0.1 M solution) and product formation analysed by HPLC (see FIG.62).

FIG. 62 shows the transfer of a functional entity to an oligo containinga modified nucleobase with an amino group.

A) The top chromatogram show the reference amino oligo O: 5′-GAC CTG TCGAGC ATC CAG CTT CAT GGC TGA GTC CAC AAT GZ (SEQ ID NO:41). Z contain themodified nucleobase with an aminogroup, incorporated using thecommercially available amino modifier C6 dT phosphoramidite (10-1039-90from Glen research).

B) The middle chromatogram show the streptavidine purified amino oligo 0after partial transfer of a functional entity (XXIII).

C) The bottom chromatogram show the streptavidine purified amino oligo 0after the complete transfer of a more lipophilic functional entity(XVII). The following gradient was used: 0-3 minutes 100% A then 15% Aand 85% B from 3-10 minutes.

The experiment where the template oligo was omitted showed nonon-templated product formation. The results indicate that theefficiency of the templated synthesis was 80-100%. The reason for lessthan 100% efficiency was probably due to hydrolytic cleavage of thefunctional entity.

Example 106 General Procedure for the Templated Synthesis of aScaffolded Molecule, where the Scaffold and Two Identical Substituentsare Encoded by the Template

The template oligo (1 nmol) was mixed with two thio oligos (K and L)loaded with the same functional entity (XXVI; 1 nmol) and the trisamineoligo H (1 nmol) in hepes-buffer (20 uL of a 100 mM hepes and 1 M NaClsolution, pH=7.5) and water (added to a final volume of 100 uL). Theoligos were annealed to the template by heating to 50° C. and cooled(−2° C./30 second) to 30° C. The mixture was then left o/n at afluctuating temperature (10° C. for 1 second then 35° C. for 1 second).The oligo complex was attached to streptavidine by addition ofstreptavidine beads (100 uL, prewashed with 2×1 mL 100 mM hepes bufferand 1M NaCl, pH=7.5). The beads were washed with hepes buffer (1 mL).The trisamine scaffold oligo H was separated from the streptavidinebound complex by addition of water (200 uL) followed by heating to 70°C. The water was transferred and evaporated in vacuo, resuspended inTEAA buffer (45 uL of a 0.1 M solution) and product formation analysedby HPLC (see FIG. 63).

The HPLC chromatogram shows the transfer of two functional entities to ascaffold oligo with three amino groups.

A) The top chromatogram shows the reference scaffold oligo G.

B) The bottom chromatogram show the streptavidine purified scaffoldoligo G after the partial transfer of one (peak at 7.94 minutes) and two(peak at 10.76 minutes) identical functional entities (XXVI). Thefollowing gradient was used: 0-3 minutes 100% A then 15% A and 85% Bfrom 3-10 minutes then 100% B from 10-15 minutes. A=2% acetonitrile in10 mM TEAA and B=80% acetonitrile in 10 mM TEAA.

Due to the lipophilic nature of the functional entities a longerretention time, in the HPLC chromatogram, of the scaffolded moleculewith two functional entities compared to one functional entity, wasobserved. The efficiency of the templated synthesis of a scaffoldedmolecule with the two identical functional entities (XXVI) was about 25%(peak at 10.76 minutes in FIG. 63).

Example 107 Procedure for the Templated Synthesis of a ScaffoldedMolecule, where the Scaffold and the Three Substituents are Encoded bythe Template

Procedure A (5-mer zipper box): The template oligo (1 nmol) was mixedwith three thio oligos (J-L) loaded with three different functionalentity (XVI, XVII and XVIII, respectively; 1 nmol) and the trisaminescaffold oligo H (1 nmol) in hepes-buffer (20 uL of a 100 mM hepes and 1M NaCl solution, pH=7.5) and water (added to a final volume of 100 uL).The oligos were annealed to the template by heating to 50° C. and cooled(−2° C./30 second) to 30° C. The mixture was then left o/n at afluctuating temperature (10° C. for 1 second then 35° C. for 1 second).The oligo complex was attached to streptavidine by addition ofstreptavidine beads (100 uL, prewashed with 2×1 mL 100 mM hepes bufferand 1M NaCl, pH=7.5). The beads were washed with hepes buffer (1 mL).The trisamine scaffold oligo was separated from the streptavidine boundcomplex by addition of water (200 uL) followed by heating to 70° C. Thewater was transferred and evaporated in vacuo, resuspended in TEAAbuffer (45 uL of a 0.1 M solution) and formation of the encoded moleculewas identified by HPLC.

Procedure B (9-mer zipper box): The template oligo (15 pmol) was mixedwith three methylamino oligos (C-E) loaded with three differentfunctional entity (XXVII, XXIX and 4-acetoxybenzaldehyde, respectively;20 pmol) and a P³² end labelled trisamine scaffold oligo 1 (15 pmol) inhepes-buffer (6.5 uL of a 100 mM hepes and 1 M NaCl solution, pH=7.5).The mixture was heated to 58.5° C. and left at 58.5° C. for 5 days.Formation of the encoded molecule was identified by PAGE.

Example 108 (Model) Description of the Preparation of a 3-Mer β-AminoAcid Library

A) Synthesis of the n-Amino Acid Building Blocks

N-terminal protection: The Nvoc group¹(3,6-dimethoxy-6-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl) was used as a photo cleavableN-protecting group and introduced on a β-amino acid according to thefollowing method:

3-Amino-butyric acid (147 mg, 1.43 mmol) was mixed with water (10 mL),dioxane (10 mL) and 2 M NaOH (10 mL). The mixture was cooled to 0° C.and treated with Nvoc-Cl (1.58 mmol). 2 M NaOH was added in smallportions (8×1.25 mL) during 75 minutes. The cooling bath was removed andthe reaction mixture was left at room temperature o/n. Water (30 mL) wasadded and the mixture was filtered. The aqueous phase was adjusted topH=4 with 2 M HCl (aq.) and extracted with diethyl ether (3×50 mL). Thesolid was dissolved in water (50 mL) and diethyl ether (50 mL). Thecombined organic phases were dried over MgSO₄ and evaporated in vacuoaffording 176 mg (36%) pure3-(4,5-dimethoxy-2-nitro-benzyloxycarbonylamino)butyric acid. ¹H-NMR(CDCl₃): 7.72 (s, 1H), 7.02 (s, 1H), 5.51 (s, 2H), 5.40-5.30 (br s, 1H),4.15 (m, 1H), 3.96 (s, 3H), 3.92 (s, 3H), 2.60 (d, 2H), 1.31 (d, 3H).¹Burgess et al. J Org. Chem. (1997), 62, 5165-68, Alvarez et al. J. Org.Chem. (1999), 64, 6319-28 and Pedersen et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.(1998), 95, 10523-28

β-Alanin, cis-2-amino-1-cyclohexanecarboxylic acid,trans-2-Amino-1-cyclohexane carboxylic acid,cis-2-amino-1-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid,cis-2-amino-4-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid,trans-2-amino-4-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid, 3-amino-4,4,4-trifluorobutyric acid, 3-amino-4-methylpentanoic acid, DL-3-aminoisobutyric acidmonohydrate, 3-amino-3-phenylpropionic acid, 2-fluoro-3-aminopropionicacid hydrochloride are protected similarly.

C-terminal activation: The NHM (N-hydroxymaleimide) ester of the N-Nvocprotected O-amino acid was used and prepared according to the followingmethod, exemplified using3-(4,5-dimethoxy-2-nitro-benzyloxycarbonylamino)-3-phenyl-propionicacid:

3-(4,5-dimethoxy-2-nitro-benzyloxycarbonylamino)-butyric acid (418 mg,1.22 mmol) was dissolved in THF (10 mL), N-hydroxymaleimide (1.22 mmol)was added and the mixture was cooled to 0° C. Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide(1.22 mmol) was added and the reaction mixture was left o/n at roomtemperature. The solvent was removed by evaporation in vacuo and theproduct isolated by silica column purification using EtOAc-heptane (1:4then 1:2 then 1:1) as eluent. Yield 219 mg (42%) of pure3-(4,5-dimethoxy-2-nitro-benzyloxycarbonylamino)-butyric acid2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester. ¹H-NMR (CDCl₃): 7.73 (s, 1H),7.03 (s, 1H), 6.81 (s, 2H), 5.55 (dd, 2H), 5.30-5.20 (br s, 1H), 4.25(m, 1H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 3.97 (s, 3H), 2.86 (m, 2H), 1.39 (d, 3H).

The N-Nvoc protected analogues of β-Alanin,cis-2-amino-1-cyclohexanecarboxylic acid,trans-2-Amino-1-cyclohexanecarboxylic acid,cis-2-amino-1-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid,cis-2-amino-4-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid,trans-2-amino-4-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid,3-amino-4,4,4-trifluorobutyric acid, 3-amino-4-methylpentanoic acid,DL-3-aminoisobutyric acid monohydrate, 3-amino-3-phenylpropionic acid,2-fluoro-3-aminopropionic acid hydrochloride, are activated similarly.

B) Preparation of Building Block Oligos:

A thio oligo (1 nmol) is treated with3-(4,5-dimethoxy-2-nitro-benzyloxycarbonylamino)-3-phenyl-propionic acid2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl ester (50 uL of 0.1 M solution inDMF). The mixture is left o/n at room temperature. The building blockoligo is spinned down (20.000 G for 15 minutes) and the DMF is removed.DMF (1 mL) is added, the building block oligo is spinned down (20.000 Gfor 15 minutes) and the DMF is removed.

The N-Nvoc protected C-terminal NHM activated analogues of β-Alanin,cis-2-amino-1-cyclohexanecarboxylic acid,trans-2-Amino-1-cyclohexanecarboxylic acid,cis-2-amino-1-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid,cis-2-amino-4-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid,trans-2-amino-4-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid,3-amino-4,4,4-trifluorobutyric acid, 3-amino-4-methylpentanoic acid,DL-3-aminoisobutyric acid monohydrate, DL-beta-aminobutyric acid,2-fluoro-3-aminopropionic acid hydrochloride, are loaded on 11 differentthio oligos similarly.

In the following any four of the prepared building block oligos areselected and used for library production.

C) Production of a 64-Member (4³) 3-Mer β-Peptide Library:

The sequence for the building block oligos are shown below. Thenucleotides in bold constitute the complementing element and underlinedthe 5-mer zipperbox. FE¹⁻⁴ is the attached functional entities (4different N-Nvoc protected β-amino acids) and B is an internal biotin.

1) (SEQ ID NO: 42) 5′-FE¹-CAT TGT TTT TTT TTT TBT TTT TTT TTT TGCATA CAA CTA TGT A 2) (SEQ ID NO: 43)5′-FE²-CAT TGT TTT TTT TTT TBT TTT TTT TTT TGC ATA CGG CTA TGT A 3)(SEQ ID NO: 44) 5′-FE³-CAT TGT TTT TTT TTT TBT TTT TTT TTT TGCATA CGA CTA TGT A 4) (SEQ ID NO: 45)5′-FE⁴-CAT TGT TTT TTT TTT TTT TTT TTT TTT TGC ATA CAG CTA TGT A 5)(SEQ ID NO: 46) 3′-FE¹-GTA ACT TTT TTT TTT TBT TTT TTT TTT TATGCG TAA AGC CAT G 6) (SEQ ID NO: 47)3′-FE²-GTA ACT TTT TTT TTT TBT TTT TTT TTT TAT GCG TGG AGC CAT G 7)(SEQ ID NO: 48) 3′-FE³-GTA ACT TTT TTT TTT TBT TTT TTT TTT TATGCG TGA AGC CAT G 8) 3′-FE⁴-GTA ACT TTT TTT TTT TTT TTT TTT TTT TATGCG TAG AGC CAT G

(SEQ ID NO:49)

64 template oligos (2 pmol each) consisting of 3 coding regions aremixed with four different building block oligos (1-4, 200 pmol each) andhepes buffer (20 uL, 100 mM hepes buffer and 1 M NaCl, pH=7.5). Water isadded to a final volume of 1000 uL. The oligos are annealed to thetemplates by heating to 50° C. and cooled (−2° C./30 second) to 20° C.The Nvoc-protecting groups are removed by degassing thoroughly with Ar,followed by exposure to a mercury lamp (450 W HPLC mercury lamp, pyrexfilter, cutoff<300 nm) for 1-2 hours. The mixture is left o/n at afluctuating temperature (10° C. for 1 second then 35° C. for 1 second).

Formation of the encoded molecules in the library production isaddressed in two separate experiments, where only one template is usedin each experiment. The first template (3′-CGT ATG TTG ATA CAT AAT AACGTA TGT TGA TAC ATA ATA ACG TAT GTT GAT ACA T (SEQ ID NO:50)) encode forthe formation the 3-mer β-peptide of β-alanin and the other template(3-CGT ATG CCG ATA CAT AAT AAC GTA TGC CGA TAC ATA ATA ACG TAT GCC GATACA T (SEQ ID NO:51)) for the formation of 3-mer 6-peptide of3-amino-4,4,4-trifluorobutyric acid.

A template oligo (2 pmol) consisting of 3 coding regions are mixed withfour different building block oligos (1-4, 200 pmol each) and hepesbuffer (20 uL, 100 mM hepes buffer and 1 M NaCl, pH=7.5). Water is addedto a final volume of 100 uL. The oligos are annealed to the templates byheating to 50° C. and cooled (−2° C./30 second) to 20° C. TheNvoc-protecting groups are removed by degassing thoroughly with Ar,followed by exposure to a mercury lamp (450 W HPLC mercury lamp, pyrexfilter, cutoff<300 nm) for 1-2 hours. The mixture is left o/n at afluctuating temperature (10° C. for 1 second then 35° C. for 1 second).The oligo complex is attached to streptavidine by addition ofstreptavidine beads (100 uL, prewashed with 2×1 mL 100 mM hepes bufferand 1M NaCl, pH=7.5). The beads are washed with hepes buffer (1 mL). Thebuilding block oligo, containing the encoded product, is separated fromthe streptavidine bound complex by addition of water (200 uL) followedby heating to 70° C. The water is transferred and product formationverified by MS analysis.

Example 109 (Model) Description of the Preparation of a 3-Mer 13-AminoAcid Library A) Synthesis of the β-Amino Acid Building Blocks

N-terminal protection: The Nvoc group(3,6-dimethoxy-6-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl) was used as a photo cleavableN-protecting group and introduced on a β-amino acid according to themethod described above.

C-terminal activation: The N-Nvoc protected O-amino acid was activatedusing the known 1-(4-hydroxy-phenyl)-pyrrole-2,5-dione (Choi et al. Mol.Cryst. Liq. Cryst. Sci. Technol. Sect. A (1996), 280, 17-26), accordingto the following method:

1-(4-Hydroxy-phenyl)-pyrrole-2,5-dione (1 mmol), NHS (1.0 mmol) and3-(4,5-dimethoxy-2-nitro-benzyloxycarbonylamino)-butyric acid (1 mmol)is dissolved in THF (3 mL). The solution is cooled to 0° C. and treateddropwise with DIC (1.2 mmol). The cooling bath is removed after 1 hourand the reaction mixture is left at room temperature o/n. The solvent isevaporated in vacuo and the pure product (3-(4,5-dimethoxy-2-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl-amino)-butyric acid4-(2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl)-phenyl ester) is isolated bysilica column purification using EtOAc-heptane (1:4 then 1:2 then 1:1)as eluent.

The N-Nvoc protected analogues of β-Alanin,cis-2-amino-1-cyclohexanecarboxylic acid,trans-2-Amino-1-cyclohexanecarboxylic acid,cis-2-amino-1-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid,cis-2-amino-4-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid,trans-2-amino-4-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid,3-amino-4,4,4-trifluorobutyric acid, 3-amino-4-methylpentanoic acid,DL-3-aminoisobutyric acid monohydrate, DL-beta-aminobutyric acid,2-fluoro-3-aminopropionic acid hydrochloride, are C-terminal activatedsimilarly.

B) Preparation of Building Block Oligos:

A thio oligo (2 nmol) in water (25 uL) is treated with3-(4,5-dimethoxy-2-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl-amino)-butyric acid4-(2,5-dioxo-2,5-dihydro-pyrrol-1-yl)-phenyl ester (25 uL of a 10 mMsolution in MeOH). The mixture is left o/n at room temperature. Thebuilding block oligo is purified by a conventional EtOH-precipitation.The pellet is washed with dichloromethane (3×300 uL) and dried in vacuo.

The N-Nvoc protected C-terminal activated analogues of β-Alanin,cis-2-amino-1-cyclohexane-carboxylic acid,trans-2-Amino-1-cyclohexanecarboxylic acid,cis-2-amino-1-cyclopentane-carboxylic acid,cis-2-amino-4-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid,trans-2-amino-4-cyclohexene-1-carboxylic acid,3-amino-4,4,4-trifluorobutyric acid, 3-amino-4-methylpentanoic acid,DL-3-aminoisobutyric acid monohydrate, DL-beta-aminobutyric acid,2-fluoro-3-aminopropionic acid hydrochloride, are loaded on 11 differentthio oligos similarly.

Any four of the prepared building block oligos are selected and used forlibrary production as described above.

Example 110 (Model) In the Following, a Library Preparation Method Basedon Oligonucleotide Templates and 5′-Phophoimidazolid Nucleoside BuildingBlocks is Described Preparation of Building Blocks

Step A: Preparation of an Ester Linker with a Terminal Alkyne.

The acid derivative (10.37 mmol) is dissolved in DCM (20 mL) and cooledto 0° C. on an ice bath. EDC (12.44 mmol, 1.2 equiv) is added followedby DMAP (1.04 mmol, 0.1 equiv) and the alcohol (15.55 mmol, 1.5 equiv)in DCM (5 mL). After 1 h reaction on ice bath, the mixture is allowed tocome to 20° C. and left to react 16 h. Volatiles are removed and theresidue is taken up in diethylether (150 mL) and HCl (aq, 0.1 M, 75 mL).The phases are separated and the organic phase is first washed with amixture of NaHCO₃ (sat, 35 mL) and water (35 mL) then with water (75mL). Upon evaporation of diethylether, the product is azeotropicallydried using toluene (2×120 mL) affording the desired ester that may bepurified by chromatography if necessary.

Step B: Introduction of Protective Groups on Iodo SubstitutedNucleosides.

The nucleoside (5.65 mmol, 1 eq), TBDMS-Cl (2.04 g, 13.56 mmol, 2.4 eq)and imidazole (1.85 g, 27.11 mmol, 4.8 eq) are mixed in DMF (20 mL) andstirred at 25° C. overnight. EtOAc (400 mL) is added and the organicphase is washed with a mixture of NH₄Cl(aq) (sat, 40 mL)+H₂O (40 mL)followed by H₂O (80 mL). The organic phase is stripped and the residueis taken up in toluene, filtered and stripped to leave the desiredprotected nucleoside. The compound may be further purified byrecrystallization.

Step C: Sonogashira Coupling of Protected Iodo Substituted Nucleosidesand Terminal Alkenes

A DMF solution (20 mL) of the protected iodo substituted nucleoside (3.4mmol), the alkyne (6.9 mmol, 2 eq), DIEA (2.5 mL) is purged with Ar for5 min. Tetrakis triphenylphosphine palladium (0.3 mmol, 0.1 eq) and CuI(0.7 mmol, 0.2 eq) is added and the mixture is heated to 50° C. and keptthere for 20 h. Upon cooling, the mixture is added 700 mL diethylether.The organic phase is washed with ammonium chloride (sat, aq, 250 mL) andwater (250 mL). Evaporation of volatiles followed by stripping withtoluene (400 mL) affords the desired modified nucleoside that ispurified by column chromatography (silica gel, Heptane/Ethyl acetateeluent).

Step D: Removal of OH Protective Groups

A THF solution of the above product (1.8 mmol in 30 mL) is added aceticacid (0.8 mL, 14.1 mmol, 8 eq) and tetrabutylammonium fluoride (7 mmol,4 eq). Upon stirring at 20° C. for 20 h, volatiles are removed in vacuoand the residue is purified by column chromatography (silica gel,DCM/Methanol eluent).

Step E: Mono-Phosphate Synthesis

A slurry of the modified nucleoside obtained in step D (1.65 mmol) intrimethyl phosphate (5 mL) is cooled to 0° C. and addedphosphoroxytrichloride (190 uL, 307 mg, 2 mmol, 1.2 eq). The reaction iskept at 0° C. for 2 h. Tributyl amine (1 mL) is added and the reactionis allowed to come to 20° C. Another portion of tributyl amine (1.3 mL)is added to raise pH, followed by water. Volatiles are removed in vacuoand the residue may be purified using ion-exchange chromatography(Sephadex A25, tetraethylammonium bromide buffer 0.05-1.0 M, pH 7).

Step F: Phosphoimidazolid Synthesis

To a solution of the above mono-phosphate derivative (0.1 M) is added2-methylimidazole (0.5 M) and EDC (0.5 M) at pH 6.5 and 0° C. Thereaction is stirred for 2 h maintaining a temperature of 0° C. Themixture may be used directly in library synthesis. [Visscher; 1988;Journal of Molecular Evolution; 3-6]

Alternatively, treatment of phophates with carbonyl diimidazole alsoaffords phophoimidazolides. [Zhao; 1998; J. Org. Chem.; 7568-7572]

A Collection of Building Blocks

In the the scheme below a number of building blocks useful for librarysynthesis is shown. All building blocks have functional entitiesattached to the recognition element by means of an carboxylic ester andmay be synthesized as described above.

Library Preparation

The scheme below exemplifies the process of making a library ofpolyamides using oligonucleotide templates and phosphoimidazolidbuilding blocks shown above. An oligonucleotide primer sequence with asequence modifier carrying an (optionally) protected amine (e.g. GlenResearch Amino-Modifier C2 dT, cat no 10-1019-) is annealed to thetemplates used in the library. Further, another oligonucleotide sequenceis annealed as a terminating sequence thus exposing only the part of thetemplate coding the building block incorporation. For clarity, the basesof the phosphoimidazolid building blocks have been replaced with largebold letter codes.

Incorporation

Typical conditions for oligomerisation of building blocks on thetemplate are 0.05 M templates, 0.1-0.2 M building blocks, in a 0.2 M2,6-lutidine.HCl buffer adjusted to pH=7.2 buffer containing 1.0 Msodium chloride 0.2 M magnesium chloride. The temperature is kept at 0°C. for 1-21 days. [Inoue; 1984; Journal of Molecular Biology; 669-676].The oligonucleotide complexes may be purified using micro-spin gelfiltration (BioRad).

Amine Deprotection

Cbz protection groups may be removed by a variety of methods, [Greene;1999;] Due to its mildness, catalytic reduction is often the method ofchoice. Combining an insoluble hydrogenation catalyst e.g. Pd/Al₂O₃,Pd/CaCO₃, Pd/C, PtO₂, or a soluble one e.g. Wilkinsons catalyst and ahydrogen source exemplified but not limited to H₂, ammonium formiate,formic acid, 1,4-cyclohexadien, and cyclohexene in a suitable solventlike water, methanol, ethanol, dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide,ethylen glycol, acetonitril, acetic acid or a mixture of these with theoligo nucleotide complexes removes the Cbz protective groups.

Polymerisation

Di-amines are linked together using di-carboxylic acids, a peptidecoupling reagent optionally in the presence of a peptide couplingmodifier in a suitable solvent like water, methanol, ethanol,dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, ethylene glycol, acetonitrile or amixture of these. To an aqueous buffered solution (10 uL, 1M NaCl,100-500 mM buffer pH 6-10, preferably 7-9) of oligonucleotide complexes(0.1-100 uM, preferably 0.5-10 uM) carrying free di-amines is added adi-carboxylic acid (0.1 mM-100 mM, preferably 1-10 mM) exemplified bybut not limited to oxalic-, malonic-, succinic-, pentanedioic- orhexanedioic acid, phthalic-, isophthalic, terephthalic acid, N-protectedglutamic acid or N-protected aspartic acid mixed with a peptide couplingreagent (0.1 mM-100 mM, preferably 1-10 mM) exemplified by but notlimited to EDC, DCC, DIC, HATU, HBTU, PyBoP, PyBroP orN-methyl-2-chloropyridinium tetrafluoroborate and a peptide couplingmodifier (0.1 mM-100 mM, preferably 1-10 mM) exemplified by but notlimited to NHS, sulpho-NHS, HOBt, HOAt, DhbtOH in a suitable solvent (1uL) e.g. water, methanol, ethanol, dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide,ethylene glycol, acetonitrile or a mixture of these.

Reactions run at temperatures between −20° C. and 100° C., preferablybetween 0° C. and 60° C. Reaction times are between 1 h and 1 week,preferably 1 h-24 h. The above procedure exemplifies the polymerisationon a 11 uL scale, but any other reaction volume between 1.1 uL and 1.1 Lmay be employed.

Linker Cleavage

The ester linkages are cleaved with aqueous hydroxide at pH 9-12 at roomtemperature, 16 h in a suitable solvent like water, methanol, ethanol,dimethylformamide, dimethylsulfoxide, ethylene glycol, acetonitrile or amixture of these.

MS-Analysis

Library members may be analyzed using Mass Spectroscopy.

In the above sequence, diamines carry Cbz protection groups and aredeprotected on the oligonucleotide. Other protection schemes may also berelevant for amine protection. [Greene and Wuts; 1999;] In some cases itmay suffice running the sequence with building blocks that do not carryprotective groups on the amines, hence eliminating the aminedeprotection step. The described procedure for templated librarysynthesis may also employ the use of modified di- and tri-nucleotides aswell as modified nucleic acid analogues like morpholinos, LNA and PNA.In the latter case reaction conditions during incorporation should bechanged to accommodate peptide coupling reactions. [Schmidt; 1997;Nucleic Acids Research; 4792-4796] Examples of such alternative buildingblocks are shown in the scheme below. Synthesis of the modified PNAunits compared to ordinary PNA units differs only in the use of modifiedbases.

Further, instead of using 5′-phosphoimidazolide-nucleosides, a mixtureof bis-3′,5′ phosphoimidazolide-nucleosides [Visscher and Schwartz;1988; Journal of Molecular Evolution; 3-6] and nucleosides may beemployed in library production, see below. Alternating incorporation ofeach building block type is required, but due to the reversibility ofthe recognition step and the fact that no reaction takes place if forinstance two bis-3′,5′ phosphoimidazolide-nucleosides are placed next toeach other all that is necessary is that both building block types arepresent in the mixture.

REFERENCES

-   (1) Visscher, J.; Schwartz, A. W. Journal of Molecular Evolution    1988, 28, 3-6.-   (2) Zhao, Y.; Thorson, J. S. J. Org. Chem. 1998, 63, 7568-7572.-   (3) Inoue, T.; Joyce, G. F.; Grzeskowiak, K.; Orgel, L. E.;    Brown, J. M.; Reese, C. B. Journal of Molecular Biology 1984, 178,    669-676.-   (4) Greene, T. W.; Wuts, P. G. M. Protective Groups in Organic    Synthesis; 3rd ed.; John Wiley & Sons: New York, 1999.-   (5) Schmidt, J. G.; Christensen, L.; Nielsen, P. E.; Orgel, L. E.    Nucleic Acids Research 1997, 25, 4792-4796.

Example 111 (Model) Synthesis of a Library of Templated Molecules byNon-enzymatic Ligation of Dinucleotides Comprising Functional Entities

Several systems have been developed that enable the non-enzymaticchemical ligation of nucleotides and oligonucleotides on nucleic acid orPNA templates (Xu et al., 2001, Nat Biotechnol 19, 148-152; 2000, J AmChem Soc, 122, 9040-41). One protocol describes the autoligation of3′-phosphothioate and a 5′moiety comprising an iodine leaving group asshown below.

The non-enzymatic ligation protocol can be used for the templatedsynthesis of a library of molecules. Here, a set of dinucleotides eachcomprising a unique functional entity was synthesised by modifiedphosphoamidite nucleotide chemistry as described below. 4 di-nucleotidebuilding blocks with the sequences dUdNp were synthesised. Eachdi-nucleotide comprises a 5′-iodo- and a 3′-phosphothioate group capableof forming a covalent bond with a neighbouring reactive group.

Incorporation of Di-Nucleotides on a DNA Template:

1 pmol each of extension primers A (5′-GCTACTGGCATCGXG-3′-phosphothioate(SEQ ID NO:52), where X denotes deoxythymidine-C6-NH₂, Glen ResearchCat#: 10-1035-90) and B (5′-iodo-GCACTTGCAGACAGC-3′ (SEQ ID NO:53)) areannealed to a template oligo (5′GCTGTCTGCAAGTGCNANACACGATGCCAGTAGC-3′(SEQ ID NO:54)) in a binding buffer: 50 mM HEPES-KOH, pH=7.5, 5 mMMgCl₂, 100 mM, KCl and incubated at 80° C. for 2 minutes before slowlycooling down to 20° C. The binding of primer A and B to the templateforms a double stranded DNA complex with a central 4 nucleotidesingle-stranded segment as shown below. 10 pmol of di-nucleotides areadded and the reaction mixture is incubated at 4° C. for 30 min followedby a brief heating to 25° C. for 30 seconds. The reaction mixture issubjected to successive temperature oscillation cycles for 24 hours.This step promotes the chemical ligation between correctly annealeddinucleotides and the primers A and B.

Following template complementation and chemical ligation, dinucleotidesand buffer are removed by micro-spin gelfiltration (Biorad).

Cross-Linking of Functional Entities and Activation of TemplatedMolecules.

The DNA complexes comprising the functional entities are incubated in abuffer 20 mM HEPES-KOH pH=7.5, 100 mM KCl. 5 mMBis[Sulfosuccinimidyl]suberate (BS₃, Pierce) is added and the sample isincubated at 30° C. for 2-8 hours. Buffer and excess BS₃ are removed bymicro-spin gelfiltration (Biorad). The templated molecules are activatedby cleavage of the ester linkages using 0.2 M NaOH at 50° C. for 15 minbefore addition of equimolar HCl. The sample is transferred to asuitable buffer by dialysis.

This protocol allows for the synthesis of a small library of 16different molecules each linked to their template applicable forselection/amplification experiments. Larger libraries can be synthesisedusing tri-, tetra-, or other oligonucleotides comprising functionalentities and/or by increasing the number of building blocks to becoupled by non-enzymatic ligation on the DNA template.

Synthesis of Building Blocks: Synthesis of 5′-iodo-3′-phosphonothioatedimers with a functional entity attached

a) Conventional phosphoramidite coupling; b) S₈ in pyridine; c)phosphoramidite coupling to introduce 5-I-dU; d) CF₃COOH thenI₂/pyridine/water; e) FE-spacer and Pd(0) in THF-Et₃N; f) Ph₃P and I₂ inDMF; g) photolysis >300 nm.

B equals either A, T, G or C properly protected with the photolabileprotecting group Nvoc². Linker equals a photolabile CPG solid support.³R equals a photolabile phosphate protecting group.⁴ ²Alvarez et al. J.Org. Chem. (1999), 64, 6319-28³Pirrung et al. J. Org. Chem. (1998), 63,241-46⁴Givens and Kueper Chem. Rev. (1991), 93, 55

Examples of attachment points (indicated by an arrow) of the linker onthe nucleobases.

Examples of linker (indicated by dotted ring) and functional entity

Example 112 Ligation of DNA Oligonucleotides, Derivatized at the CentralNucleotide

In order to examine the substrate efficiency of various DNAoligo-derivatives for T4 DNA ligase, oligo-derivatives Ah17 and Ah19 andwere annealed to templates Ah18 and Ah20, respectively. Each of thetemplates contain two annealing sites for the appropriate oligo. Theoligo-derivatives contain a modified nucleotide at the centralnucleotide position (see figure below).

The reaction may be schematically represented as indicated below:

X=Amino-Modifier C6 dT

Ah 17: (SEQ ID NO: 55) 5′-CACXGAA Ah 18: (SEQ ID NO: 56)5′-TCGGATTCAGTGTTCAGTGCGTAG Ah 19: (SEQ ID NO: 57) 5′-TGCACXGAAGC Ah20:(SEQ ID NO: 58) 5′-TCGGAGCTTCAGTGCAGCTTCAGTGCACGTAG

Mix 0.5 μl buffer A, 0.5 μl Ah18 or Ah20 (1 μmol/μl), and 2 μl Ah17 orAh18 (³²P-labelled) (1 μmol/μl). Anneal by heating to 80° C. and thencool to 10° C. Add 3 μl T4-DNA Ligase (TAKARA, code #6022). Incubate at4.7° C. for about 48 h. Then analyze by 10% urea polyacrylamide gelelectrophoresis.

As seen in FIG. 64, the DNA ligase is able to efficiently ligate botholigo-derivatives tested, i.e. even for the shortest oligo (Ah17), witha length of 7 nucleotides, and a modification at position 4, ligationgoes to approximately 50% completion.

1.-40. (canceled)
 41. A composition of more than 10³ different cyclicmolecules each comprising a plurality of covalently linked amino acidresidues and a polynucleotide identifying the cyclic molecule, eachcyclic molecule being covalently linked by means of a covalent linker tosaid polynucleotide.
 42. The composition according to claim 41, whereinthe polynucleotide is a double stranded polynucleotide.
 43. Thecomposition according to claim 41, wherein the cyclic molecule isselected from the group consisting of α-peptides, β-peptides, γ-peptidesand ω-peptides.
 44. The composition according to claim 41, wherein thecovalently linked, amino acid residues are selected from natural aminoacids and non-natural amino acids, including a combination of both. 45.The composition according to claim 41, wherein the cyclic moleculecomprises amino acids selected from the group consisting of α-aminoacids, β-amino acids, γ-amino acids and γ-amino acids.
 46. Thecomposition according to claim 41, wherein the covalently linked, aminoacid residues form a peptide having more than one portion, wherein atleast one portion of the peptide is selected from the group consistingof an α-peptide portion, a β-peptide portion, a γ-peptide portion, and aγ-peptide portion.
 47. The composition according to claim 41, whereinthe cyclic molecule comprises L-form amino acids and D-form amino acids.48. The composition according to claim 41, wherein the cyclic moleculeand the polynucleotide identifying said cyclic molecule are linked by asingle linker.
 49. The composition according to claim 41, wherein thecyclic molecule contains from 2 to 10 amino acid residues.
 50. Thecomposition according to claim 41, wherein the cyclic molecule containsfrom 3 to 8 amino acid residues.
 51. The composition according to claim41, wherein the cyclic molecule contains from 4 to 6 amino acidresidues.
 52. The composition according to claim 41, wherein the cyclicmolecule is a monofunctional, difunctional, trifunctional orpolyfunctional heterocycle.
 53. The composition according to claim 41,wherein the cyclic molecule is a monocyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic orpolycyclic heterocycle.
 54. The composition according to claim 41,wherein the cyclic molecule is a bridged, polycyclic heterocycle.